Home

Roland Fantom user manual

1. ULTTTIMERE PLAY USER 01 FANTOM Temp g C REYAL 22 ternal So Beto Mense fcres amo aQ Partch So Mu Patch Volume Pan User Library Control Ch OFF 3120 SJE RPRST O11 XU Pop Kit 166 5 com 1 PR A EES Grand XU 16 5 n USER 01 FANTOM T 22 PR B 046 XU Rc Bass io0 X 0 or emp LE PR A 901 Grand XU 100 m 5 n 4 4 PR R 8001 Grand XU 100 m 5 Partch Se Mu Patch Volume Pan b Sis PR R 8801 Grand XU 100 m 17 LL ET R PRST O11 XU Pop Kit 100 0 m 35 6 6 PR R 8001 Grand XU 100 0 or LAU E PR HIOO1 Grand xy M cl A 7 PR R 801 Grand XU 10 5 1 212 PR B 048 XU Ac Bass 66m 0 Com JE PR A 001 Grand XU i 0 e 9 H s Favorite Sound Bank1 CNE PR R 001 Grand XV i 0 _ Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient Bend ac Soaring Sis PR R 001 Grand XU i 8m 8 or rp E Es Fr ime 6 5 PR A 001 Grand XU i 0 0 ZH PR R 8001 Grand XU 166 G H Selecting a Part to Play 4 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the song Individually Solo that you wish to play back You can have only the performance of a specific part be played when z playing back a song When your cursor is located at the song file name you can press LIST to open the Song List window and select a song from a 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106
2. COR oon Temp General Part Grand XV PNO Part 1 m1 2 3 4 A Patch Rhythm PAT PAT PAT PAT MDI Patch Bank PRA PRE PRA PRA Effects Patch Number 681 945 eet eet MFX Level 10e tee tea tee o e s a e MFX Control Coarse Tune e s e e Chorus Fine Tune 6 6 g a Reverb Mono Poly PAT PAT PAT PAT x pa D Bind a L J Write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Multitimbre Settings p 112 Patch Rhythm Patch Rhythm Set Sets the assignment of a patch PAT or rhythm set RHY to each of the parts Patch Bank Selects the group to which the desired Patch or Rhythm Set belongs Value USR User PRA E Preset A E GM GM GM2 XPA C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots Patch Number Selects the desired patch or rhythm set by its number Value 001 Level Part Level Adjust the volume of each part This setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between parts Value 0 127 Pan Part Pan Adjust the pan of each part L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R Coarse Tune Part Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Coarse Tune and Octave Shift The Coarse Tune and Fine Tune parameters along with the Octa
3. HINT The gate time that is recorded in step recording will be the original gate time value multiplied by the value of the Gate Ratio parameter For example if the Gate Ratio parameter is set to 80 inputting a quarter note will mean that the gate time is 480 x 0 8 384 133 Recording Songs Recording Songs Inputting a Chord Press the chord A chord will be input when you release all keys simultaneously The chord will not be input as long as even one key remains pressed so you can change the keys being pressed to correct the chord Inputting a Tie After specifying the Step Time parameter for the note that you want to tie press 7 Tie For example if you want to tie a quarter note after a half note input the half note and then set the Step Time parameter to J and press 7 Tie Inputting a Rest Set the Step Time parameter to the length of the desired rest and press 8 Rest Assigning a Pattern to a Phrase Track You can create a song by combining previously recorded patterns This is done using step recording to assign patterns to a phrase track However please be aware that the patterns themselves are not placed in the phrase track Rather Pattern Call messages are placed in the phrase track to specify which pattern should be played back This means that if you later modify the contents of a pattern the song playback will al
4. General EQ Sequencer EB Switch ON MIDI Output RKD 1 ACR 2 BXOD 3 BXD 4 arom LowFreq 2eeHz 200Hz 288Hz A Low Gain BiB EE High Freq Hz 2888Hz Preview High Gain ga soe rne E R AR gt 2 B S BCR 4 a X Write J Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 MEM Equalizer settings are made separately for each output jack Output A L 1 OUTPUT A MIX jack L MONO INDIVIDUAL 1 jack Output A R 2 OUTPUT A MIX jack R INDIVIDUAL 2 jack Output B L 3 OUTPUT B jack L INDIVIDUAL 3 jack Output B R 4 OUTPUT B jack R INDIVIDUAL 4 jack EQ EQ Switch Equalizer Switch Switch the equalizer on off Value BYPASS ON Low Freq Low Frequency Selects the frequency of the low range Value 200 400 Hz Low Gain Adjusts the gain of the low frequency Positive 4 settings will emphasize the low frequency range Value 15 15 dB High Freq High Frequency Selects the frequency of the high range Value 2000 4000 8000 Hz High Gain Adjusts the gain of the high frequency Positive settings will emphasize the high frequency range Value 15 15 dB Phrase Preview Settings Preview Specify how the phrase will sound when you press 8 Prevu in the Patch List window General Preview Sequencer Preview Mode PHRASE MIDI 1 2 3 4 Wote Humber cs c4 cs fce Velocity 127 1
5. s s s s s e s s 5 Ei r3 Ei ri 7 Ei Floppy Disk Drive 3 5 2DD 2HD floppy disks can be used To remove the disk press the eject button located at the right of the disk drive Mb Subsequently this manual will abbreviate floppy disk as disk 2 D BEAM You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your hand p 162 ON OFF Switches the D Beam controller on off 3 Volume Slider Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack Quick Start p 4 4 REALTIME CONTROL You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the four knobs and four buttons and use them to modify the sound in realtime p 163 0110 The operation will depend on the parameter or function that is assigned 16 EB LE3 The operation will depend on the parameter or function that is assigned 5 Perform functions related to the arpeggiator rhythm pattern function and sequencer playback and recording ARPEGGIO Switches the Arpeggiator on off RHYTHM Switches Rhythm pattern function on off RESET Moves the song position to the first measure p 124 BWD Moves the song position to the first beat of the previous measure gt p 124 FWD Moves the song position to the first beat of the next measure p 124 STOP PLAY Con
6. La A t 100 m 6 or 2 2 t 106 es 0 or 3 166 m 0 n 414 PR R 8001 Grand XU 166 m 0 H S s PR R 001 Grand XU 166 m 0 B PR A 901 Grand XU 100 m 0 H Lg PR R 001 Grand XU 100 m 0 H Favorite Sound Banki Blues Ha xv Trum ambient Bend a C Soaring ire pet Sax hord Hrns2 Now you can perform Loop playback for the region and number of times specified in the Loop window IB For details on making settings in the Loop window refer to Specifying the Area of a Song that will Repeat Loop Points p 139 125 Playing Back a Song Playing Back a Song Using the D Beam Controller to Start Stop Song Playback You can start stop song playback by passing your hand over the D Beam controller 1 2 pw 9 Select the song that you want to play back p 122 Hold down JUMP and press D BEAM ON OFF The D Beam window appears Switch OFF Assign BREATH RA Polarity STANDARD Range 8 E 127 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Assign Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set this to START STOP Press D BEAM ON OFF to turn on the D Beam controller When you pass your hand across the D Beam controller song playback will start When you pass your hand across it once again playback will stop HINT You can also start stop song playback by using a pe
7. Category Contents The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1 ER No Assign No assign octave units 3 3 octaves PNO AC Piano Acoustic Piano For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand transpose EP EL Piano Electric Piano the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves KEY Keyboards Other Keyboards 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 Clav Harpsichord etc BEL Bell Bell Bell Pad 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Oct MLT Mallet Mallet Hew Song M 1 4 4 sroP ORG Organ Electric and Church Organ E faa _Internalsons ACD Accordion Accordion PATCH User Library Chi Tx 1 Rx 1 J 120 HRM Harmonica Harmonica Blues Harp USER 001 GenerationXV AGT AC Guitar Acoustic Guitar Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DO EGT EL Guitar Electric Guitar D Beam MFX LoFi Compress DGT DIST Guitar Distortion Guitar 7 ni REV SRU Han BS Bass Acoustic amp Electric Bass ligase Resonance Breath O Decay Tine SBS Syn th Bass Synth Bass ao inni E Monopoly P oct Down KJ octup Favorite Sound Bank STR Strings Strings Bless ree pros Rege enis p ORC Orchestra Orchestra Ensemble 3 Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to specify the WND Wind Winds Oboe Clarinet etc P amount of pitch shift 3 3 octaves FLT Flute Flute Piccolo BRS AC Brass Acoustic Brass NOTE SBR Synth Brass Synth Brass There is a single Octave Shift setting Setup
8. Step Time MERE 480 Gate Time 5e 384 Velocity REAL Note Br Tie Rest 7 Specify the note that you want to input Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting Step Time Specify the length of the notes that you want to input in terms of a note value The length of the note value indicates the length from one note on to the next note on Value 2 fo 8 4 Fi ds r Fi dai 4 45 da d d Gate Time Gate Time Ratio Specify the proportion of the gate time relative to the step time The gate time is the length between note on and note off Specify a lower value if you want the notes to be played staccato or a higher value if you want the notes to be played tenuto or as a slur Normally you will set this to about 80 Value 1 100 Velocity Specify the strength with which the note will be played If you want this to be the strength with which you actually pressed the key select REAL Otherwise use settings of p piano 60 mf mezzo forte 90 or f forte 120 as general guidelines Value 1 127 8 Press a key on the keyboard When you press a key the display will indicate the MIDI channel Ch note name Note velocity Vel and gate time Gate of that note HINT The note will not be finalized as long as you hold down the key This means that you will
9. Switch Accent Rate 160 Hold OH Shuffle Rate 58 Style R amp B 4 Shuffle Resolution 7 Key Trigger orF Velocity REAL Tempo lt SEQ gt 126 Note Assign c4 COPPER PP E PII E OPI E PI Y UII YT 5 Specify how the Rhythm pattern will be played HINT Of all the Rhythm pattern parameters the Style Pattern Style setting is particularly important The playback pattern of the rhythm is determined mainly by this selection For details refer to Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn p 75 6 After completing your settings press 8 Close to close the Rhythm Pattern window 110 Playing in Multiimbre Mode 7 Press REC The REC indicator will blink and the Recording Standby window appears In this window you can change various settings related to realtime recording Recording Standby Track Mode Mx Count In 1MERS Tempo Rec 0FF Loop Punch OFF Start Point Exe Teal Fun End Point hie Quantize OFF Grid Resolution Strength Shuffle Resolution Rate 8 Select the recording method D For details on making this setting refer to Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording p 129 9 Press STOP PLAY The Recording Standby window will close and the REC indicator will change from blinking to lit After that recording will begin 10 Press a key to which a Rhythm pattern is assigned The assign
10. nennen nen 166 Applying Effects in Performance Mode or Multitimbre Mode sss 170 Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output Effects 170 Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters tenete 171 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MEX Control ss 174 Setting Procedure ss sois eio norte ated measles breve tei dine ad e pat alte 174 Functioris of Parameters sites en eha ne ti nt tn oem etes isti e REOR 175 Making Chorus Settings Chorus ss 176 Setting Proc dure tte res unita dae tases retirer 176 Functions of Parameters essa oil iatus medie pee ie ated i eif n cete f en dde debes 176 Making Reverb Settings Reverb esse 177 Setting Procedure chr eis nn nent de ed ede ret def de eae 177 Functions of Parameters 3 5 cs nest Re ene EI e Ree 177 12 Settings Common to All Modes System Function 178 How to Make the System Function Settings 178 Initializing the System Settings Init ss 178 Saving the System Settings Write sens 178 Functions of System Parameters sens 179 Settings Common to the Entire System General 179 Sequencer Settings Sequencer ses 180 MIDI Settings MID benne salle eaten aote Fo lore Rastatt Gto dee ua 182 Controller Settings Controller ss 184 Equalizer settings EQ iiie inerte ertet tendere
11. 99 Control modulation switch essent 99 Control pedal sn Control Pedal 1 2 Control pedal 1 2 switch ssssssssssssssseeeneeee 99 Control pitch bend switch sse 99 Controller Patchy aco een leah er oat ethene eee ae Performance a Rhythm set 76 yc 184 Copy weve 143 157 190 Copy file 190 Micro edit ss 157 Multitimbre effects copy sssssssssssseseeneeneeee 113 Multitimbre name COPY sssssssssseeneteeneetnneee 113 Multitimbre part copy 113 Patch effects copy Patch name copy m Patch tone copy ss Performance effects COPY ssssssesssssssstsssstterssttsssntssssntesnstennstensst Performance name copy 2 Performance part COPY sssisesisirieeisrsiiiesiieiieis iiaee Rhythm set effects COPY ss Rhythm set name COPY ss Rhythm tone copy ss Track edit e Giydlui COUDE Te cessisset terrain a eec obere Create Create Event CEE H CTL 1 CIL 2 PEDAL jack nec IGURSORT 3 2 ette re pedes Cursor Cursor button Cutoff Freq sssssss s Cutoff Frequency rhythm tone ssssssssssseeenene 81 Cutoff frequency tone ss Cutoff frequency key follow k Cutoff frequency velocity curve rhythm tone 0 0 81 Cutoff frequency velocity curve tone sss 63 CUtOFt A oco er
12. sss 50 Tone redamper switch ssssssssssseseeeenneneetentetenne 51 Tone Reverb Send Level Tone Select i Tone SwIGCh 2 siete fttt a er fete 36 Pattern track Phrase track 24 Tempotrakan nsee ee nc nie et tr PR 25 gar ddp 139 Track edit Change channel 4 tee ete eo ke eid eed ee ders 147 Change gate time ss 147 Change velocity ss 146 COPY secco e e ee detre d Data thin 7 Delete ss Rs tn RAR LES AR Rrase ederet uL Re M nr E ANTAY Exchange iie Extract 149 Insert measure uu LAN ES d A STRESS ERREUR ETES ER APRES Quantize Shift clock Time fit Transpose Truncate sie eee dcn ue RUBER Track Edit Change Channel ss Track Edit Change Gate Time is Track Edit Change Velocity sse Track Edit COPY ete nee act nee e posee erede Track Edit Data Thin uen tem nete itte metres Track Edit Delete ss Track Edit Erase e Track Edit Exchange ss Track Edit Extract is nn Rate ee Rr e ees Track Edit Insert Measure Track Edit Merge Track Edit Quantize ae Track Edit Shift Clock ss Track Edit Time Fit nn ret ee eletto Track Edit Transpose Track Edit Truncate Transmit active sensing switch Transmit bank select switch sse Transmit Channel Transmit edit data switch sssssssssssseeeenren Transmit program cha
13. sss 59 Velocity range lower rhythm wave sse 79 Velocity range lower tone 7 Velocity range upper rhythm wave sssssssssene 79 Velocity range upper tone sss 59 Velocity Sens Offset patch 48 Velocity sensitivity offset multitimbre part 117 Velocity sensitivity offset patch 48 Velocity sensitivity offset performance part sssssss 102 Vibrate Delay ias eter ener iiia 101 117 Vibrate Depth 101 117 Vibrate Rate 101 117 View Select auci sar tete etd etd 155 View Switch sen 188 Voice Priority rene e e eo I t el cte etas 47 Voice reserve 7 Voice Reserve multitimbre part ss 118 Voice Reserve performance part sss ssssssssssissssttsrsstssssntssssstesssste 102 Volume multitimbre ss 119 Volume performance entree ene 104 Volume label ss 192 Wave expansion board Installing the wave expansion board 196 198 SR JV80 series sss 32 40 196 198 SRX series i a e eet 32 40 196 198 Wave Gain rhythm Wave ss 78 Wave Gain tone Wave Group rhythm wave sese eee 77 Wave Group Ome xsi roere kyin eit re re eg eC estet 59 Wave Level rihanna eei oen 79 Wave No L rhythm wave ss 78 Wave No L tone Wave No R rhythm wave ss Wave Nos R tone asanarea anne Wave Number L rhythm wave
14. Env Time KF 61 64 66 Env V Curve rhythm tone ss 81 Env V Qurye fon eicit nl ann n nt Env V Sens rhythm tone e Env V Sens tone sid sls 0 oy tse e ni tide nes Envelope depth rhythm tone sss 79 Envelope Mode rhythm tone sssssssssseee 74 Envelope mode tone ss 49 FO Switch cac dation sehen ee ette egre iei ren Equal temperament sssssssssesseeeneenee Equalizer switch Micro edit Realtime erase suomi detained e ena ia Track edit oot ete eee ete ct Exchange Exclusive Protect Exclusive protect switch at EXIT X dnt RO ERE ER CERE RU RS Expression multitimbre Expression performance Ext Bank Select LSB 72 ee teet Eee eher e Ree ds ExtBat k Select MSB 2 ete Re Pte te eats Ext Level 22 5 no erp AN Rennes ner ren U TANN BXEPati if secon nnne Nee le e lc enti cen e se es Ext Program Number EXE SWAG n ois ete eter eee Feeder te ee R tace External bank select LSB External bank select MSB External level External pan dereer a s External program change number sss 99 External Switch desi ales ss oe see oh 98 EXAGE S ue ne OE e ERA t ennemi tente 149 F Factory Reset ns 195 Favorite LISt rU 33 86 94 Favorite sound Lid m 33 46 Pe rfOtfnances dote tecti eee t dte e er Re ee dese ca 86 93 Rhythm Set esce en d ene inert einen 73 Fil
15. seen TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity tone TVF envelope time key follow sse TVF envelope velocity curve rhythm tone ssss TVF envelope velocity curve tone sss TVF envelope velocity sensitivity rhythm tone E TVF envelope velocity sensitivity tone sss Tx Active Sensing cenere ea ee ean aaia oaa ainara Tx Bank Select Tx Edit Data Tx Program Change Vpn annee ee Anne ot aaa tr es V VALUE dial ins Variation patch teet enis iet tes Variation performance session eher eerte Vel Fade Lower rhythm wave Vel Fade Lower tone ss Vel Fade Upper rhythm wave Vel Fade Upper tone ss Vel Range Lower rhythm wave sssssssseseeeneenee Vel Range Lower tone Vel Range Upper rhythm wave Vel Range Upper tone a Vel Sens Offset multitimbre part ss Vel Sens Offset performance part sss Velocity 1 4 Velocity Control Velocity control switch Velocity Curve multitimbre ss Velocity Curve performance ssssssssssseeeenenene Velocity fade width lower rhythm wave Velocity fade width lower tone ss Velocity fade width upper rhythm wave sss 79 Velocity fade width upper tone
16. sss 119 Program Change performance sss 103 Punch in Manual punch in Punch in recording m Auto punch in iii Q Quantize h tee REDE REPE E ERE E enr 131 140 Grid quantize cerai o ee i seiten dne 131 Recording quantize ss 131 Shuffle quantize m Track edit 140 Quick Format Floppy Disk Hs Quick play en eem eee ie I ee eiie 122 R Random Pan Depth rhythm tone sse 82 Random pan depth tone ss 65 Random pan switch ss 78 Random Pitch Depth rhythm tone sse 79 Random pitch depth tone ss 61 Range Lower patch Range Lower performance sse Range Lower rhythm set sss Range Upper patch Range Upper performance Range Upper rhythm set Realtime control button assign 1 4 patch ssssss 52 Realtime control button assign 1 4 performance 97 Realtime control button assign 1 4 rhythm set 76 Realtime control button mode 1 4 patch Realtime control button mode 1 4 performance Realtime control button zone number 1 4 sssssssss Realtime control knob assign 1 4 patch sssssssss Realtime control knob assign 1 4 performance Realtime control knob assign 1 4 rhythm set s Realtime control knob zone number 1 4 sssssss
17. Functions of Parameters MFX General MFH Select MFx A Arpeggio Tupe i5STEREGFLANGER Rhythm Ptn Rate 8 50H2 Zone Depth Controller Gui Phase Effects Pre Delay MFX Filter Type MFX Control Cutoff Freq ES Low Gain High Gain Balance D66 34M4 Select Multi Effects Select Of the three types of multi effects that can be used simultaneously select the multi effects for which you want to make settings Value MFX A MFX C von This parameter is not available when a patch or rhythm set is being selected Type Multi Effects Type Use this parameter to select from among the 90 available multi effects For details on multi effects parameters refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List Value 00 THROUGH 90 3D MANUAL In this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the multi effects that is selected by the Multi effects Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List MFX Control Performance Edit Fantasm General MF Control Select MFX A Arpeggio Type 15 STEREO FLANGER Rhythm Ptn Source Destination Sens Zone 1 forr OFF g 2 orr OFF a Controller Billorr OFF Effects 4 OFF OFF a ma MFX Control Channel 2 X a X urite J Init Copy Adding Effects Multi Effects Control If you wanted to change the volu
18. HINT The cutoff frequency key follow setting appearing at the lower part of the TVF settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the cutoff frequency key follow setting while dotted lines are used for the TVA bias settings This lets you compare the TVF cutoff frequency key follow setting and the TVA bias settings while you make settings Creating a Patch Cutoff V Curve Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how keyboard playing dynamics velocity influence the cutoff frequency Set this to FIXED when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed Value FIXED 1 7 ZZ Uv CLE Cutoff V Sens Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be applied as a result of changes in playing velocity If you want strongly played notes to raise the cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the cutoff frequency use negative settings Value 63 63 HINT To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative differences in the Cutoff Frequency Velocity Sensitivity values set for each tone set the Velocity Sens Offset parameter PATCH General p 48 However this setting is shared by the Level V Sens parameter PATCH TV A p 65 Resonance x Emphasizes the port
19. MEMD Here we will explain how to make chorus settings in Performance mode The procedure is the same when making settings in Patch mode or Multitimbre mode Setting Procedure 1 Select the sound to which you want to apply the chorus p 85 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Press 4 or w to select a Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the Chorus tab The chorus parameter setting screen appears 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to make the chorus settings 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 93 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the previous screen Functions of Parameters Chorus Performance Edit Edit Fantasm a Arpeggio Chorus Rhythm Ptn Tupe 2oeay Zone Delay Left 7 Controller Delay Right 3 Delay Center tecto Feedback MFX HF Damp MFX Control Left Level dimus Right Level Center Level Type Chorus Type Selects either chorus or delay Value ILS J Init J Copy 0 OFF Neither chorus or delay is used 1 CHORUS Chorus is used 2 DELAY Delay is used 3 GM2 CHORUS General MIDI 2 chorus Adding Effects In
20. N Press a key to which a Rhythm pattern is assigned W If you press another key while Hold is in effect the Rhythm pattern will change accordingly 4 To cancel Rhythm Pattern Hold hold down SHIFT and press RHYTHM simultaneously once again When Using a Hold Pedal By holding down the Hold pedal while you play the Rhythm pattern you can make the Rhythm pattern continue sounding even after you release the key 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc to the HOLD PEDAL jack 2 Press RHYTHM 3 Hold down the Hold pedal and press a key to which a Rhythm pattern is assigned 4 If you press another key while Hold is in effect the Rhythm pattern will change accordingly Making Rhythm Pattern Settings 1 Hold down JUMP and press RHYTHM The Rhythm Pattern window appears Switch Accent Rate 108 Hold fon Shuffle Rate 56 Style R amp B 4 Shuffle Resolution 7 Key Trigger orr Velocity REAL Tempo lt SEQ gt 126 Note Assign c4 In this window you can set the following Rhythm pattern parameters Switch Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off Hold Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Rhythm pattern playback Style Specify the basic performance style of the Rhythm pattern Key Trigger Specify the timing at which the Rhythm pattern is to begin playing Tempo SEQ Specify the tempo of Rhythm pattern playback Accent Rate Adjust
21. Receive Channel 1 2 s 4 GC Receive Switch OH OH ON ON Effects Solo Part Select MEX Mute Switch OFF OFF OFF OFF MFX Control MIDI Filter MIDI ch 5 uk Program Change vlvivivivivivi Reverb Bank Select IvIvIeIe lvi z Pitch Bend vei Channel Pressure MAAA Poly Key Pressure rararar2r2rar2 Modulation PAPAPAPAPAPArara For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Multitimbre Settings p 112 Part MIDI Receive Channel Specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part Value 1 16 von If this is set to the same channel as the Multitimbre Ctrl Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI attempting to switch patches by transmitting only a program change from an external device will actually cause the multitimbre to change If you want to switch patches change the Multitimbre Ctrl Ch parameter to another number p 182 or transmit bank select and program change messages together Q amp A p 14 Receive Switch For each part specify whether MIDI messages will be received ON or not OFF If this is OFF the part will respond to the keyboard but not to the internal sequencer or external MIDI devices Normally you should leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you do not want a specific part to be playing during song playback Value OFF ON Solo Part Select Select one part whose sound you want to play Turn it SEL to the part that you want to solo Pa
22. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb Value 0 127 D Reverb Output Assign Specifies how the sound routed through reverb will be output Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo MEMD If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 Adding Effects 169 Adding Effects Applying Effects in Performance Mode or Multiimbre Mode Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output Effects Here you can make overall settings for effects and the output destination and level of each signal 1 Select the sound for which you want to make output settings p 85 p 107 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Press or w to select a Performance Edit or Multitimbre Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit or the Multitimbre Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 V to select the Effects tab A screen like the one shown below appears Performance Ed it Fantasm General Effects Arpeggio part SreiMrxcalPRF cHofPRF REUIPRF oureur Rhythm Ptn Zone OUTPUT MFX R 15 wrx n se FTG Controller MFX MFX Control Stereo When MFX CHO REV effect switches are turned off effects processors that are t
23. This owner s manual is organized as follows Before you start reading it we d like to suggest going through the Quick Start manual For parameter lists sound lists and MIDI implementation refer to the separate Sound Parameter List In addition the separate Q amp A provides answers for frequently asked questions about the Fantom and example applications for your reference Overview of the Fantom This explains the structure of the Fantom and basic operation Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Playing in Patch Mode This explains how to play the Fantom in Patch mode Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Creating a Patch This chapter explains how to create patches and describes what the patch parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create patches Creating a Rhythm Set This chapter explains how to create rhythm sets and describes what the rhythm set parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create rhythm sets Playing in Performance Mode This explains how to play the Fantom in Performance mode Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Creating a Performance This chapter explains how to create performances and describes what the performance parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create perform
24. 4 Use or W to select the sequencer data that will be displayed Note Note messages These MIDI messages represent notes Poly Aftertouch Polyphonic aftertouch These MIDI messages apply aftertouch to individual keys Control Change Control change messages These MIDI messages apply various effects such as modulation or expression Program Change Program change messages These MIDI messages select sounds Channel Aftertouch Channel aftertouch messages These MIDI messages apply aftertouch to an entire MIDI channel Pitch Bend Pitch bend messages These MIDI messages change the pitch System Exclusive System exclusive messages These MIDI messages are used to make settings unique to the Fantom such as those for the sound parameters Pattern Call Pattern Call messages This data causes a pattern to play back 5 Press 8 On Off to specify whether each type of message will be displayed or not The message will be displayed if the check mark v is assigned and will not be displayed if the check mark is removed If you press 5 All Off none of the sequencer data will be displayed If you press 6 All On all of the sequencer data will be displayed 6 Press EXIT to close the View window Editing the Sequencer Data You can edit the parameters of the sequencer data recorded in a phrase track or pattern However it is not possible to change the type of MIDI message itself such as changing a control change mes
25. Indicates the current sound generating mode PERFORMANCE PLAY Mew Song M 1 A4 stor Indicates the name of the currently selected song the measure location the time signature and the sequencer status Sets the Octave Shift Oct and the Transpose Trans Indicates the song file name cts Gu Gp oo Internalsong NE ZH NE Switches multi effects MFX chorus CHO and reverb REV on and off Beto Transic Turns Loop Play on off LOOP Indicates the group of the selected performance Indicates the MIDI receive channel used for switching performances from an external MIDI device Indicates sets the tempo at which the song Arpeggio or ab pattern is played 120 Control Ch 16 User User Library USER S Fantasm Indicates selects the group number and name of the selected performance This indicates the region that can be used for normal keyboard performance ZONE the region in which arpeggios can be played ARP and the region in which rhythm patterns can be played RHY This indicates the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller and the response status of the D Beam controller Displays the type of effect used Deere D Beam MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay E12 off MFX B Stereo EQ REV SRU Room MFX C Slicer m Realtime Control cutors O Resonance PortaTime Tempo KB Arp Hoi 3 Ptn Hold ED Portamento E
26. Legato Retrigger Legato Retrigger Switch The Legato Retrigger is valid when the Mono Poly parameter PATCH General is set to MONO and the Legato Switch parameter is set to ON The setting determines whether sounds are replayed ON or not OFF when performing legato Normally you will leave this parameter ON When OFF when one key is held down and another key is then pressed only the pitch changes without the attack of the latter key being played Set this to OFF when performing wind and string phrases or when using modulation with the mono synth keyboard sound Value OFF ON Portamento Switch Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Portamento Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the first played key to the next played key By applying portamento when the Mono Poly parameter PATCH General is MONO you can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or similar instrument Creating a Patch Portamento Mode Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be applied Value NORMAL Portamento will always be applied LEGATO Portamento will be applied only when you play legato i e when you press the next key before releasing the previous key Portamento Type Specifies the type of portamento effect Value RATE The time it takes will depend on the distance between the
27. Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Beijing Xinghai Musical Instruments Co Ltd 6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6774 7491 Shanghai Xingtong Acoustics Equipment CO Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road New East Club Plaza Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 498 3079 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPIN ES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 3102 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN ROC TEL 02 2561 3339 TH
28. Source I ax Destination 0x r Message Insert Source Disk And Press Execute E 5 Insert the backup source disk into the disk drive and press 8 Execute The display will ask Internal Song will be erased OK 6 If you are sure that you want to erase the internal song to perform backup press 7 OK MEMD To cancel the backup operation press 8 Cancel The display will indicate Reading Source Disk and the data stored on the backup disk will be loaded into internal memory 7 When the display indicates Eject Source Disk remove the backup source disk Then insert the backup destination disk you prepared in step 1 and press 8 Execute Disk Related Functions Disk Utility 8 When the display shows Eject Destination Disk it s time to remove the backup source disk and insert the backup destination disk and press 8 Execute 9 When the display once again indicates Eject Source Disk exchange the backup source and backup destination disks and press 8 Execute 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 193 Transmitting Sound Settings Reset to Default Factory Settings Transmitting Sound Settings Data Transfer Sound generator settings and system settings stored in the Fantom s internal memory or on a Wave Expansion Board can be transmitted to an external MIDI device or to user memory Transmitting Data to an External M
29. Switch Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Button Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the amp B G3 buttons Value OFF The realtime control button will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 SEN For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower TRNS UP Raises the key range in semitone steps up to 6 semitones higher TRNS DOWN Lowers the key range in semitone steps up to 5 semitones lower TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you press the button MONO POLY Pressed to toggle between polyphonic POLY and monophonic MONO play of a patch ARP HOLD Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance PTN HOLD Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Rhythm pattern playback ZONE INT Turn the Internal Switch on off for the zone ZONE EXT Turn the External Switch on off for the zone Mode 1 4 Realtime Control Button Mode 1 4 Specify how the KB G3 buttons are to operate Value MOMENTARY The button will be on only while you are pressing holding it and will b
30. These jacks output audio signals in mono to an amp or mixer nore The setting determining whether these jacks are used as stereo OUTPUT jacks or monaural INDIVIDUAL jacks is made with the Output Assign setting p 168 p 172 PHONES Jack This is the jack for connecting headphones sold separately gt Quick Start p 3 Overview of the Fantom How the Fantom Is Organized Basic Structure Broadly speaking the Fantom consists of a keyboard controller section a sound generator section and a sequencer section These sections are internally connected via MIDI Sound Generator Section Sequencer Section Recording il Keyboard Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever etc Keyboard Controller Section This section consists of the keyboard pitch bend modulation lever panel knobs and buttons and D Beam controller It also includes any pedals that may be connected to the rear panel The performance information generated when you do things such as press release a key or depress the hold pedal is converted into MIDI messages and sent to the sound generator section sequencer section and or an external MIDI device Sound Generator Section The sound generator section produces the sound It receives MIDI messages from the keyboard controller section and sequencer section and or from an external MIDI device generates musical sound
31. If you play back the song while the Song Edit screen is displayed the screen will scroll in keeping with the song playback location Using Different Sound Generators for Each Track By specifying the output destination for each track you can use a variety of sound generators when playing back a song 1 Access the Song Edit screen 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Output for the track whose output destination you want to specify EXT Ed it Altered State M 1 494 STOP Track Output Status 10 J PLAY Dis T LAY Load Save Init ET AT Eg Eg 136 3 Editing Songs By turning the VALUE dial or by pressing INC DEC set the value OFF The track will not be sounded INT The track will be sounded by the Fantom s internal sound generator MIDI The track will be sounded by an external sound generator connected to the MIDI OUT connector BOTH The track will be sounded by both the internal and external sound generators NE This setting will be ignored for tracks whose Status is set to MUTE Silencing the Playback of a Track Mute If you wish to silence specific instruments during playback you can mute the appropriate Phrase track containing that sequencer data 1 2 Access the Song Edit screen p 136 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Status for the track that you want to silence EXE t 5 6 1 0
32. SOUND CONTROL selection has been added to the Type field This lets you set the following parameters for the specified part Part All 1 16 to the stored value Value STORED or the factory set value Value DEFAULT Cutoff Offset Resonance Offset Attack Time Offset Release Time Offset Decay Time Offset Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Performance Initialize Type SOUND CONTROL Templaten mx DEFAULT Part ALL Value Quantize all tracks at the same time See p 140 in the Owner s Manual In the Track Edit Quantize window you can now select All for Track target track This allows you to simultaneously perform quantization on all tracks phrase tracks 1 16 beat track and tempo track Changes in the Recording Standby window and how to start recording See p 129 in the Owner s Manual In the Recording Standby window the functions assigned to the 1 8 buttons have been expanded and modified Recording Standby window before the change Track Mode Count In Tempo Rec Loop Punch Start Point End Point Quantize Recording Standby Grid Resolution Shuffle Resolution Rate Recording Standby window following the change MIX 1 MERS oFF OFF fessi emi ne o rede OFF Strength Button name Function 3 Metronome Open the Metronome window 4 RecSel Open the Recording Select window 8 Start Star
33. Settings Common to All Modes System Function This chapter describes how the System parameters that determine the Fantom s operation environment work and how these parameters are organized Read it as necessary Disk Related Functions Disk Utility This chapter covers disk related operations such as saving data to disk and loading data from disk Read it as necessary Transmitting Sound Settings Restoring the Factory Settings This explains how to transmit data to an external MIDI device or to the Fantom Data Transfer and how to restore all data of the Fantom to the factory settings Factory Reset Read it as necessary Installing the Wave Expansion Board This explains how to install a Wave Expansion Board sold separately Read it as necessary Notation Used in This Owner s M anua l The display screens printed in this owner s manual are based on the factory settings However please be aware that in some cases How To Use This Manual Nore To make operation procedures easy to understand the following notation system is adopted they may differ from the actual factory settings Characters and numbers in square brackets indicate buttons and knobs on the front panel For example MODE indicates the MODE button and CURSOR indicates the cursor buttons a v b p refers to pages within the manual In this manual when any particular parameter is referred to the name of the parameter is given and
34. Value C 1 G9 Bias Direction Selects the direction in which change will occur starting from the Bias Position Value LOWER The volume will be modified for the keyboard area below the Bias Point UPPER The volume will be modified for the keyboard area above the Bias Point LO amp UP The volume will be modified symmetrically toward the left and right of the Bias Point ALL The volume changes linearly with the bias point at the center HINT The bias settings appearing at the lower part of the TVA settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the bias settings while dotted lines are used for the TVF cutoff frequency key follow setting This lets you compare the TVA bias settings and the TVF cutoff frequency key follow setting while you make settings Level V Curve TVA Level Velocity Curve You can select from seven curves that determine how keyboard playing strength will affect the volume If you do not want the volume of the tone to be affected by the force with which you play the key set this to FIXED Value FIXED 1 7 VISTA Level V Sens TVA Level Velocity Sensitivity Set this when you want the volume of the tone to change depending on the force with which you press the keys Set this to a positive value to have the changes in tone volume increase the more forcefully the keys are played to make the tone play more softly as you play harder set this to a
35. baths washrooms on wet floors or are v Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are Subject to high levels of vibration This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is recommended by Roland A by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended Qo The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as A marked on the unit Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe NWARNING injury should the unit be used About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The S symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The 6 symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried
36. rite J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Multitimbre Settings p 112 C B Part Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings for each part Value 64 63 UE Scale Tune is switched on off by means of the Scale Tune Switch parameter SYSTEM Scale Tune p 186 120 Equal Temperament This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and is the most widely used method of temperament used in Western music The Fantom employs equal temperament when the Scale Tune Switch is set to OFF Just Temperament Tonic of C Compared with equal temperament the principle triads sound pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third On the Fantom you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F lt Example gt Note Equal tem Just Tempera Arabian Scale name perament ment tonic C ec olojlooo jo jo jo joo co Creating a Multiimbre Changing the Settings of the Patch Assigned to a Part When using patches
37. you will be able to use knob movements to control the tempo easily Loop Recording and Punch In Recording You can record repeatedly over a specified area Loop recording or re record just that area Punch in recording Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic settings described in step 3 of Basic Operation for Realtime Recording p 129 Loop Punch Specify how loop recording or punch in recording is to take place Value OFF Loop recording or punch in recording will not occur LOOP POINT Recording takes place repeatedly according to the loop point settings LOOP 1 MEAS The one measure area starting at the record start measure will be recorded repeatedly LOOP 2 MEAS The two measure area starting at the record start measure will be recorded repeatedly LOOP 4 MEAS The four measure area starting at the record start measure will be recorded repeatedly LOOP 8 MEAS The eight measure area starting at the record start measure will be recorded repeatedly LOOP 16 MEAS The sixteen measure area starting at the record start measure will be recorded repeatedly LOOP SONG ALL The entire song from beginning to end will be recorded repeatedly AUTO PUNCH IN Auto punch in recording will be performed You must pre specify the area punch points in which recording is to take place This is convenient when you want to re record over a mistake The song will play back when you begin recording
38. 1 Tempo Track 1 Beat Track 1 The Pattern Track can hold up to 100 patterns Resolution 480 TPQN Song Data Internal Memory Song 1 Note Capacity approx 120 000 notes Song Length 9 998 measures Recording Methods Realtime Step External Storage Device 3 5 inch Floppy Disk 1 44 M bytes 2HD 720 K bytes 2DD Note Storage approx 120 000 notes 2HD approx 60 000 notes 2DD Song Files max 99 File Formats MRC Pro Songs Standard MIDI Files format 0 1 B Others Arpeggiator 88 styles Preset Rhythm 50 styles per each 12 patterns Display 320 x 240 dots Graphic LCD w backlit Controllers Pitch Bend Modulation Lever D Beam Controller Realtime Control Knobs 1 2 3 4 Realtime Control Buttons 1 2 3 4 Connectors Headphones Jack A MIX Output Jacks L MONO R 1 4 inch TRS phone type B Output Jacks L R 1 4 inch phone type or Individual Jacks 1 4 Hold Pedal Jack Half Pedal possible Control Pedal Jacks 1 2 assignable MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU Digital Audio Outputs S P DIF Connectors COAXIAL OPTICAL 24 bit 44 1 kHz AC Inlet Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V AC 240 V Power Consumption 16W Dimensions 1 268 W x 400 D x 115 H mm 49 15 16 W x 15 3 4 D x 4 9 16 H inches Weight 14 8 kg 32 lbs 11 oz Accessories Quick Start Owner s Manual Sound Parameter List Q amp A Demo Floppy Disk Power C
39. 12 12 6 12 Reverb FXM Switch ON forr oFF orr oo ur 3 1 1 1 Matrix Ctrl FXM Depth 8 8 8 8 TMT Tempo Sync OFF forF forF OFF 1 L Soft Pad A 1 R A rite Init Copy TN For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 Wave Wave Group Selects the group for the waveform that is to be the basis of the tone Value INT Waveforms stored in internal memory XP A Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 series installed in EXP A slots XP B Waveforms residing on a Wave Expansion Board SRX series installed in the EXP B slot XP C Waveforms residing on a Wave Expansion Board SRX series installed in the EXP C slot von You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board that is not installed Wave No L Wave Number L Wave No R Wave Number R Selects the basic waveform for a tone Along with the Wave number the Wave name appears at the lower part of the display When in monaural mode only the left side L is specified When in stereo the right side R is also specified Value 1 1083 Gain Wave Gain Sets the gain amplification of the waveform The value changes in 6 dB decibel steps an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform s gain If you intend to use the Booster to distort the waveform s sound set this parameter to its maximum value p 57 Value 6 0 6 12 FXM Swit
40. 136 Access the Song Setup window Use 4 or to select Song Name and then press 8 Select The Song Name window appears Mew sons 137 iting Songs Editing Songs 4 Press or to move the cursor to the location where you want to input a character 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a character 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to assign a song name HINT You can press 8 Name and use the Name window to assign a song name p 30 Assigning a Name to a Pattern Pattern Name You can assign or modify the pattern name of each pattern A pattern name of up to 10 characters can be assigned 1 Load the song containing the pattern for which you want to assign a name p 136 2 Access the Song Setup window p 137 3 Use or w to select Pattern Name and then press 8 Select The Pattern Name window appears 4 Move the cursor to Pattern and select the pattern for which you want to assign a name m Move the cursor to the pattern name e Press or J to move the cursor to the location of the character that you want to input 7 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a character 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to assign the pattern name HINT You can press 8 Name and use the Name window to assign a pattern name p 30 138 Assigning Markers Locate Positions to a Song Markers can be assigned to any location in
41. 174 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MFX Control MEMD Here we will explain how to make multi effects settings in Performance mode The procedure is the same when making settings in Patch mode or Multitimbre mode Setting Procedure 1 Select the sound to which you want to apply the multi effects p 85 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Press or wW to select a Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the MFX tab or the MFX Control tab The multi effects parameter setting screen appears 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to make the multi effects settings 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 93 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the previous screen MFX Template The Fantom provides a variety of multi effect settings in the form of MFX templates Simply by pressing 7 Init and selecting an MFX template you can summon up just the right effects settings for the application you have in mind p 43 p 69 p 91 p 112 Type Template mjLo Fat EG MFX fa D For more information about MFX template refer to MFX Template List Sound Parameter List
42. 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 72 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY screen If you return to the PATCH PLAY screen without saving the display will indicate EDITED reminding you that the rhythm set settings have been modified von If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the display indicates EDITED your edited rhythm set will be lost Initializing Rhythm Set Settings Init Initialize means to return the settings of the currently selected sound to a standard set of values or to the factory settings von The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected sound the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be affected If you wish to restore all of the Fantom s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 195 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the rhythm set that you wish to initialize p 40 2 Access the Rhythm Edit screen p 69 69 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set 3 Press 7 Init The Rhythm Initialize window appears Type Template Mode ALL Key 4 Move the cursor to Type and select the initialization type Type Initialize Type There are three initialize methods Select either of them depending on the application DEFAULT Resets the currently selected rhythm set in the Temporary
43. Assign 1 4 patch ss Assign 1 4 performance ccscssessesseseseseesesteseesesteseesssseseseseenesseseeses 97 Assign 1 4 rhythm set ASSIGN Type iiie ididaeet edens ln prs i eise e terii Assigning a name sise ic SONNE uniniinmie A E TEETH ITE inner Attack Time Offset multitimbre part de Attack Time Offset patch iissa aseisiin Attack Time Offset performance part sss 101 Backlight Saver Backup i Backup Floppy Disk ss BANK css Bank Select multitimbre Bank Select performance sn B am Sens eoi etii esie eta er etii ee tee ie BEAT e Beat indicator onere ere oie inrer Beat track 3 Bend Range rhythm tone sss Bend Range Down ss Bend Range Up i Bias ss Bias Direction Bias Level m Bias Position Booster Booster 1 amp 2 Booster 3 amp 4 Booster Gain 1 amp 2 oeiia si aries ie teneri ie Booster Gain 9 amp 4 een Taste ne det esce eterne eet ek ee besito C B multitimbre part ss 120 C B patch m C B performance part ss 104 Chain file Chain play d ioiii E etai aa E 122 Change Channel see 147 Change Gate Time Change Velocity 146 Change Volume Label 192 Channel Pressure multitimbre ss 119 Channel Pressure performance ss 103
44. Bank Select MSB LSB 635 660 Program Change 661 3 Press 44 or w to choose the performance 4 To switch the performance group press to move the cursor to the performance group tab and press amp or W to select the performance group 5 After switching the performance group press gt to move the cursor within the list and press or w to select the performance 6 Press EXIT to close the Performance List window 86 Playing in Performance Mode Combining and Playing Sounds Together Layer In Performance mode you can play the sounds of all zones whose Internal Switch is on and all connected parts Combining the parts will produce thicker fatter sounds Part 1 Part 2 0 L Part 15 Part 16 Rx ch 1 Rx ch 2 Rx ch 15 Rx ch 16 u Internal Switch On Zone 15 Tx ch 15 Zone 16 Tx ch 16 Rx ch Receive Channel Tx ch Transmit Channel 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press or w to select Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the Zone tab A screen like the one shown below appears Performance Edit EEG General Zone West End Bs SES Parti Ai i zone 1 2 3 4 a Transmit Channel 1 2 3 4 Rhythm Ptn int Switch ON ON ON ON
45. Coarse Tune Part Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Coarse Tune and Octave Shift The Coarse Tune and Fine Tune parameters along with the Octave Shift parameter can all be seen as doing the same thing to the sound i e changing the pitch of the sound For example if C4 Middle C is played with the Coarse Tune parameter set to 12 the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 For example if C4 Middle C is played with the Octave Shift parameter set to 1 the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 However internally these function very differently When the Coarse Tune parameter is set to 12 the pitch itself is raised one octave On the other hand when the Octave Shift parameter is set to 1 it is the same as pressing the keys one octave up In other words use the Coarse Tune parameter when changing the pitch and the Octave Shift parameter when you want to shift the entire keyboard for example when the number of keys is insufficient Fine Tune Part Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Mono Poly Part Mono Poly Set this parameter to MON when the patch assigned to the part is to be played monophonically or to POL when the patch is to be played polyphonically When using
46. E 4 a La IS J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Transmit Channel Specifies the MIDI transmit channel for each zone Value 1 16 Int Switch Internal Switch Specifies for each zone whether or not the keyboard controller section will be connected to the internal sound generator Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the Fantom s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound modules set it to OFF Value OFF ON Ext Switch External Switch Determines for each zone whether or not data generated by the keyboard controller section is sent as MIDI messages from the MIDI OUT connector Normally you will leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you do not want the Fantom to control external sound generators Value OFF ON Ext Bank Select MSB External Bank Select MSB If you want a Bank Select number MSB controller number 0 to also be transmitted when you switch performances specify the value that you want to transmit 0 127 for each zone If you do not want this message to be transmitted set this to Value 0 127 yon The data of the zone for which the External Switch is turned off will not be transmitted 98 Creating a Performance Ext Bank Select LSB External Bank Select LSB If you want a Bank Select number LSB controller number 32 to
47. EXIT f you are not satisfied with the results of executing the function you can press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Track Edit to return to the state prior to executing the operation Undo 8 If you want to save the edited result press 2 Save to save the song to disk p 135 140 Aligning a Song s Timing Quantize In the chapter Recording Songs p 127 we explained Recording Quantize which lets you quantize during realtime recording Alternatively it is also possible to quantize a song that has already been recorded The Fantom has a Preview function that allows playing back the results of a Quantize operation while you are still setting parameters before actual execution This helps to make optimal Quantize settings von The Quantize operation will correct only the timing at which notes were pressed note on and released note off and will not correct any other sequencer data This means that if you record MIDI messages such as bend range or modulation along with notes quantization can cause the notes to go out of sync with the MIDI messages skewing timing To avoid such problems it is better to record non keyboard data afterward using mix recording etc 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or w to select Quantize and then press 8 Select
48. If the Key Range of the patch has been set p 58 the sound will be heard for keys in the area for which the key ranges of the patch and performance overlap Key range specified for Performance r 1 i L J pi range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play Ina performance you can specify the range over which each part will sound p 102 but if you will be playing the performance from the keyboard of the Fantom we recommend that you use the zone settings explained here to specify the keyboard range instead of specifying the range of each part 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 2 Refer to the procedure for the preceding section Combining and Playing Sounds Together Layer and turn the Internal Screen on for each zone that is connected to a part you want to play 87 Performance Mode ing in Play Playing in Performance Mode 3 Make sure the Performance Edit screen is displayed and press 1 A or 2 V to select the Zone tab A screen like the one shown below appears Playing Arpeggios in a Specific Region of the Keyboard In Patch mode when you press ARPEGGIO to turn the arpeggiator on the keyboard will allow you to play arpeggios On the other hand it will no longer be possible to play normally However in Performance mode you can split the keyboard to divide it int
49. If you select REPLACE only the sequencer data on the MIDI channel specified by the Channel parameter will be the object of the operation Sequencer data of all other MIDI channels will be unaffected Status Selects the type of data to be extracted Value ALL All types of sequencer data NOTE Note P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers PROG Program numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend EXC System Exclusive messages Tune Tune Request PTN Pattern Call Message data Range If you set the Status parameter to NOTE P AFT C C or PROG specify the range of data Specify the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To extract all Note or Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C 1 G9 To extract C4 Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C4 C4 To extract Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data over the range from C3 to C4 specify C3 C4 If you want to extract all controller numbers set this to 0 127 If you want to extract all program numbers set this to 1 128 To extract Controller Program number 4 specify 4 4 To extract Controller Program numbers from 3 to 14 specify 3 14 149 Editing Songs Editing Songs Channel MIDI Channel Selects the MIDI channel s of the data to be extracted To extract all sequencer data set this parameter to ALL To extract just the sequencer dat
50. Patterns Exchange The phrase tracks or patterns will be exchanged in their entirety 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Exchange and then press 8 Select A message of EXCHANGE Select source point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the track or pattern that you want to exchange and press 8 Select to specify it A message of EXCHANGE Select destination point appears 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the exchange destination track or pattern and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Exchange window appears Track EIS gt Track TRK 2 6 Check the tracks that are to be exchanged If you want to change the settings use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to correct the settings Track Source Track Check modify the phrase track or pattern that will be exchanged Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Track Destination Track Check modify the exchange destination track or pattern Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation 152 Adjusting the Song s Playback Time Time Fit This
51. Preset E USER 008 Stream Bell BEL m USER 009 Blue Mutes DGT USER 010 Uitrasmooth STR Bank Select MSB LSE 887 888 Program Change 681 Patch Rhythm FavList acts Preu 2 Press 7 Ctg to add a check mark v The display will show a list of patches organized by category Patch List Category P USER 001 GenerationxU CMB JBlucked LT USER 059 Wedding Gig CMB Ethnic PR E 125 suite Combo CMB Fretted PR E 126 Lounge Gig CMB re PR E 127 Wedding Gig CMB PR E 128 Generationxy CMB Sound FX Beat amp Groove Drums Combination s Bank Select MSB LSB 687 006 Program Change eet Patch acta reve 3 Press to move the cursor to the category tab and press or w to select the category A list of the patches in the selected category will be displayed 4 Press gt to move the cursor in the list and press or W to select a patch By pressing 8 Prevu you can audition the sound of the patch being played by a phrase suitable for the corresponding type category of patch Phrase Preview 5 Press EXIT to close the Patch List window The following categories can be selected Playing in Patch Mode Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift
52. Reverb Env Mode 5 Delay Mode HORM NORM HORM NORM ecjolojlooo jo jo jo jo oi ico Delay Time a e 8 Rx Bender OH ON OH ON M ER CARNET 4 Press 4 Part Select The Part Select window will appear PR B 885 West End Bs SBS Part2 ST 003 XU WauHipKit DRM Part 3 0 093 Hefty Bass SBS Part 4 5 Queen V SYN Part 5 1122 TempoMadness BTS Part 6 Oscillations BPD Part 7 CES Andtraque SPD Part 8 C 915 Jazzer Flute FLT Part 9 093 XU WayHipKit DRM Part 10 PRST 901 FA R amp B Kit DRM 5 Press 4 or W to select the part whose assigned patch you want to change and then press 8 Select 6 Therest of the procedure is the same as when making changes in Patch mode p 42 105 Playing in Multi mbre Mode Multitimbre mode is ideal when you want to use the sequencer to create a song or when you want to play song data When creating songs or playing song data a different MIDI channel is assigned for each patch or rhythm set used in a part Such a set of sounds selected for each part to play is called a multitimbre About the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen Displaying the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen To access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen use the following procedure 1 Press MODE The Mode window appears PATCH MULTITIMBRE PERFORMANCE RHYTHM 2 Press or to selec
53. Rx Bender ON ON OH OH a ER Write J Init Copy 5 If you want to make settings for a different part press 4 Part Select and select it in the Part Select window that appears West End Bs 555 Part 2 ST 005 XU WagHipKit DRM Part 3 5 093 Hefty Bass SBS Part 4 D 195 Queen Y SYN Part 5 E 122 TempoMadness BTS Part 6 E 915 Oscillations BPD Part E 040 Soundtraque SPD Part 8 1 015 Jazzer Flute FLT Part 9 ST 903 XU WayHipKit DRM Part 10 ST 001 FA R amp B Kit DRM 6 The rest of the procedure is the same as when making changes in Patch mode p 42 121 Playing Back a Song This chapter explains how you can use the Fantom s sequencer to play back a song HINT When you play back a song we recommend that you use the sound generator in Multitimbre mode p 106 In Multitimbre mode up to sixteen different sounds can be played separately by the sixteen parts making this mode ideal for playing songs that are multi instrument ensembles of drums bass piano etc Playing a Song Immediately from Disk Quick Play The Fantom is able to play a song from disk immediately without first loading the song into internal memory This is called the Quick Play function Quick Play can be used with MRC Pro songs extension SVQ and Standard MIDI Files extension MID 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk that contains the song you want to play 2 Use CURSOR to move the
54. This value is added to the velocity sensitivity value of a tone so if the velocity sensitivity value of any tone is already set to 63 maximum positive settings here will not produce any change Clock Source Patch Clock Source The LFO cycle multi effects changes Phrase Loop and Tone Delay time can be synchronized to a clock tempo When this is used by the patch this Clock Source setting determines the clock which will be used Value PATCH The Patch Tempo will be used SEQUENCER Synchronize to the clock of the Fantom s sequencer or of an external sequencer For details on using clock tempo refer to Q amp A p 16 Tempo Patch Tempo When Patch Clock Source is set to PATCH this setting value is effective Value 20 250 MEMD The Patch Tempo Clock does not transmit clock messages from the MIDI OUT connector Legato Switch Solo Legato Switch Solo Legato is valid when the Mono Poly parameter PATCH General is set to MONO This setting specifies whether the Solo Legato function will be used ON or not OFF Value OFF ON With the Legato Switch parameter ON pressing a key while continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to the pitch of the most recently pressed key sounding all the while This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist
55. Wave Expansion Board Version R SR JUSO 09 Sessn 1 00 B iSRX O1DunamicDrm C SRX OzConcertPno a ind Write Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 Controller Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source System Control 1 4 Source System Control Assign selects the MIDI message used as the System Control System Control This function which departs from previously used methods and instead allows you to use MIDI messages to change tone settings in realtime is called the Matrix Control p 54 Similarly the function allowing you to use MIDI messages to change multi effects settings in realtime is called the Multi effects Control p 175 Normally the Matrix Control is used for making patch settings and the Multi effects Control for making settings to patches rhythm sets multitimbres and performances However if you do not need to change the MIDI messages used for matrix control or multi effects control by each patch rhythm set multitimbre performance or if you want to use a specific MIDI message for matrix control or multi effects control you will want to make use of System Control In other words you could call the System Controls global Matrix Control Multi effects Control for the entire Fantom You can use up to four System Controls Value OFF The system control knob will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 D
56. Wave Number L tone Wave Number R rhythm wave Wave Number R tone ins Wave Panneau ste en E E R Wave tempo sync rhythm wave Wave Tempo Sync tone Window Zone 1 4 210 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is conne
57. When you reach the punch in point playback will switch to record mode 130 MANUAL PUNCH IN Manual punch in recording will be performed Recording takes place erasing the existing data in the area that you specify by pressing a pedal or button This is convenient when you want to re record more than one location in which you made a mistake The song will play back when you begin recording When you press a pedal or button playback will switch to record mode and will switch back to play mode when you press the pedal or button once again By pressing the pedal or button you can toggle between record and play modes Start Point Specify the measure and beat at which loop recording or auto punch in recording is to begin It is not possible to specify the Clock End Point Specify the measure and beat at which loop recording or auto punch in recording is to begin It is not possible to specify the Clock Using Auto Punch In Recording 1 In the Recording Standby window set the Loop Punch parameter to AUTO PUNCH IN 2 Set the Start Point End Point parameters to the desired punch points 3 Move to a measure earlier than the specified Start Point and press STOP PLAY The song will begin playing Recording will begin at the location specified by the Start Point parameter Playback will resume at the location specified by the End Point parameter 4 Press STOP PLAY to stop playback Using Manual Punch In Recording
58. and combines the two filters The tone 1 3 TVA will control the volume balance of the two tones adjusting the depth of ring modulator This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones and in addition mixes in the sound of tone 2 4 and stacks the two filters Since the ring modulated sound can be mixed with tone 2 4 tone 1 3 TVA can adjust the amount of the ring modulated sound NJ TONE 2 4 This type applies a filter to tone 1 3 and ring modulates it with tone 2 4 to create new overtones NJ R A VE TVA TONE 2 4 This type sends the filtered tone 1 3 and tone 2 4 through a ring modulator and then mixes in the sound of tone 2 4 and applies a filter to the result D This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring modulator to create new overtones The tone 1 3 TVA will control the volume balance of the two tones adjusting the depth of ring modulator P R VON TE EN This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring modulator to create new overtones and also mixes in the sound of tone 2 4 Since the ring modulated sound can be mixed with tone 2 4 tone 1 3 TVA can adjust the amount of the ring modulated sound ven If you select a tone while on the Structure screen the tone paired with the selected tone will also be selected When TYPE 2 10 is selected and one tone of a pair is turned off the other tone will be s
59. f FANTOM Temp Indicates selects the group number and name of the selected multitimbre Part number The currently selected part is indicated by the I symbol Indicates selects the group number and name of the patch assigned to each part PR Grand xt PR A 001 Grand XU 100 0 art Ch So Mu Patel Volume Pan 10 19 RPRST 011 XU Pop Kit 100 9 17 et PR A 9 Grand x 100 A 17 2 2 8 XU Rc 100 m 5 17 mI PR R 80801 Grand XU 100 m H aja PR Grand X 100 m H Sis PR Grand 100 m 5 66 E 100 0 lt r Switches the Solo So and Indicates sets the following Mute Mu function on off settings of the part Volume Volume Pan Pan Output Destination Out Chorus Send Level Chorus Reverb Send Level Reverb Indicates sets the part s MIDI receive channels Favorite Sound Bank 1 Blues Ha XV Trum jAmbient Bend aC Soaring re pet Sax hord Hrns2 Indicates the names of the patches or rhythm sets that can be selected by 1 8 Playing in Multiimbre Mode Selecting a Multitimbre Selecting Multitimbres from a List You can display a list of performances and select a multitimbres The Fantom has two multitimbre groups including the User group from that list and Preset groups with each group storing 16 multitimbres for a
60. is selected the sound will normally continue as long as the key is pressed If you want the sound to decay naturally even if the key remains pressed set this to NO SUS Range NO SUS SUST vos If a one shot type Wave p 44 is selected it will not sustain even if this parameter is set to SUST Delay Mode Tone Delay Mode Selects the type of tone delay No Tone Delay A Note on Note off 49 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Tone Delay This produces a time delay between the moment a key is pressed or released and the moment the tone actually begins to sound You can also make settings that shift the timing at which each tone is sounded This differs from the Delay in the internal effects in that by changing the sound qualities of the delayed tones and changing the pitch for each tone you can also perform arpeggio like passages just by pressing one key You can also synchronize the tone delay time to the specified tempo Patch Tempo or to the tempo of the sequencer p 48 nore If you are not going to use Tone Delay set the Delay Mode parameter to NORM and Delay Time parameter to 0 If the Structure parameter PATCH TMT is set in the range of 2 10 the output of tones 1 and 2 will be combined into tone 2 and the output of tones 3 and 4 will be combined into tone 4 For this reason tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2 and tone 3 will follow the settings of tone
61. om Guo Gu ee internaisong USER 001 GenerationXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw CD gt GO CO D Beam MFX LoFi Compress T CHO Delay uel REU SRU Hall Realtime Control cutort J Resonance Breath decay Time GD Portamento EP Mono Poly EJ oct Down GD octup ess Tran ambient pesca s 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC to select RHYTHM A screen like the following appears allowing you to select a rhythm set Rhythm set group Rhythm set number Ofo frans c Ica Gur Grao aa Internalsong RHYTH A Cerra ef en Tei 7RxSP Bizo USER 001 R amp B Kit 1 Category DRM Drums Lock Rhy Tone C 2 O1d Kick D Beam MFX Through Breath CHO Chorus kd REV SRU Room m Realtime Control Q or e of ort Q oft GD or 3 of ED off GD ort Favorite Sound Bank 1 Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient Bend ac Soaring rp pet Sax hord Hrns2 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the rhythm set group 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the rhythm set group USER User PRST Preset GM Preset GM GM2 XP A C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots 6 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the rhythm set number 7 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the rhythm set number You can select favorite rhythm sets in the same way a
62. rhythintone ette tee ttt eee rne 75 Rx Hold 1 tone 51 Rx Pan Mode rhythm tone 75 Rx Pan Mode tone eet e ree Inter ree a iiaa 51 Rx Program Change ss 183 S S P DIECOAXLIADL nte tie e rei pea re ete 18 S PDIFOPTICAL ict rtt ertt rte ebore tree erg 18 Save Multitimbre Patch Performance Rhythm set rq SINT Scale Tune Multitimbre nonton neenon ep tee Performance 45 eere emet emerat SY SEOIN M Scale tune C B multitimbre part E Scale turie C B patch e uec eet ets Scale tune C B performance part sss 104 Scale Tune Switch sis Select oc do HO RR E et tein Select Command Seq Tempo Override 1 ete ree tertie citernes 94 D UENCR sri ner entes m eee easi gtee deerit eigen 24 180 Sequencer section eee 19 Sequencer tempo override 94 SHIRT Rens e e Ede 17 SHIFT REGISTRY is nn nn a itte 46 73 SRE CLO CNG rM 150 Shuffle Rate patch siens ener og petet ponente 52 Shuffle Rate performance 95 96 Shuffle Rate rhythm set ss 75 Shuffle Resolution patch 52 Shuffle Resolution performance ss 95 96 Shuffle Resolution rhythm set Simultaneous polyphony sse 21 S MRC format serres e dee eee eR dede arg Soft Through cese t eedem de nn Reste ie dire Soft through switch ds Solon dote Le D eed Solo legato SWitch reete tede sake ik
63. setting is effective when playing a solo instrument patch such as sax or flute Value MONO Only the last played note will sound POLY Two or more notes can be played simultaneously Cutoff Offset Cutoff Frequency Offset alters the cutoff frequency of the overall patch while preserving the relative differences between the cutoff frequency values set for each tone in the Cutoff Freq parameters PATCH TVEF p 62 Range 63 63 Cutoff Frequency the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components von This value is added to the cutoff frequency value of a tone so if the cutoff frequency value of any tone is already set to 127 maximum positive settings here will not produce any change Resonance Offset Resonance Offset alters the resonance of the overall patch while preserving the relative differences between the resonance values set for each tone in the Resonance parameter PATCH TVF p 63 Range 63 63 Resonance emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound von This value is added to the resonance value of a tone so if the resonance value of any tone is already set to 127 maximum ua nmn positive settings here will not produce any change 47 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Attack Time Offset Attack Time Offset alters the attack time of the overall patch
64. v the RPS function will be turned on 8 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the Song Edit screen 9 To save the settings you made press 2 Save to save the song to disk p 135 Using the RPS Function While You Perform Normally when playing patterns individually the song containing the patterns must be loaded into internal memory However when using the RPS function to play back patterns you can use Quick Play 1 Make sure that the preparations for using the RPS function have been made correctly 2 Access the PLAY screen for the mode in which you want to perform 3 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to RPS in the upper part of the screen and press INC The RPS function will be turned on and you will be able to perform using RPS MULTITIMBRE PLAY Hew Song M 1 4 4 STOP oee Meane joo Internalsong User Library Control Ch OFF J120 USER 01 FANTOM Temp Partch So Mu Patch Volume Pan gt 10 19 R PRST 011 XU Pop Kit 166 m 0 1 t Grand XU 100 m S m n 1 2 2 JE 4 5 meS 7 Favorite Sound Bank 1 Blues Ha xv Trum ambient Bend ac Soaring rp pet Sax hord Hrns2 MEMD If you save the song in MRC Pro song format when the RPS PR A 991 Grand Xu 100 0 m n function is turned on this state will also be saved This means that you will always be able
65. 1 The song will be converted into a Format 1 Standard MIDI File in which the sequencer data is saved in multiple phrase tracks and saved to disk An extension of MID will be added automatically yon The extension will be MID for both Save SMF Format 0 and Save SMF Format 1 These two cannot be distinguished When you save the data using Save Song File the settings of the patches and rhythm sets assigned to each part of the multitimbre performance will not be saved When you save the data using Save Song File the multitimbre performance settings at the time you saved the data will be saved This means that if the multitimbre performance was modified midway through the song and you save immediately after recording the song will start with the multitimbre performance sounds that were selected at the time of saving If you modify the multitimbre performance during the song use the Microscope window to record the desired bank select and program number data corresponding to the multitimbre performance settings from which you will start at the beginning of the song p 156 MEMD HINT Even if you save using Save Song File the song will not use the correct sounds when played back on a MRC Pro sequencer other than the Fantom In order to make the song play back with the correct songs you must record the appropriate bank select and program number in the song After specifying the format in w
66. 2252 Grid quantize with Resolution 2252525222255 SHUFFLE Shuffle Quantize will be applied to recording Use this when you want to produce a shuffle or swing rhythmic feel 222522555225 l Shuffle quantize with Rate 75 D DD JJ DD Grid Resolution This parameter is used when Grid Quantize is selected Specifies quantization time interval as a note value Choose a Resolution that matches the smallest note in the area you re quantizing Value 3 4 45 TJ ds d Strength Grid Quantize Strength This parameter is used when Grid Quantize is selected This parameter specifies a percentage of how note timing will be corrected toward the timing interval that is specified by the Resolution parameter With a setting of 100 the note will move all the way to the nearest timing interval of the Grid Resolution setting A setting of 0 will not change note timing at all Shuffle Resolution This parameter is used when Shuffle Quantize is selected Specifies quantization time interval as a note value Value F J Rate Shuffle Quantize Rate This parameter is used when Shuffle Quantize is selected Specifies how far apart you want a down beat specified by the Shuffle Resolution parameter to be from the up beat that immediately follows By shifting the timing of an up beat you can create a swing feel A setting of 50 will place the timing of the up beat note at the exact mid point be
67. 7 Set the current location of the song will be set as the ending location 5 If you press 8 Loop to assign a check mark v looping will be turned on Editing Sequencer Data Over the Specified Range Track Edit Track Edit lets you edit areas of sequencer data that you specify Basic Operation for Track Editing 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 MEMD If you want to edit the pattern access the Pattern Edit screen by selecting Pattern Edit from the Menu window Pattern number Indicates the name of the currently selected song the measure location Measure number the time signature and the sequencer status RELAXWITHRPS Mei 4 4 STOP Measures containing no sequencer data Pattern name Phrases mm m C pus Measures containing sequencer data 3 a Setup J Ster Eg EE Current location Turns the RPS function on off RPS Turns Loop Play and Loop Recording on off LOOP Indicates sets the song s playback tempo ore If you select a song that is stored on disk a message of The Song is not Internal Song Load anyway for Song Edit will ask you for confirmation If you want to erase the song from the internal memory and load the new song press 7 OK If you decide not to erase the song from the internal memory press EXIT 2 Press 8 Tra
68. 8 MIDI Master Key Shift Controller Master Leuel 127 EG Patch Remain OFF Mix Parallel PARALLEL Preview Output Gain dB Scale Tune Keyboard Velocity REAL Keyboard Sens MEDIUM Wave Expansion Board Version R SR JUS8 09 Sessn 1 00 B iSRX O1DunamicDrm C SRX 02ConcertPno a T Write J Init The lower part of the screen indicates the Wave Expansion Board installation status and the program version 3 The parameters are organized into several edit groups Press 1 A or 2 to select the tab of the edit group that contains the parameter you want to set I For details on how the parameters are grouped refer to Parameter list Sound Parameter List 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify MEMD Some of the parameters have a MJ symbol This indicates that if you press LIST when setting one of these parameters the related window will appear For example if you press LIST at a parameter that requires you to specify a name the Name window will appear When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings screen a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen In such cases press W to scroll the screen downward 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to make the settings for the System function 7 To save the settings you mod
69. 8 TMT Bias Position C4 C4 C4 C4 Biss Direction ALL ALL ALL ALL Level U Curve 1 1 1 1 Wave Pitch Level U Sens 32 32 9 32 TUF Patch Pan 8 Tone Pan cy 8 8 hd 1 L Soft Pad A 1 en 3 E For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 TVA Patch Level Specifies the volume of the patch Value 0 127 Tone Level x Sets the volume of the tone This setting is useful primarily for adjusting the volume balance between tones Value 0 127 Bias Bias causes the volume to be affected by the keyboard position This is useful for changing volume through keyboard position pitch when playing acoustic instruments LOWER UPPER Level Level lt E Key Key Bias Point G9 C4 Bias Point G9 LO amp UP ALL Level Level gt 0 ee B Key Key C i Bias Point G9 C 1 Bias Point G9 Bias Level Adjusts the angle of the volume change that will occur in the selected Bias Direction Larger settings will produce greater change Negative values will invert the change direction Value 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Creating a Patch Bias Position Specifies the key relative to which the volume will be modified
70. Check Floppy Disk i ail Chorus Level multitimbre ss 173 Chorus Level patch jitsu tete etait ede 169 Chorus Level performance ss 173 Chorus Level rhythm set Chorus Output Assign multitimbre sss 173 Chorus Output Assign patch sse 169 Chorus Output Assign performance sss 173 Chorus Output Assign rhythm set 169 Chorus Output Select multitimbre ss 173 Chorus Output Select patch ss 169 Chorus Output Select performance um 173 Chorus Output Select rhythm set Chorus Sourte esee Chorus type eerte eerte om Hine er ede tnr Chorus Type multitimbre sss Chorus Type patch Chorus Type performance Chorus Type rhythm set E Clock Source patch acte etre tette tte reete Clock Source thy thin set iresi iea tne iret Coarse Tune multitimbre part e C rse tune patch oie e eds Coarse Tune performance part sss 100 Coarse tune rhythm tone ss 79 Coarse Tune rhythm wave ss 78 Coarse tune tone Compare function Cont Hold Pedal sis Continuous hold pedal switch CONTRAST knob Control Aftertouch 99 Control aftertouch switch essere 99 Control Bender 5 dete teen re dba ee nee ds 99 Control Hold Pedal 99 Control hold pedal switch 99 Control Modulation
71. Chordbender USER 005 My Orchestra USER 006 VORTEX USER 007 TempoMadness USER 008 Stream Bell USER 009 Blue Mutes USER 010 Ultrasmooth WE Execute An indication of EDITED will appear for the part for which the assigned patch or rhythm set was edited If you want to edit the patch or rhythm set settings for more than one part press 3 A or 4 W to select the part Specify the save destination patch and press 8 Execute The patch or rhythm set will be saved then you ll be returned to the Performance Write window where you need to save the multitimbre once again 114 Creating a Multitimbre Functions of Multitimbre Parameters This section explains the functions the different multitimbre parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters Settings Common to the Entire Multitimbre General Multitimbre Edit FANTOM Temp General General Grand xu PNO Part 1 ul Part Multitimbre Name FANTOM Temp MIDI Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb a X uie J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Multitimbre Settings p 112 Multitimbre Name You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the multitimbre Value space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt Pec eer ex For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 Making Settings for Each Part Part
72. Consolidated interface design with large graphic LCD The Fantom features a large quarter VGA sized LCD The graphical display uses four levels of grayscale to simultaneously show all relevant settings for sounds or sequencer operations guaranteeing smooth operation Since a large amount of data can be displayed at once buttons and knobs are laid out simply letting you access a desired parameter with a minimum of operation The interface is designed with your creativity as the first priority Top level sound generator for maximum expressive power The Fantom contains the same type of 64 voice 16 part multitimbral sound generator as on the XV 5080 acclaimed by music production professionals The total of 896 preset patches include new patches that have been tuned specifically for the Fantom to take advantage of its keyboard knobs and other realtime controllers Four level velocity switching lets you move between four stereo waves for the same amazing expressive power as on the XV 5080 The spaciousness of the sound field tonal changes controlled by velocity and endless details of expressive nuance are at your fingertips Matrix Control lets you vary large numbers of parameters at once and can be controlled using realtime controllers such as the knobs and D Beam control The Fantom s dynamic expressive power can be controlled by simple operations Wave Expansions Boards can also be installed to freely customize your Fantom for you
73. Controller 90 Creating a Performance With the Fantom you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating performances and the functions of the performance parameters How to Make the Performance Settings Start with an existing performance and edit it to create a new performance But before you do try to envision what the entire performance will sound like and decide which patch or rhythm set to assign to each of 16 parts 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and select the performance whose settings you wish to modify p 85 HINT If you want to create all your performances from the ground up rather than the performances that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 91 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Menu Performance Edit Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play D 3 Press or w to select Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The performance Edit screen appears EX i vai ice Et t 5 5 Bu General est End Bs SBS Parti i Performance Name Fantasm Arpeggio ere Seq Tempo Override Oh Rhythm Ptn Querriding Tempo 139 Controller Zone Pa
74. Controller Ext Switch oH ON ON OFF Ext Bank Select MSB m Se Ext Bank Select LSB Part Ext Program Number MIDI Ext Level Effects Ext Pan hd 1 i2 L O J write J Init J Copy Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Int Switch m Wu Press or b to select the zone that is connected to the part you want to play 7 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC to select ON rd Repeat steps 5 7 to turn the Internal Switch on for all zones that are connected to the parts you want to play 9 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and begin playing Playing Different Sounds in Different Areas of the Keyboard Split In Performance mode you can divide the keyboard and play a different patch in each area this is called split As the note range that plays each zone can be specified individually you can split the keyboard into a maximum of 16 sections For instance you can play strings in the lower range piano in the upper range and both sounds in the middle range Part 1 Strings BENENBEEEEERENEREEEEEEENHEEERERERHRRERER RENE RH HERREN NNI Part 1 Part 2 Part 2 Piano Strings Piano MEMD A split performance is one application of a layer performance Changing the key range of each patch in the layer performance results in a split performance nore
75. EE dre oen 81 REV codeine ML nie cc 165 Reverb Level multitimbre 173 Reverb Level patch 169 Reverb Level performance 173 Reverb Level rhythm set ss 169 Reverb Output Assign multitimbre sss 173 Reverb Output Assign patch Be Reverb Output Assign performance sss 173 Reverb Output Assign rhythm set sss 169 Reverb Source ie 174 Reverb typ 177 Reverb Type multitimbre 173 Reverb Type patch 169 Reverb Type performance 173 Reverb Type rhythm set ss 169 RESET hs 16 REYTAM ette nete a 16 41 Rhythm Rhythm set group ss 40 Rhythm Compare iii 73 RhyEh COPY ne E 70 Rhythm Edit VIVID onset Eee LE UTD EET er tenants 77 Rhythm Initialize Rhythm Level Rhythm Name y Rhythm Patterns ieii ee RE Ri Ee bie peres 41 Rhythm pattern accent rate performance ssssss 96 Rhythm pattern accent rate rhythm set T Rhythm pattern hold switch performance sss Rhythm pattern hold switch rhythm set sss Rhythm pattern key trigger performance sssssssss Rhythm pattern key trigger rhythm set sss Rhythm pattern keyboard velocity performance x Rhythm pattern keyboard velocity rhythm set Rhythm pattern note assign performance
76. Filter Type parameter lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a tone s upper harmonics for a more rounded warmer sound Higher settings make it sound brighter If BPF is selected harmonic components will change depending on the TVF Cutoff Frequency setting This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds With HPF selected higher Cutoff Frequency settings will reduce lower harmonics to emphasize just the brighter components of the sound With PKG selected the harmonics to be emphasized will vary depending on Cutoff Frequency setting HINT To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative differences in the Cutoff Frequency values set for each tone set the Cutoff Offset parameter PATCH General p 47 Cutoff KF Cutoff Frequency Key Follow Use this parameter if you want the cutoff frequency to change according to the key that is pressed Relative to the cutoff frequency at the C4 key center C positive settings will cause the cutoff frequency to rise for notes higher than C4 and negative settings will cause the cutoff frequency to fall for notes higher than C4 Larger settings will produce greater change Value 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 Cutoff frequency Octave
77. Functions of Multitimbre Parameters sss sn 115 Settings Common to the Entire Multitimbre General ss 115 Making Settings for Each Part Part 115 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI 118 Setting Effects for a Multitimbre Effects MFX MEX Control Chorus Reverb 120 Scale Tune Settings Scale Tune ette nd cent che eret etre 120 Changing the Settings of the Patch Assigned to a Part 121 10 Playing Back SOng onec ciere eere tte eere es ttes 122 Playing a Song Immediately from Disk Quick Play ss 122 Playing Back Songs Consecutively Chain Play ss 122 Creating a Ghana ires nieto Dre tenue ee oti i Re Habet et titres tee ne 122 Saving a Chain to Disk Save sun 123 Loading a Chain from Disk Load ss 124 Playin ga Chain eee eter Fon p I en ntt erit tera Hes 124 Various Playback Methods sens 124 Fast Forward and Rewind During Playback ss 124 Playing Back Correctly from the Middle of the Song MIDI Update 124 Muting the Playback of a Specific Instrument 125 Changing the Playback Tempo of a Song 125 Playing a Song Back at a Fixed Tempo Muting the Tempo Track 125 Playing Back a S MRC Format Song see 125 Playing Back a Song Repeatedly Loop Play 125 Using the D Beam Controller to Start Stop Song Playback sss 126 Recording DI 127 Two Recording Methods 127 Before You Record a New Song esse
78. HINT If you want to use a pedal connected to the CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jack to specify the area for recording you must first set the Pedal 1 or 2 Assign parameter SYSTEM Controller to PUNCH I O p 184 1 In the Recording Standby window set the Loop Punch parameter to MANUAL PUNCH IN 2 Press STOP PLAY Song playback will begin and the Realtime Recording window will appear Realtime Recording Press REC to close 3 At the point where you want to begin recording press 6 Punch In or step on the pedal Playback will switch to record mode 4 Atthe point where you want to stop recording once again press 6 Punch Out or step on the pedal You will return to playback mode 5 Press STOP PLAY to stop playback Recording Songs Correct the Timing of Your Playing as You Record Recording Quantize The Quantize function automatically corrects inaccuracies in the timing of your keyboard performance aligning the notes to accurate timing intervals During realtime recording you can quantize while you record Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic settings described in step 3 of Basic Operation for Realtime Recording p 129 Quantize Specify whether to quantize while recording Value OFF Quantize will not be applied while recording GRID Grid Quantize will be applied while recording Use this when you want the timing to be accurate such as when recor
79. Hew Song M 1 Octa Trans c ciss euo Gn e Internalsona PATCH User Library Ch Tx 1 Rx 1 J4 120 USER Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DO aA 4 STOP D Beam MFX LoFi Compress JE Foot Type m Realtime Control cutott Resonance Breath decay Time WB Portamento fJ Mono Poly ED oct Down GD octup CHO Delay REU SRU Hall ETETE e MFX Switches multi effects on and off e CHO Switches chorus on and off e REV Switches reverb on and off Applying Effects in Patch Mode Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output Effects Here you can make overall settings for effects and the output destination and level of each signal 1 Select the sound for which you want to make output settings p 32 p 40 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Press or w to select a Patch Edit or Rhythm Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the Effects tab A screen like the one shown below appears LI NN EO CMB Tone Switch My 23v Sv 4j Tone Select ijv 2 3 4 General Effects Arpeggio Controller s ourrur MEX IR MFX Control Chorus Reverb Reverb s SRU Hall na ILS J Init Copy When MFX CHO REV effect switches are turned off effects processors that are turned o
80. If you set the Status parameter to NOTE P AFT C C or PROG specify the range of data Specify the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To shift all Note or Polyphonic Aftertouch data set C1 G9 To shift the timing of C4 Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C4 C4 To shift the timing of Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data from C3 to C4 specify C3 C4 If you want to shift all controller numbers set this to 0 127 If you want to move all program numbers set this to 1 128 To shift the timing of number 4 specify 4 4 To shift the timing of numbers from 3 to 14 specify 3 14 Editing Songs Channel MIDI Channel Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be shifted in time To shift clocks of all sequencer data set this parameter to ALL To shift the sequencer data clock of just one specific MIDI channel select that MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 nore If you set the Track parameter to TEMPO or if the Status parameter is set to EXC TUNE or PTN the Channel parameter will not be available 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Thinning Out the Sequencer Data Data Thin Continuously variable controllers such as aftertouch pitch bend and expression tend to create unexpectedly large amounts of data when operated Data Thin will strip out
81. If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII The Track Edit Extract window appears Track MTS Measure 0061 for gt Track ALL Mode REPLACE Status RLL Range Channel ALL 7 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Source Track Check modify the phrase track or pattern from which the sequencer data will be extracted After Extract is executed the selected sequencer data no longer remains on this phrase track or pattern Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures from which sequencer data will be extracted If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Track Destination Track Check modify the move destination track or pattern Value ALL According to its MIDI channel the sequencer data will be divided among phrase tracks 1 16 TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Mode Extract mode Specifies whether you want to keep the sequencer data at the destination Value MIX The data at the destination will combine with the extracted data REPLACE The data at the destination will be erased and replaced by the extracted data MEMD
82. LIST The Name window appears Generationxy Patch Name abcdef shiik Imnorarstuvuxsz 8123456789 1 4 X amp Cat 7 71 2 9 J CI 29 J Insert Delete 2 Press or to move the cursor to the location where you wish to input a character 3 Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC a w to select the character that you wish to input To insert a space at the cursor location press 3 Insert To delete the character at the cursor position press 4 Delete gt Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary p Press 8 OK to finalize the name Playing in Patch Mode Patch mode is the mode in which you can play the keyboard using a Functions in the PATCH PLAY Screen single sound patch or rhythm set If a rhythm set is selected you can play percussion instruments from the keyboard Indicates the current sound generating mode PATCH PLAY Hew Song M 1 A4 stor rr Indicates the name of the currently selected song the measure location the time signature and the sequencer status About the PATCH PLAY Screen Sets the Octave Shift Oct and the Transpose Trans Displaying PATCH PLAY Screen To access the PATCH PLAY screen use the following procedure Indicates the song file name ER Gay oo Internalsong Ofo Trans c fc auo m Playing in Patch Mode 1 Press MODE Switches multi effects MFX Turns the RPS function on o
83. MIDI Clock Therefore using a MTC is convenient for synchronization of the hard disk recorder and the Fantom However VS Series devices also feature specialized tracks for recording MIDI Clock so with the Fantom s MIDI Clock recorded in this manner we have another synchronizing technique in which the VS device appears to be sending MIDI Clock although it is actually playing back tracks to which MIDI Clock has been recorded However since the tempo must be recorded to the VS sync track beforehand MTC is only convenient in synchronizing with songs that do not contain great amounts of tempo data Settings Common to All Modes System Function Sync Output Sync Output Switch Set this parameter ON when you want synchronization related MIDI messages MIDI Clock Start Continue Stop Song Position Pointer and Song Select to be transmitted to an external MIDI device If not set it OFF Value OFF ON Soft Through Soft Through Switch Thru function re transmits all messages received at the MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector without modifying them in any way Normally you ll leave this OFF but when using an external sequencer you should set it ON Value OFF ON MMC Mode When synchronizing the Fantom with a hard disk recorder such as one from the Roland VS series specify which synchronization signal the Fantom s sequencer will use for operation Value MASTER The Fantom will be the master U
84. Mode MMC Output we 181 MMC output switch es 181 MODE J s M 17 27 Mode 1 4 patch eet em OR CR rte EAS Mode 1 4 performance 2 ricette iter ttes Mode usto M T neitin iiini Modulation multitimbre ss Modulation performance E Mono Poly multitimbre part sse 116 Mono Poly patch ss 47 Mono Poly performance part 100 Motif patch 51 Motif performance aestate aede t eene tre e dns 95 MOVE dee ts diti ettet cie tet e Gees ette iau 157 M ve Event EE RR RENS ette Nr esten 157 Gne 26 MIC sus 180 Types of MTC we 181 MTC Err t Eevel irran tre eget et epe tht aR 182 MTC Frame Rate ins 181 MTC Offset Frame ie MTC Offset Hour ins MTC Offset Minute nn 181 MTC Offset Seconds 181 MTC offset time frame ss 182 MTC offset time hour T MTC offset time minute oo seen entente 181 MITC offset time second ss 181 MTC Sync Output we 181 MTC sync output switch we 181 Multi effects A source sse 173 Multi effects chorus send level multitimbre 172 Multi effects chorus send level patch ssssss 168 Multi effects chorus send level performance 172 Multi effects chorus send level rhythm set Multi effects control channel Multi effects control destination 1 4 sse Multi effects contr
85. Mono Poly EB oct Down KJ octup Favorite Sound Bank 1 Blues Ha Tight Br XU Trom LegatoJ Soaring rp lass bone upitr Hrns2 Make sure that the patch rhythm set select switch is set to PATCH If it is set to RHYTHM turn the VALUE dial or press DEC to change it to PATCH 3 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the patch group Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a patch group USER User PR A E Preset A E GM GM GM2 XP A C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the patch number Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a patch number UJ N Playing in Patch Mode Selecting Favorite Patches Favorite Sound You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used patches in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound By using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board note If a patch stored in a Wave Expansion Board has been registered as a Favorite Sound it cannot be selected unless the corresponding wave expansion board is installed UE For instructions on how to register to the Favorite Sounds refer to Registering a Favorite Patch Favorite Sound p 46 Selecting from 1 8 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 Press 1 8 to select a patch M 1 4 4 STOP PATCH U
86. N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and CAUTION Notices improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly N CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual unit The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user installable options see p 196 Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the Q Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Never use or store the unit in places that are Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight CRI in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are KT 8 8 equip NO Damp e g
87. Part 1 rem Multitimbre Name FANTOM Temp MIDI Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb a gt X J Write J Init Copy 4 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Press 1 A or 2 to select the tab for the editing group that contains the parameter you wish to edit UE For details on the parameter groupings refer to Parameter list Sound Parameter List 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify MEMD Some of the parameters have a B symbol This indicates that if you press LIST when setting one of these parameters the related window will appear For example if you press LIST at a parameter that requires you to specify a name the Name window will appear When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings screen a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen In such cases press W to scroll the screen downward HINT If you have selected a screen for parameters that can be set for each part first move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to edit and then press 4 or gt to select the part 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to complete a multitimbre 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 114 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to
88. Press 1 A or 2 to select the MIDI tab Style Specify the basi f tyle of th io A screen like the one shown below appears YS PESE YE RASE PET OEMAD Dem Variation Select the variation performance pattern for each Systeme SS arpeggio style Eer MIDI Motif Specify the order in which the component notes of the Performance Ctrl Ch 16 Sequencer par formannen ch pe chord will be sounded Patch Rhythm Rx Ch 1 i se SA Controller Patch Rhythm Tx Ch Exin Key Trigger Specify the timing at which the arpeggio is to Remote Keyboard Sw OFF E n P Exclusive Protect OFF begin playing Preview Device ID 17 2 Scale Tune Rx Program Change on Tempo SEQ Specify the tempo of an arpeggio Rx Bank Select ON Accent Rate Vary the strength and note length of the accents to Wave Expansion Board Version 5 e A SR JU89 09 Sessn 1 00 modify the rhythmic feel groove of the performance B iSRX O1DunamicDrm CHAT See Shuffle Rate Create shuffle rhythms by modifying the timing at rite init which notes are sounded Shuffle Resolution Specify the timi f the notes in t f 7 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Remote Keyboard PRE RES RE RES note value Sw Velocity Specify the note strength of the keys you play 8 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC to select ON Octave Range Specify the range of the arpeggio performance 9 Play your exter
89. Rhythm set select switch Patch group Patch number PLAY Hew Song M 1 PASTOR oe Transl crs xu Gap foo Internaisong User Library Cont ol Ch OFF 120 USER FANTOM Temp _ Part Ch So Mu Flaten Volume Pan 10 15 RPRST O11 XU Pop Kit 16 0 m n eifi PR Grand XV 166 S cor 2 2 PR A 100 m coo 35 PR 1 S m n 4 4 PR 166 m cr Sis PR A 801 Grand XU 166 S cr 6 6 PR A 901 Grand XU 100 m 0 uo PR R 8001 Grand XU 166 m 6 oor Favorite Sound Bank i Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient Bend ac Soaring d pet Sax hord Hrns2 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a patch or rhythm set If you want to select a rhythm set set the patch rhythm set select switch to R EM the cursor is located at the patch group or patch number if you press LIST the Patch List window appears allowing you to select a patch from the list p 33 By pressing 1 8 you can select your favorite patches p 33 MEMD This setting is linked with the Patch Rhythm Patch Bank and Patch Number parameters MULTITIMBRE Part and can be saved as multitimbre settings p 115 Adjusting the Volume and Pan of Each Part In the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen you can edit the following settings of each part MIDI Receive Channel Ch Volume Volume Pan Pan Output Destination Out Chorus Send Level Ch
90. SRX O82ConcertPno a id Write Init In this screen you can set the following parameters for the control pedals Pedal 1 2 Assign Specify the function that will be controlled by a pedal connected to the CTL 1 or CTL 2 PEDAL jack Pedal 1 2 Polarity Switch the polarity of the pedal HINT For details on each parameter refer to Controller Settings Controller p 184 4 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting 5 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY screen 164 Adding Effects This section explains the procedures and settings for applying effects in each mode Rs For details of the Fantom s onboard effects refer to About the Onboard Effects p 23 Turning Effects On and Off The Fantom s onboard effects can be turned on off as a whole Turn these settings OFF when you wish to listen to the unprocessed sound as you create a sound or when you wish to use external effects processors instead of the built in effects nore Effect ON OFF settings are global Fantom settings These settings cannot be made for each Patch or Performance individually The PLAY screen for each mode provides effect switches that allow you to turn the three effects on off Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the effect switches located in the upper part of the screen and turn the VALUE dial or press INC or DEC to turn the switch on off
91. SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 Reverb Type Selects the type of reverb Value 0 Off Reverb is not used 1 Reverb Normal reverb 2 SRV Room This reverb simulates typical room acoustic reflections 3 SRV Hall This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic reflections 4 SRV Plate This reverb simulates a reverb plate a popular type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate You can also achieve unusual metallic sounding reverbs using SRV Plate 5 GM2 Reverb General MIDI 2 reverb Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb Value 0 127 D Reverb Output Assign Specifies how the sound routed through reverb will be output Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo MFX A Source Multi Effects A Source When a performance is selected Selects the multi effects parameter settings that will be used by the performance If you wish to use the performance settings select PRF If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value PRF P1 P16 When a multitimbre is selected Selects the multi effects parameter settings that will be used by the multitimbre If you wish to use the multitimbre settings select
92. Select The Multitimbre Edit screen appears FANTOM Temp General Grand XU PNO Part 1 Part Multitimbre Name m FANTOM Temp MIDI Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb X a X IS J Init Copy 4 Press 6 Write The Multitimbre Write window appears USER 01 FANTOM Temp USER 02 Techno USER 03 House USER 04 Hip Hop USER 05 Pop USER 06 Fusion USER 07 Funk Rock USER 08 Hard Rock USER 09 Blues USER 10 Ac Jazz Save destination multitimbre FANTOM Temp gt 5 Press or W to specify the save destination multitimbre 6 Press 8 Execute The display will indicate Are you sure 7 Press 8 OK to execute the save operation To cancel the operation press EXIT When Changing the Settings for the Patch or Rhythm Set Assigned to a Partin a Multiimbre After changing the settings for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part in a multitimbre if you then try to save the multitimbre without first saving the changes in the settings the following message appears Edited patch or rhythm will be discard Sure brite Execute If you do not need to keep the patch or rhythm set settings press 8 Execute to save the multitimbre If you want to keep the patch or rhythm set settings press 7 Write Part to access the Multitimbre Part Write window Grana xu USER 001 Generationxu USER 002 Grand Xu USER 003 GlobalWarmup USER 004
93. Switch Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off Value OFF ON Hold Rhythm Pattern Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Rhythm pattern playback Value OFF ON Style Rhythm Pattern Style Select the basic playback style of the Rhythm pattern UE For details regarding Rhythm Pattern Style refer to Rhythm Pattern Style List Sound Parameter List Accent Rate Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the Rhythm pattern A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 Shuffle Resolution Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value The note value can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note Value F J Keyboard Velocity Rhythm Pattern Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how str
94. System Patch Rhythm Set Disk 1 Only in PR A PRST 2 The selected Patches Rhythm Sets cannot be changed Temporary Memory Temporary Area This is the area that holds the data for the patch multitimbre or performance that you ve selected using the panel buttons When you play the keyboard or play back a sequence sound is produced based on data in the temporary area When you edit a patch multitimbre or performance you do not directly modify the data in memory rather you call up the data into the temporary area and edit it there Settings in the temporary area are temporary and will be lost when the power is turned off or when you select another patch multitimbre performance To keep the settings you have modified you must write them into rewritable memory Rewritable Memory System Memory System memory stores system parameter settings that determine how the Fantom functions User Memory User memory is where you normally store the data you need USER memory contains 128 patches 16 rhythm sets 16 multitimbres and 64 performances Disk Optional 3 5 2DD 2HD Patches multitimbres performances and system settings can be stored on disk together as a single file Non Rewritable Memory Preset Memory Data in Preset memory cannot be rewritten However you can call up settings from preset memory into the temporary area modify
95. TEMP SETUP SYSTEM PATCH USER 001 128 TEMP RHYTHM USER 001 016 TEMP MULTITIMBRE USER 01 16 TEMP PATCH 1 TEMP PATCH 2 CTRL PERFORMANCE USER 01 64 TEMP PATCH 1 TEMP PATCH 2 CTRL 1 Only the current multitimbre performance settings will be transmitted 2 The current multitimbre performance settings and the setting of a patch or rhythm set assigned to the part will be transmitted Type of Data to Transmit ALL Patch rhythm set multitimbre and performance SETUP Setup SYSTEM System PATCH Patch RHYTHM Rhythm set MULTITIMBRE Multitimbre PERFORMANCE Performance Transmit Source Data USER Data from user memory will be transmitted TEMP Transmit the data from the temporary area CTRL The state of the multitimbre performance e g the multitimbre performance bank select and program changes will be transmitted as MIDI channel messages not as exclusive messages Refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter list for more on the Control Change messages that are received 5 Setthe external MIDI device so that it will be ready to receive data and press 8 Execute to execute data transmission While the data is being transmitted the display will indicate Processing When Complete is displayed the transmission has been completed HINT To halt during transmission press EXIT 194 Transmitting Sound Set
96. UP The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will rise in steps of an octave maximum 3 octaves ARP OCT DW The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will lower in steps of an octave maximum 3 octaves PTN SWITCH Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off PTN ACCENT Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate PTN SHFFLE Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate Polarity D Beam Polarity Switch the polarity of the D Beam controller With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted Range STANDARD REVERSE Range Lower D Beam Range Lower Specify the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values below this setting will not be output Value 0 UPPER Range Upper D Beam Range Upper Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values above this setting will not be output Value LOWER 127 Zone D Beam Zone Number Specify the zone that will be controlled by the D Beam controller The effect will apply to the part that is connected to the zone you specify here Value 1 16 Zone Settings Zone Performance Edit General Zone West End Bs SBS Parti Renee zouet 2 3 4 micro Transmit Channel 1 2 3 4 Rhythm Ptn Int Switch oN ow ow ON Controller Ext Switch ON ON ON OFF Zoe Ext Bank Select MSB e fe Ext Bank Select LSB Part Ext Program Number MIDI Ext Level Effects Ext Pan z i 2
97. Vibrate Depth For each part this adjusts the depth of the vibrato effect the depth at which the pitch is modulated The pitch will be modulated more greatly for higher settings and less with lower settings Value 64 63 Vibrate Delay Part Vibrate Delay For each part this adjusts the time delay until the vibrato pitch modulation effect begins Higher settings will produce a longer delay time before vibrato begins while lower settings produce a shorter time Value 64 63 101 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Octave Shift Part Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Value 3 3 NE Note that when a rhythm set is assigned to a part if the Octave Shift parameter is set the rhythm tone that is played also changes Vel Sens Offset Part Velocity Sensitivity Offset This changes the volume and cutoff frequency for each part according to the velocity with which the keys are pressed If you want strongly played notes to raise the volume cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the volume cutoff frequency use negative settings Set Velocity Sensitivity to 0 when you want sounds played at a fixed volume and cutoff frequency regardless of the force with which the keys are played Value 63 63 yon Patches also contain a Velocity Sensitivity Offset s
98. according to the MIDI messages that were received and outputs the sound as an analog signal from the output jacks or headphone jack Sequencer Section This section records operations of the keyboard controller section as MIDI messages and transmits the recorded MIDI messages to the sound generator section MIDI messages recorded on the sequencer can also be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector to allow the Fantom to also control external MIDI devices Classification of Fantom Sound Types When using the Fantom you will notice that a variety of different categories come into play when working with sounds What follows is a simple explanation of each sound category Tones On the Fantom the tones are the smallest unit of sound However it is not possible to play a tone by itself The patch is the unit of sound which can be played and the tones are the basic building blocks which make up the patch t Pitch TVF TVA Envelope Envelope Envelope nt audio signal control signal Tones consist of the following five components WG Wave Generator Specifies the PCM waveform wave that is the basis of the sound and determines how the pitch of the sound will change The Fantom has 1 083 different waveforms All patches built into the Fantom consist of combinations of tones which are created based on these waveforms ne There are four wave generators for each rhythm tone percussion instrument sounds TVF Time Var
99. also be transmitted when you switch performances specify the value that you want to transmit 0 127 for each zone Value 0 127 yon The data of the zone for which the External Switch is turned off will not be transmitted Ext Program Number External Program Change Number If you want a Program Change number to also be transmitted when you switch performances specify the value that you want to transmit 0 127 for each zone If you do not want this message to be transmitted set this to Value 1 128 von The data of the zone for which the External Switch is turned off will not be transmitted Ext Level External Level If you want Volume messages to also be transmitted when you select a performance specify the desired value 0 127 for the zone If you do not want this message to be transmitted set this to Value 0 127 von The data of the zone for which the External Switch is turned off will not be transmitted Ext Pan External Pan If you want Pan messages to also be transmitted when you select a performance specify the desired value L64 0 63R for the zone If 2 you do not want this message to be transmitted set this to Value L64 0 63R note The data of the zone for which the External Switch is turned off will not be transmitted Key Range Lower Keyboard Range Lower Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each zone Valu
100. be able to modify the various parameters of the note Step Time Gate Ratio Velocity 9 When you release the key the note you input will be finalized and you will be ready to input the next note HINT If you input a note or a rest by mistake press BWD or 6 Step Back to delete it When you delete a note the deleted note will sound by way of confirmation 10 Repeat the above steps to continue inputting HINT The previous value of each parameter is remembered This means that if you want to use the same settings as the previously input note there is no need to change the settings Once you have set the Gate Time parameter and Velocity parameter it is not normally necessary to change them so all you have to do is set the Step Time parameter and specify the pitch note of each note 11 When you are finished step recording press EXIT or STOP PLAY The REC indicator will go dark HINT If you are not happy with the results of the previous step recording you can press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Step Recording to return to the state prior to recording Undo The Relation between Note Value Length and Gate Time The relation between the length of the note value and the gate time is shown below Since the Fantom s sequencer uses a TPON Ticks Per Quarter Note i e resolution of 480 a quarter note gate time is 480 clocks Note Gate time 30 40 45 60 80 90
101. between adjacent downbeats With a setting of 0 the backbeat will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat With a setting of 100 the backbeat will be moved to the same timing as the following downbeat Value 0 100 Selecting the Sequencer Data that will Be Recorded Recording Select When you use realtime recording all of your sequencer data will normally be recorded If you want to avoid recording a specific type of data you can turn its Recording Select setting OFF 1 Access the Recording Standby window p 129 2 Press 8 RecSel The Recording Select window appears Recording Select 3 Use or W to select the sequencer data MIDI messages that will be recorded Note Note messages These MIDI messages represent notes Poly Aftertouch Polyphonic aftertouch These MIDI messages apply aftertouch to individual keys Control Change Control change messages These MIDI messages apply various effects such as modulation or expression Program Change Program change messages These MIDI messages select sounds Channel Aftertouch Channel aftertouch messages These MIDI messages apply aftertouch to an entire MIDI channel Pitch Bend Pitch bend messages These MIDI messages change the pitch System Exclusive System exclusive messages These MIDI messages are used to make settings unique to the Fantom such as sound parameters 4 Press 8 On Off to specify whether the message wil
102. between left and right each time a key is pressed Higher settings will produce a greater amount of change L or R settings will reverse the order in which the pan will alternate between left and right For example if two rhythm tones are set to L and R respectively the panning of the two rhythm tones will alternate each time they are played Value L63 0 63R Env T1 V Sens TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVA envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 82 Creating a Rhythm Set Env T4 V Sens TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the Time 4 value of the TVA envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env Time 1 4 TVA Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the TVA envelope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached For Creating a Rhythm Set example Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2 Value 0 127 Env Level 1 3 TVA Envelope Level 1 3 Specify the TVA envelope levels Level 1 Level 3 The
103. can be changed only in the PLAY screen of each mode If the tempo change value differs from the playback tempo this means that the playback tempo has been changed temporarily In other words since the tempo change value has not been rewritten this setting will be lost if you select another song or turn off the power If you want to play back at this tempo the next time as well you must re save the song to disk This will rewrite the tempo change value so that it matches the playback tempo Editing Songs Data Handled by the Beat Track The Beat track records time signature data Beat Change This specifies the time signature Beat Viewing sequencer data View Since a phrase track or pattern contains a large amount of sequencer data the display may be cluttered and difficult to read For this reason the Fantom lets you specify the type s of sequencer data that will be displayed in the screen This is convenient when you want to check or edit only a specific type of sequencer data 1 Access the Microscope window 2 Press 7 View The View Select window appears Channel ALL v Poly Rftertouch Control Change Jan Off an avos 3 Move the cursor to Channel and select the MIDI channel of the sequencer data that you want to view If you want to view sequencer data of all MIDI channels select ALL If you want to view only sequencer data of a specific MIDI channel select 1 16
104. clockwise increases the value counterclockwise decreases the value Holding down SHIFT as you move the VALUE dial increases value increments so you can make large value changes faster INC and DEC Pressing INC increases the value and DEC decreases it Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment For faster value increases keep INC pressed down and press DEC For decreasing value faster keep DEC pressed down and press INC If you press INC or DEC while holding down SHIFT the value increments will get bigger 29 Overview of the Fantom Overview of the Fantom Assigning a Name On the Fantom you can assign names to each patch rhythm set multitimbre performance Song and Pattern The procedure is the same for any type of data 1 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the location where you wish to input a character 2 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the character Available characters symbols are space A Z az 0 9 amp 4 lt gt 4_ de yon File names and volume label names may not contain lowercase characters or certain symbols lt gt gt Assigning a Name Using a Name Window You can use a Name window to assign a name As the Name window displays a list of characters that can be entered you can quickly select a desired character 1 In a naming screen move the cursor to the text input location and press
105. convenient to use the Arpeggiator to record the bass part In this way it is convenient to use the arpeggiator as a compositional tool 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Select the multitimbre that you will use for recording p 107 3 Press or W to select the part track on which the arpeggio performance will be recorded The selected part will be indicated by the i symbol and the performance will be recorded on that part track 4 Hold down JUMP and press ARPEGGIO The Arpeggio window appears In this window you can make various arpeggio related settings Switch ma Accent Rate 160 Hold OFF Shuffle Rate 58 Style HOTE VALUES Shuffle Resolution 7 Variation Velocity REAL Motif DOWN Octave Range fo Key Trigger orF Tempo SEGD 120 5 Specify how the arpeggio will be played HINT Of all the arpeggio settings the Style Arpeggio Style is particularly important The playback pattern of the arpeggio is determined mainly by this selection For details refer to 9 Press STOP PLAY The Recording Standby window will close and the REC indicator will change from blinking to lit After that recording will begin 10 Play a chord on the keyboard Arpeggios will be sounded according to the notes of the chord you press and will be recorded on the part track you selected in step 3 11 When you finish recording press STOP PLAY The REC indicator
106. cursor to the song file name in the upper part of the PLAY screen MULTITIMBRE PLAY New Sana bat 4 4 sroP ode Trans c fc au CREME User Library Control Ch OFF J 120 USER 01 FANTOM Temp PartCh So Mu Patch Volume Pan 10 16 R PRST 911 XU Pop Kit 100 ms 0 cr Bif 81 Grand XU 100 m 0 nu 2 2 8 XU Ac Bass 166 es 0 co JE 01 Grand XU 100 m 8 4 4 01 Grand XU 166 m0 com Sis 91 Grand XU 166 0 or f Grand XU 166 6 zl Grand XU 100 m 5 3 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the song that you want to play When the cursor is located at the song file name you can press LIST to access the Song List window and choose from a list of songs on the disk 4 Press STOP PLAY to start playback When the song finishes playing it will stop automatically If you want to stop playback midway through the song press STOP PLAY MEMD If you have interrupted song playback may be displayed at the right of the measure number This indicates that the song is stopped in mid measure Playing Back Songs Consecutively Chain Play The Chain Play function lets you consecutively play back Quick Play songs on disk in the order you specify This is analogous to the programmed playback feature found on some CD players Since not only songs but also sounds data f
107. d extension audio apr s installation Carte d extension Wave serie SRX Lorsque l installation des cartes d extension audio est termin e Carte d extension Wave serie SR JV80 proc der une v rification pour s assurer que l ordinateur les identifie correctement 1 Mettre sous tension de la facon d crite sous Turning On the Power Quick Start p 4 2 Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour ouvrir la fen tre Menu L cran System Edit s affiche V rifiez que le nom de la carte d expansion Wave installe s est affich o Sequencer MIDI General Local Switch ON Master Tune 448 8 Master Key Shift a Controller Master Leuel 127 EG Patch Remain OFF Mix Parallel PRRRLLEL Connecteur j Preview Output Gain 8 dE Scale Tune Keyboard Velocity REAL J MEDIUM M Support carte Support carte Avant l installation orienter les supports carte tel qu indiqu sur le sch ma Sile m me type de carte d expansion Wave est install dans les Connecteur fentes EXP B et C il sera uniquement possible de s lectionner les donn es de la carte d expansion Wave install e dans la fente EXP B Utilisez l outil d installation fourni avec la carte d expansion Wave pour tourner les supports en position LOCK verrouill afin de retenir la carte en place e 4 LOCK Outil d installation Version 1
108. each controller Realtime controllers p 163 D Beam controller p 162 A pedal connected to the CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jack p 164 Playing a Song Back at a Fixed Tempo Muting the Tempo Track If the tempo changes while a song is being played back this is because those tempo changes have been recorded in the Tempo track If you want to override these tempo changes and play back at a fixed tempo you can mute the Tempo track D For details on this operation refer to Silencing the Playback of a Track Mute p 137 Playing Back a S MRC Format Song The Fantom is able to play back S MRC format songs created on the MC 50 in the same way as MRC Pro songs or Standard MIDI Files However S MRC format songs cannot be Quick Played You must first load them into internal memory and convert them to MRC Pro song format before playing them LN For details on the procedure refer to Loading a File from Disk into the Fantom Load p 188 Playing Back a Song Repeatedly Loop Play Use the Loop function when you want to repeatedly play back an entire song or just a specified portion of a song 1 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to LOOP in the upper part of the PLAY screen 2 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC to turn the Loop switch on Hew Song M 1 BPA STOP Det e Trans c USER 01 FANTOM Temp FartCh So Mu Patch Volume Pan 10 19 R PRST 911 X 166 m 0 H
109. fall of the sound Some of the Fantom s one shot waveforms are sounds that are complete in themselves such as percussive instrument sounds The Fantom also contains many other one shot waveforms that are elements of other sounds These include attack components such as piano hammer sounds and guitar fret noises Looped These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well as sustained sounds Loop waveforms repeatedly play back loop the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively steady state The Fantom s looped waveforms also include components of other sounds such as piano string resonant vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments Creating a Patch The following diagram shows an example of sound electric organ that combines one shot and looped waveforms TVA ENV for looped Organ waveform sustain portion TVA ENV for one shot Key Resulting TVA ENV click waveform attack portion change Level Time Note off Note off Cautions When Using a One shot Waveform It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one shot waveform to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform or to turn it into a sustaining sound If you were to program such an envelope you would be attempting to shape a portion of the sound that simply doesn t exist and the envelope would have no effect Cautions When Using a Loop Waveform With many acoustic instruments such as piano and sax extre
110. for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Larger settings will produce greater change Value 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Env Time 1 4 TVA Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the TVA envelope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next volume level is reached For example Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2 Value 0 127 HINT To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative differences in the Env Time 1 parameter Attack Time values set for each tone set the Attack Time Offset parameter PATCH General p 48 Similarly to edit the overall patch while preserving the relative differences in the Env Time 4 parameter Release Time values set for each tone set the Release Time Offset parameter PATCH General p 48 Env Level 1 3 TVA Envelope Level 1 3 Specify the TVA envelope levels Level 1 Level 3 These settings specify how the volume will change at each point relative to the standard volume the Tone Level value specified in the TVA screen Value 0 127 T1 T2 T3 T4 Level Time A L1 L2 L3 A Note on Note off T Time L Level HINT The envelopes appearing at the lower part of the T
111. from a pre existing song in a certain genre for example dance music and then creating a new song with that Phrase used as the basic motif This is referred to as Break Beats Modifying Pitch Pitch Patel E E er Generationxy CMB Tone Switch ij 2 3 4j Tone Select ijv 2 3 4 a MFX Pitch D CO MFX Control Patch C Tune 8 oF EL 8 Chorus Octave Shift e Reverb Stretch Tune OFF Matrix Ctrl Tone C Tune 8 8 3 1 Tone F Tune 41 8 50 o JIMT Rnd Pitch Depth a a E Wave Pitch KF 188 189 198 190 Env Depth 12 a po Hd 1 L Soft Pad A 1 R a L IS J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 Pitch Patch C Tune Patch Coarse Tune x Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Patch F Tune Patch Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMO One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Value 3 3 Stretch Tune Stretch Tune Depth This setting allows you to apply stretched tuning to the patch Stretched tuning is a system by which acoustic pianos are normally tuned causing the lower range to be lower and the higher r
112. in Multitimbre mode some settings such as effects settings will be affected by multitimbre settings If you wish to edit a patch while hearing how it will sound in the multitimbre use this procedure Here we explain how to change the setting of a patch assigned to a part The procedure for changing the settings of rhythm sets is the same Substitute rhythm set wherever patch appears in a sentence 1 Make sure the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen is displayed 2 Move the cursor to the part list and press or w to select the part whose assigned patch you want to change 3 Press MENU The Menu window appears Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play Creating a Multitimbre 4 Press or w to select a Part Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen will appear for the patch that is assigned to the part you selected in step 2 West End Bs SBS Part 1 Tone Switch 184 2i 3i 4 Tone Select ij 2 5 4 General Ses me Patch Name West End Bs Patch Category SYNTH BASS Controller Voice Priority LAST Effects Analog Feel a Mono Poly MONO MFX on 8 MFX Control Resonance Offset 8 Chorus PatchTone c cO Reverb Env Mode sust sust sust sust y Delay Mode HORM HORM HORM HORM Delay Time g g g a
113. in semitone steps Value 24 24 Master Level Adjusts the volume of the entire Fantom Value 0 127 Patch Remain Patch Remain Switch Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding when another patch or rhythm set is selected ON or not OFF Also when this is ON changes produced by incoming MIDI messages such as Volume or Pan CC 5 7 10 65 68 71 74 RPN 0 1 2 MONO ON POLY ON as well as tonal quality and volume changes produced by the various controllers will be inherited Value OFF ON von Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new patch or rhythm set without being influenced by the Patch Remain setting Because of this certain effects settings can cause notes that were until then sounding to no longer be heard even though Patch Remain has been set to on Mix Parallel Specifies how the sound of the entire Fantom will be output Value MIX Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks When you want to check the final overall sound being output set to MIX MEMO Sounds which are set in the respective Output Assign to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack are output from the left OUTPUT A MIX jack sounds which are set to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack are output from the right OUTPUT A MIX jack HINT Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks Therefore any so
114. knobs and buttons to modify the sound in real time 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 The Realtime Control area shows the function that is assigned to each realtime controller knob and button 1d Qi indicate the knobs and amp KB 3 indicate the buttons PATCH User Library Chi Txe Rx 1 4 120 USER Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DO MFX LoFi Compress oun alan REV SRV Hall Kealtime Control O cutort Resonance Breath decay Time EB Portamento E Mono Poly EB octDown GD octup Blues Ha Tight Br XV Trom LegatoJ Soaring rp lass bone upitr JHrns2 von The MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen does not have a Realtime Control display 2 While playing the keyboard to produce sound operate the REALTIME CONTROL knobs and buttons The sound will change according to the function assigned to each knob or button Making Realtime Controller Settings Realtime Controller Knob Settings 1 Hold down JUMP and turn one of the REALTIME CONTROL knobs The Knob window appears Knob ae e o Assina Ca BREATH BREATH DECAY TIME In this window you can set the following parameters for the REALTIME CONTROL knobs Assign Specify the function that will be controlled by the realtime control knob MEM If you are using this in Performance mode a Zone parameter will be added to
115. level when a note that s higher than the tone s specified keyboard range is played Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Level Fade Lower Fade Upper Range Lower Range Upper TMT Vel Control TMT Velocity Control Sw itch TMT Velocity Control determines whether a different tone is played ON or not OFF depending on the force with which the key is played velocity When set to RND the patch s constituent tones will sound randomly regardless of any Velocity messages Value OFF ON RND von Instead of using Velocity you can also have tones substituted using the Matrix Control p 55 However the keyboard velocity and the Matrix Control cannot be used simultaneously to make different tones to sound When using the Matrix Control to switch tones set the TMT Vel Control parameter to OFF Creating a Patch Vel Fade Lower Velocity Fade Width Lower This Determines what will happen to the tone s level when the tone is played at a velocity lower than its specified velocity range Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you want notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be sounded at all set this to 0 Value 0 127 Vel Range Lower Velocity Range Lower Thi
116. list of the songs on the disk 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the So area of the 5 Press STOP PLAY to begin playback part that you want to play by itself When song playback ends it will stop automatically To 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to assign a interrupt playback press STOP PLAY mark Mz1 A4 STOP Selecting a Part to Play from the Keyboard Current Part USER 01 FANTOM Temp Part Ch as Patch Volume Pan In Multitimbre mode you can play one of the parts from the LUE TI M l 2 XU Ac Bass 166 keyboard The part you select here is called the current part For Grand XU 166 Grand XU 166 Grand XU 166 Grand XU 166 Grand XV eese 2 3 example when you want to play along with a song this allows you 3 6 7 EET to select the part you are going to play on the keyboard Favorite Sound Bank1i Part 1 MEE Eur GEI nun pret Eu EE res f Rx ch 1 When a song is played back only the parts with a check mark 100 will play back MEMD This setting is linked with the Solo Part Select parameter MULTITIMBRE Part and can be saved as a multitimbre setting p 118 Rx ch Receive Channel Tx ch Transmit Channel 108 Playing in Multiimbre Mode Silencing the Playback of a Specific Part Mute While you play along with the playback o
117. measure of the copy destination track or pattern and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Copy window appears Track Measure 9991 for gt Track TRK2 Measure eeet Mode REPLRCE Times 1 Status ALL Range E Channel ALL 7 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Source Track Check modify the copy source track s or pattern Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track PTN001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of copy source measures If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified 143 Editing Songs Editing Songs Track Destination Track Check modify the copy destination track or pattern Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern MEMD If you set the source track to ALL the destination track can be set to either ALL or PTNO01 PTN100 If you select PTNO01 PTN100 the data from the 16 phrase tracks will be merged as it is copied If TEMPO is selected as the source track then
118. messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark v will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Hold 1 Receive Hold 1 Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Phase Lock Phase Lock Switch Set Phase Lock to W ON when you want to suppress discrepancies in timing of parts played on the same MIDI channel note When the Phase Lock parameter is set to ON parts on the same MIDI channel are put in a condition in which their timing is matched enabling them to be played at the same time Accordingly a certain amount of time may elapse between reception of the Note messages and playing of the sounds Turn this setting to ON only as needed Velocity Curve Velocity Curve selects for each MIDI channel one of the four following Velocity Curve types that best matches the touch of the connected MIDI keyboard Value 1 4 Das 104 Setting Effects for a Performance Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb D For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Performance Mode or Multitimbre Mode p 170 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MFX Control p 174 Making Chorus Settings Chorus p 176 Making Reverb Settings Reverb p 177 Scale Tune Setti
119. not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo Copying Sequencer Data Copy Sequencer data can be copied to the desired location This is convenient when you want to use the same sequencer data at multiple locations Data recorded in the tempo track or beat track can also be copied in this way 1 Access the Microscope window for the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to copy p 153 2 Press or w to move the cursor to the sequencer data that you want to copy and press 4 Copy to copy it HINT To copy a multiple consecutive data hold down SHIFT and press W to select the sequencer data 3 Press 44 or to move the cursor to the location at which you want to insert the copied sequencer data HINT If the location at which you want to insert the sequencer data is not shown in the display move the cursor to the appropriate location measure beat clock and then specify the insert location for the sequencer data 4 Press 5 Place to paste the data HINT If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo 157 Editing Songs Editing Songs Changing the Tempo Midway Through the Song If you want to change
120. only Tempo can be selected for the destination track Measure Destination Measure Check modify the copy destination measure If you want the copy destination to be right after the last measure of a song set this parameter to END Mode Copy Mode Specifies whether you want to preserve the existing data in the copy destination when copying Value MIX Combines the data from the copy source with the existing data in the copy destination REPLACE Musical data in the copy destination will be erased i e overwritten when the copy takes place Only the sequencer data of the MIDI channels specified by the Channel parameter will be overwritten and data of other MIDI channels will remain Times Copy times Specifies the number of times that the data will be copied to the copy destination Status Selects the type of data to be copied Value ALL All types of sequencer data NOTE Note P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers PROG Program numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend EXC System Exclusive messages Tune Tune Request PTN Pattern Call Message data note If the source track is set to TEMPO the Status parameter will not be available Range If you have selected NOTE P AFT C C or PROG for the Status parameter specify the range Specify the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To c
121. out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet Use only the attached power supply cord O heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place S and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier S pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins S penetrate the unit In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following A all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have conne
122. part connected to the zone set here is played Value 1 16 Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn EX i g ice Et t 5 5 I BE General Rhythm Ptn Mest End Bs SBS Part i Switch fou Prpegaio Hold on Style HOUSE 1 Controller Accent Rate 35 Zone Shuffle Rate 56 Shuffle Resolution Part Keyboard Velocity MIDI Note Assign Effects Bey Te Zone Number a LI J Write Init J Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Rhythm Ptn Rhythm Pattern Switch Rhythm Pattern Switch Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off Value OFF ON Hold Rhythm Pattern Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Rhythm pattern playback Value OFF ON Style Rhythm Pattern Style Select the basic playback style of the Rhythm pattern Value For details regarding Rhythm Pattern Style refer to Rhythm Pattern Style List Sound Parameter List Accent Rate Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the Rhythm pattern A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing wi
123. possible etc What Is a Song For the Fantom musical performance data for one song or composition is referred to as a song A song combines sequencer data recorded on Phrase tracks 1 16 a Tempo track a Beat track and a Pattern track as discussed below Phrase track 16 Phrase track 2 Phrase track 1 Tempo track Beat track Pattern track Pattern Pattern Pattern 1 2 100 What Is a Track Each section of a song which stores musical performance data is called a track Phrase Tracks 1 16 Phrase tracks record the musical performance Each Phrase track records musical performance data for 16 MIDI channels Totally up to 16 tracks x 16 MIDI channels of data can be recorded It s helpful if you ve made decision prior to recording such as recording melody on Phrase track 1 bass on Phrase track 2 drums on Phrase track 10 and accompaniment on the remaining Phrase tracks Overview of the Fantom Tempo Track The Tempo track records tempo changes of a song over time It can be used for tempo changes during a song If a song has the same tempo from beginning to end the Tempo track can be ignored When a song is first recorded on the Fantom a tempo setting at the time of recording will be stored at the beginning of the Tempo track Therefore when song playback starts from the beginning the song will always pla
124. qualities Value OFF No filter is used LPF Low Pass Filter This reduces the volume of all frequencies above the cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency in order to round off or un brighten the sound This is the most common filter used in synthesizers BPF Band Pass Filter This leaves only the frequencies in the region of the cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency and cuts the rest This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds HPF High Pass Filter This cuts the frequencies in the region below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones PKG Peaking Filter This emphasizes the frequencies in the region of the cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency You can use this to create wah wah effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency cyclically LPF2 Low Pass Filter 2 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency are cut the sensitivity of this filter is half that of the LPF This makes it a comparatively warmer low pass filter This filter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano LPF3 Low Pass Filter 3 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff Frequency are cut the sensitivity of this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency While this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds the nuance it exhibits differs from that o
125. redundant data to increase the amount of memory available for the sequencer 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or w to select Data Thin and then press 8 Select A message of DATA THIN Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to thin If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to thin and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Data Thin window appears Track ETHIE Measure 5091 for 1 Value fe Time Status ALL Range Channel ALL 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the track s or pattern whose sequencer data will be thinned Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO01 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures whose sequencer data will be thinned If you set for to ALL all measures will be specifie
126. return to the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen If you return to the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen without saving the display will indicate EDITED reminding you that the multitimbre settings have been modified note If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the display indicates EDITED your edited multitimbre will be lost Initializing Multitimbre Settings Init Tnitialize means to return the settings of the currently selected sound to a standard set of values or to the factory settings ne The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected sound the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be affected If you wish to restore all of the Fantom s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 195 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen and select the multitimbre that you wish to initialize p 107 2 Access the Multitimbre Edit screen p 112 3 Press 7 Init The Multitimbre Initialize window appears Type Template MFX 4 Move the cursor to Type and select the initialization type 112 Creating a Multiimbre Type Initialize Type There are three initialize methods Select either of them depending on the application DEFAULT Resets the currently selected multitimbre in the Temporary memory to the standard values This is called a Initial Data Use this setting when you wish to create a sound from scratch PRESET Rese
127. rhythm set s chorus settings are selected those settings are shown in each of the multitimbre s performance s chorus setting screens and the settings can be then be changed as well Changes to patch or rhythm set chorus parameter settings are lost when another patch or rhythm set is selected To keep the modified settings save the patch rhythm set settings p 93 p 114 Reverb Source When a performance is selected Selects the reverb parameter settings that will be used by the performance If you wish to use the performance settings select PRF If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value PRF P1 P16 When a multitimbre is selected Selects the reverb parameter settings that will be used by the multitimbre If you wish to use the multitimbre settings select MLT If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value MLT P1 P16 When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the patch or rhythm set s reverb settings are selected those settings are shown in each of the multitimbre s erformance s reverb setting screens and the settings can be P then be changed as well Changes to patch or rhythm set reverb parameter settings are lost when another patch or rhythm set is selected To keep the modified settings save the patch rhythm set settings p 93 p 114
128. song p 128 4 Userealtime recording p 129 or step recording p 132 to record Use track edit p 139 or micro edit p 153 to edit the song Save the song to disk p 135 Select the Sound to be Used for Recording Before you record a song select the sound that you want to use for recording Select the recording method that is appropriate for your situation Multitimbre Select a multitimbre when you want to record an ensemble performance using multiple instruments When recording a song we recommend that you normally select a multitimbre Performance Select a performance if you want to use multiple patches sounded together a Layer to create a richer sound when you record your playing or if you want to play separate patches in different areas of the keyboard a Split Patch Rhythm set Select a patch or rhythm set if you want to use a single patch or rhythm set to record your playing Erasing the Song from Internal Memory Song Initialize When you record a song the sequencer data is temporarily recorded in internal memory If you want to record a new song you must erase any existing sequencer data from internal memory von If internal memory contains an important song that you want to keep you should first save that song to disk p 135 1 Access the Song Edit screen p 136 2 Press 3 Init The Song Initialize window appears Press Execute t to Initialize Int
129. specified velocity range Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you want notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be sounded at all set this to 0 Value 0 127 Level Fade Lower Fade Upper Range Lower Range Upper Modifying Pitch Pitch Rhythm Edit SE DRM Key JA ec gt usse swith 7 2 5 34 a Controller Pitch a Effects Tone Coarse Tune C4 so one Fine Tune 8 MFX Random Pitch Depth E MFX Control Env Depth 8 Env U Sens 8 Chorus HJ Env T1 U Sens 8 Reverb Env T4 U Sens 8 WMT Env Level 8 ESTO a hd J Write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 Pitch Tone Coarse Tune Rhythm Tone Coarse Tune Selects the pitch at which a rhythm tone sounds Value C 1 G9 HINT Set the coarse tuning for Waves comprising the rhythm tones with the Coarse Tune parameter RHYTHM WMT p 78 Tone Fine Tune Rhythm Tone Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the rhythm tone s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone HINT Set the fine tuning for Waves comprising the rhythm tones with the Fine Tune parameter RHYTHM WMT p 78 Random Pitch Depth This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed If you do not want the
130. ssssssss Rhythm pattern note assign rhythm set Rhythm pattern shuffle rate performance Rhythm pattern shuffle rate rhythm set Rhythm pattern shuffle resolution performance Rhythm pattern shuffle resolution rhythm set Rhythm pattern style performance Rhythm pattern style rhythm set Rhythm pattern switch performance Rhythm pattern switch rhythm set ssssssssssss Rhythm pattern zone number sssssssseeeeneneeneeee Rhythm Ptn Performance e 96 Rhythm set 75 Rhythm Set How a rhythm set is organized sss 20 Rhythm set Rhythm set parameters ss sssssisssssssssssiessstesssttesstttsssttesnteensstennns 74 Rhythm set settings sssssssssssseeeeeneennereneneennne 69 Selecting a rhythm set 40 Rhythm set level 82 Rhythm set name 74 Rhythii tone name ennemie 74 Rhythm Write ie Ring modulator Rnd Pan Depth Rnd Pan Sw i Rnd Pitch Depth eine nte e n eerte 61 RPS f ncti n eit ete tee en ee initier 159 RPS Setup Rx Banik Select cca ee td e ERE ERI e disent eres 183 Rx Bender m EE 50 RSGExclusive hetero sn IEEE 183 Rx Expression rhythm tone sssssssssssseeenenneenene 74 Rx Expression tone Rx GM System On Rx GM2 System On IS d GU MR TTE Rx Hold
131. such problems remain at a level that does not cause undue problems Metronome Mode Specifies when you want the metronome to sound Value OFF Will not sound PLAY ONLY Will sound only during playback REC ONLY Metronome will sound only for recording PLAY amp REC Metronome will sound for playback and recording ALWAYS Metronome will always sound Metronome Level You can adjust the volume of the metronome Value 0 10 Metronome Sound Selects the metronome sound Value TYPE 1 A conventional metronome sound will be heard A bell will sound on the first beat TYPE 2 Clicks will sound TYPE 3 Beeps will sound TYPE 4 Cowbell will sound for the first beat and woodblock on other beats 182 MIDI Settings MIDI Sustem Edit 83 1 0j General MIDI Sequencer Performance Ctrl Ch 116 Multitimbre Ctrl Ch OFF Patch Rhythm Rx Ch 1 Controller Patch Rhythm Tx Ch Rx Ch EQ Remote Keyboard Sw OFF Exclusive Protect OFF Preview Device ID Fr Scale Tune Rx Program Change ON Rx Bank Select on Wave Expansion Board Version A SR JU60 09 Sessn 1 00 B SRX 01DunamicDrm C SRX DZConcertPno a id ILS Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 MIDI Performance Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel Performance Ctrl Ch selects the MIDI receive channel used during switching of performances wh
132. the current patch uu p eT Destination PRTCH USER 961 re Patch Generationxu Grand X9 xu Tonel Copy source tone Copy destination tone To specify the currently selected patch as the copy source set Source to TEMP The Compare Function For the Patch Effect Copy and Patch Tone Copy operations you can use the Compare function The Compare function allows you to play the copy source patch To do so press 1 Compare to open the following window The copy source patch can be switched in this window as well but it is not possible to select GM group patches After selecting the desired patch return to the previous window by pressing 1 Copy Mode TONE Source PATCH user ER Generationxu you The Compare function cannot be used with Patch Effect Copy if RHYTHM MULTITIMBRE or PERFORMANCE is selected as the copy source Source The patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played normally Cautions When Selecting a Waveform The sounds of the Fantom are based on complex PCM waveforms and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of the original waveform the results will not be as you expect The internal waveforms of the Fantom fall into the following two groups One shot These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays A one shot waveform records the initial rise and
133. the drum part in real time In addition the drums can be made to play at a steady natural tempo regardless of the timing at which you press the keys A newly developed arpeggiator is also built in In addition to complex phrases that would be impossible to play by hand you can also use the arpeggiator to play phrases that are similar to actual performance Furthermore the D Beam and other realtime controllers can be used to modify the arpeggio style This not only makes for a dramatic leap in expressive potential during a live performance but also supports your own playing Phrases played by rhythm patterns or the arpeggiator can be recorded on the sequencer just as they are played Your realtime performance can be saved instantly as song data or even used as a template for a step recorded phrase In addition patterns created on the sequencer can be triggered by the keyboard and played by the RPS Realtime Phrase Sequence function Rhythm patterns and complex phrases created using the arpeggiator can be recorded on the sequencer and then played in real time for amazing live performance possibilities Designed to be a true musical instrument In a departure from the straight line design of previous workstations the Fantom features a distinctive design which proclaims its worthiness as a true musical instrument while at the same time projecting a sense of quiet dignity General MIDI and General MIDI 2 Compatible The Fant
134. the accent strength or note length to modify the rhythm feel groove of the performance Shuffle Rate Adjust the note timing to produce shuffle rhythms Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing of the notes in terms of a note value Velocity Specify the note strength for the keys you play Note Assign Specify the keyboard note that will play the Rhythm pattern HINT Inrhythm pattern parameters the Style Rhythm Pattern Style setting is particularly important The playback pattern of the rhythm is determined mainly by this selection D For details regarding each parameter refer to Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn p 75 2 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to each parameter and either turn the VALUE dial or press INC or DEC to make the setting 3 Press 8 Close to close the Rhythm Pattern window HINT Rhythm pattern settings can be saved with each rhythm set as part of the rhythm set settings This allows you to create a rhythm set that uses the most effective settings 41 Patch Mode ing in Play Creating a Patch With the Fantom you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating patches and the functions of the patch parameters How to Make the Patch Settings Start with an exis
135. the parameters listed above This parameter specifies the zone that will be controlled by the realtime control knob For details on each parameter refer to Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller p 52 2 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set it 3 Press 8 Close to close the Knob window Realtime Controller Button Settings 1 Hold down JUMP and press a REALTIME CONTROL button The Switch window appears 1 2 3 o Assign PORTAMENTO MONO POLY OCT DOWN OCT UP Mode LATCH LATCH LATCH LATCH In this window you can set the following parameters for the realtime control buttons Assign Specify the function that will be controlled by the realtime control button Mode Specify how the realtime control button will operate MEMD If you are using this in Performance mode a Zone parameter will be added to the parameters listed above This parameter lets you specify the zone that will be controlled by the realtime control button Hint For details on each parameter refer to Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller p 52 2 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting 163 Real Time in the Sound i ing Modi Modifying the Sound in Real Time 3 Press 8 Close to close the Swit
136. the sound that simply doesn t exist and the envelope would have no effect Cautions When Using a Loop Waveform With many acoustic instruments such as piano and sax extreme timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note This initial attack is what defines much of the instrument s character For such waveforms it is best to use the complex tonal changes of the attack portion of the waveform just as they are and to use the envelope only to modify the decay portion If you attempt to use the envelope to modify the attack portion as well the characteristics of the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that you intend Level gt Looped portion Tone change stored with the wave Time Envelope for the TVF filter Resulting tone change Saving Rhythm Sets You ve Created Write Changes you make to sound settings are temporary and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound If you want to keep the modified sound you must save it in the internal USER group user memory When you modify the settings of a rhythm set the PATCH PLAY screen will indicate EDITED Once you save the rhythm set into internal memory user memory the EDITED indication goes away yon When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Ini
137. the tempo midway through the song insert a new Tempo Change into the tempo track The song will play back at that tempo following the location at which the tempo change was inserted However if you want to create gradual tempo changes such as ritardando or accelerando it is more convenient to use Tempo Recording p 130 HINT If you want to make the entire song faster or slower modify the playback tempo in one of the PLAY screens 1 Access the Microscope window for the tempo track p 153 2 Press 4 or w to move the cursor to the location at which you want to insert a tempo change HINT If the location at which you want to insert a tempo change is not shown in the display move the cursor to the appropriate location measure beat clock and specify the location of the tempo change 3 Press 1 Create to insert a tempo change 4 The inserted tempo change will have the default value so modify it as necessary HINT If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo 158 Changing the Time Signature Midway Through the Song If you want to change the time signature midway through the song insert a new Beat Change The song will play back using that time signature for measures following the inserted beat change nore It is not possible to change the time signature in th
138. this is then followed in parenthesis by information detailing its mode edit group For example Mono Poly parameter PATCH General Below are the meanings of the symbols preceding certain sentences in the text yon These are notes Be sure to read them MEMD These are reference memos Read it as necessary HINT These are hints for operating the Fantom Read it as necessary UE These provide information from related reference pages Read it as necessary Contents IMPORTANT NOTES iicsscccnnctscattsntttnactcccsnceddeuasausenetivessiusielewssnancdeceadeeusuees 4 How To Use This Manual 6 Notation Used in This Owner s Manual 7 Main Features inner 14 Panel Descriptions secetecccnancneecenececceucesuazs 16 Pront Panel 5m o Lom E N dh a Pitas es i esu io Lc Ls 16 Rear Panel eee te e deed e eee ERE e eee e pe eie He eet ente 18 Overview of the Fantom 19 How the Fantom Is Organized ss 19 BasicStr ct re ete RT e Ee DA reU e Re e TE ete tet ai 19 Classification of Fantom Sound Types 19 About Simultaneous Polyphony sn 21 About MEMORY 5 3 aee teet e e eae SERE De d e e ERR RE SAN NER REPRE GR 22 Temporary Memory issues te ein enter edabe oen 22 Rewritable Memory ss 22 Non Rewritable Memory esse 22 About the Onboard Effeets 5 5 5 itd t ede be deste fd nie 23 Effect Tyres E 23 How Effects Units Work in Different Modes 23 Aboutthe S qu
139. this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the chorus delay that is selected by the Chorus Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to Chorus Parameters Sound Parameter List Making Reverb Settings Reverb MEM Here we will explain how to make reverb settings in Performance mode The procedure is the same when making settings in Patch mode or Multitimbre mode Setting Procedure 1 Select the sound to which you want to apply the reverb p 85 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Press 4 or w to select a Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit screen appears 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the Reverb tab The reverb parameter setting screen appears 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to make the reverb settings 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 93 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the previous screen Functions of Parameters a Rhythm Pin Reverb Zone Type 2srvroom Controller Pre Delay Effects Im eu Size MER High cut FX Control Density Chorus Diffusion r LF Damp Freq a LF Damp Gain HF Damp Freq HF Damp Gai
140. two pitches TIME The time it takes will be constant regardless of how far apart in pitch the notes are Portamento Start When another key is pressed during a pitch change produced by portamento a new pitch change will begin This setting specifies the pitch at which the change will begin Value PITCH Starts a new portamento when another key is pressed while the pitch is changing Pitch Time press D4 key press C5 key press C4 key NOTE Portamento will begin anew from the pitch where the current change would end Pitch Time press D4 key press C5 key press C4 key Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time Value 0 127 Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Up Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever is all the way right For example if this parameter is set to 12 the pitch will rise one octave when the pitch bend lever is moved to the right most position Value 0 48 Bend Range Down Pitch Bend Range Down Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever is all the way left For example if this is set to 48 and you move the pitch bend lever all the way to the left the pitch will fall 4 octaves Value 48 0 Patch Tone Env Mode Tone Envelope Mode When a loop waveform p 44
141. what the different System parameters do and also how these parameters are organized Settings Common to the Entire System General General EXT Sequencer Local Switch d Master Tune MIDI Master Key Shift Controller Master Leuel C Patch Remain 000 PRRRLLEL Output Gain 8 dB Scale Tune Keyboard Velocity REAL 0 Keyboard Sens MEDIUM Preview Wave Expansion Board Version A SR JUS0 09 Sessn 1 00 B SRX O01DunamicDrm C SRX O2ConcertPno Write J Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 General Local Switch The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the keyboard controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever knobs buttons D Beam controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the Fantom s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound modules set it to OFF Value OFF ON MEM When a performance is selected if you want the keyboard controller section to be disconnected only from a specific part or parts use the Int Switch parameter PERFORMANCE Zone p 98 Master Tune Adjusts the overall tuning of the Fantom The display shows the frequency of the A4 note center A Value 415 3 466 2 Hz Master Key Shift Shifts the overall pitch of the Fantom
142. while preserving the relative differences between the attack time values set for each tone in the Env Time 1 parameters PATCH TVA p 66 Range 63 63 Attack Time The time it takes for a sound to reach maximum volume after the key is pressed and sound begun nore This value is added to the attack time value of a tone so if the attack time value of any tone is already set to 127 maximum ua n positive settings here will not produce any change Release Time Offset Release Time Offset alters the release time of the overall patch while preserving the relative differences between the release time values set for each tone in the Env Time 4 parameters PATCH TV A p 66 Range 63 63 Release Time The time from when you take your finger off the key until the sound disappears yon This value is added to the release time value of a tone so if the release time value of any tone is already set to 127 maximum ua n positive settings here will not produce any change Velocity Sens Offset Velocity Sensitivity Offset Velocity Sensitivity Offset alters the Velocity Sensitivity of the overall patch while preserving the relative differences between the Velocity Sensitivity values set for each tone in the parameters below Cutoff V Sens parameter PATCH TVF p 63 Level V Sens parameter PATCH TV A p 65 Range 63 63 Velocity Pressure with which the key is pressed voe
143. will begin when you play the keyboard or press the Hold pedal 4 When you are finished making settings in the Recording Standby window press STOP PLAY MEMD When recording begins the Realtime Recording window will appear In this window you can specify the Punch in out points p 130 perform Realtime Erase p 132 and use the Rehearsal function p 132 For details on these operations refer to the corresponding reference page To close this window press REC 5 When you are finished recording press STOP PLAY The REC indicator will go dark HINT If you are not satisfied with the realtime recording you just made you can press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Realtime Recording to return to the state prior to recording Undo 129 Recording Songs Recording Songs Recording Tempo Changes in a Song Tempo Recording If you want the tempo to change during the song you can record those tempo changes in the Tempo track If tempo changes have already been recorded in the tempo track they will be rewritten Set the following recording parameters in addition to the basic settings described in step 3 of Basic Operation for Realtime Recording p 129 Tempo Rec Tempo Recording Switch Specify whether tempo changes will be recorded ON or not OFF Value OFF ON HINT If you assign TEMPO as the function to be controlled by a realtime control knob qe IH o
144. will go dark Recording the Performance of a Rhythm Pattern The Fantom contains various Rhythm patterns Simply by pressing a single key you can play the Rhythm patterns When you use the sequencer to create a song it is also convenient to use Rhythm patterns to record the drum part 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Select the multitimbre that will be used for recording p 107 3 Press or wW to select the part track on which the Rhythm pattern will be recorded A lr will be displayed for the selected part and the Rhythm pattern will be recorded on that part track 4 Hold down JUMP and press RHYTHM The Rhythm Pattern window appears In this window you can make various settings for Rhythm patterns Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio p 51 6 After completing your settings press 8 Close to close the Arpeggio window 7 Press REC The REC indicator will blink and the Recording Standby window appears In this window you can change various settings related to realtime recording Recording Standby Track Mode Mx Count In 1MEAS Tempo Rec 0FF Loop Punch fo Start Point sra Eu End Point n LC an Quantize OFF Grid Resolution Strength ShuffleResolution Rate 8 Specify the recording method UE For details on making this setting refer to Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording p 129
145. you want to erase HINT To erase a multiple consecutive data hold down SHIFT and press W to select the sequencer data 3 Press 2 Erase to erase the sequencer data HINT If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo 156 Editing Songs Moving Sequencer Data Move You can move an individual item of sequencer data to a different location Data recorded in the tempo track or beat track can also be moved in the same way von Itis not possible to move the tempo change located at the beginning of the tempo track the beat change and key signature located at the beginning of the beat track or the pattern beat 1 Access the Microscope window for the track or pattern whose data you want to move p 153 2 Press 4 or w to move the cursor to the sequencer data that you want to move HINT To move a multiple consecutive data hold down SHIFT and press WF to select the sequencer data 3 Press 3 Move The Move Event window appears Move Event Eo Jose 1 Note 76 E 5 194 8 300 64 4 Move the cursor to measure beat and clock and set these values to specify the move destination 5 Press 8 Execute to move the sequencer data When the sequencer data has been moved you will return to the Microscope window HINT If you are
146. 0 series boards are installed in the EXP A slot SRX series boards are installed in the EXP B and EXP C slots These slots correspond with the Wave Expansion Board groups XP A XP C when the expansion Wave patches and rhythm sets are used 1l Before installing the Wave Expansion Board turn off the power of the Fantom and all connected devices and disconnect all cables including the Power cable from the Fantom 2 Turn the Fantom over remove the four screws indicated in the following diagram and remove the cover t 3 Screws to be removed O er s turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over 196 Installing the Wave Expansion Board 3 Inside you will find a slot for an SR JV80 series board EXP A and slots for two SRX series boards EXP B EXP C As shown in the following illustration plug the connector of the Wave Expansion Board into the connector of the relevant slot and at the same time insert the board holder through the hole of the Wave Expansion Board Wave Expansion Board SRX series Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 series Connector Board holder a Position them a
147. 00 Wave Expansion Board R SR JUGO0 09 Sessn B SRX O81DynamicDrm C SRX 82ConcertPno Si est affich c t du nom de la fente dans laquelle la carte est install e il est possible que la carte d extension audio install e ne soit pas reconnue correctement R installer correctement la carte d extension audio 199 Installation de la carte d expansion Wave Specifications Fantom FA 76 Synthesizer Keyboard Conforms to General MIDI 2 System Keyboard 76 keys with velocity and channel aftertouch B Synthesizer Section Multitimbre Parts 16 parts Maximum Polyphony 64 voices Wave Memory 64 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent Waveforms 1 083 XV 5080 equivalent Expansion Slot Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series 1 slot Wave Expansion Board SRX Series 2 slots Preset Memory Patches 640 128 x 5 banks 256 General MIDI 2 Patches Rhythm Sets 16 9 General MIDI 2 Rhythm Sets Multitimbres 16 Performances 64 User Memory Patches 128 Rhythm Sets 16 Multitimbres 16 Performances 64 Effects Multi Effects M FX 90 types Patch mode Three different multi effects only 50 types can be used simultaneously in Performance Multitimbre mode Chorus 2 types Reverb 4 types System Equalizer 2 band per each 4 outputs B Sequencer Section Tracks Phrase Tracks 16 MIDI channels per track 16 Pattern Track 16 MIDI channels per track
148. 006 VORTEX PLS Preset D USER 007 TempoMadness BTS User Library PresetE USER 008 stream Bell BEL GM USER 009 Blue Mutes DGT _ __ _ USER 010 Uitrasmooth STR Bank Select MSB LSB 687 666 Program Change GA E Ctg Prevu About the 1 8 Buttons In the PLAY screen the eight 1 8 buttons located below the display allow you to select register your favorite patches or performances and the lower area of the display will show the names of the sounds that are registered as favorite sounds In other screens these buttons execute various functions and their operation will differ depending on the screen y i MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay MFX B Stereo EQ REU SRU Room MFX C Slicer Realtime Control cutott Resonance Porta Time Tempo GB Arp Hold E Ptn Hoi ED Portamento GB Tap Tempo Overview of the Fantom Moving the Cursor A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for selection To edit the setting of a parameter move the cursor to the value of that parameter To select an item move the cursor to that item The cursor is a black rectangle and the parameter value or item you select with the cursor will be highlighted displayed in inverse video Cursor CN lt 25070 cous Tone Switch Mv 2v Siv Av fion Select iv 2 S 4 Of Effects Wa
149. 03501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorghehi TEL 095 169 5043 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 08 702 0020 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Musitronic AG Gerberstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4410 Liestal SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 700139 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS
150. 1 16 Rx Ch OFF Remote Keyboard Sw Remote Keyboard Switch Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the Fantom s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF HINT Turn this ON when you want to control the Fantom from an external MIDI device when performing with the Arpeggiator or RPS function p 39 p 161 Exclusive Protect Exclusive Protect Switch This prevents incoming System Exclusive messages from an external MIDI device from rewriting user memory settings When this is set ON the data cannot be written Value OFF ON Device ID Device ID Number When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device Value 17 32 Rx Program Change Receive Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx Bank Select Receive Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx GM System On Receive GM System On Switch Specifies whether General MIDI System On messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx GM2 System On Receive GM2 System On Switch Specifies whether General MIDI 2 System On messages will be received ON or not OF
151. 127 Select the Sound to be Used for Recording ss 127 Erasing the Song from Internal Memory Song Initialize sss 127 Specify the Time Signature ss 128 Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording sss 129 Basic Operation for Realtime Recording ss 129 Recording Tempo Changes in a Song Tempo Recording 130 Loop Recording and Punch In Recording ss 130 Correct the Timing of Your Playing as You Record Recording Quantize 131 Selecting the Sequencer Data that will Be Recorded Recording Select 131 Erasing Unwanted Data While You Record Realtime Erase sse 132 Auditioning Sounds or Phrases While Recording Rehearsal Function 132 Inputting Data One Step at a Time Step Recording 132 Inputting Notes and Rests ss 132 Assigning a Pattern to a Phrase Track 134 Saving a Recorded Song on Disk sn 135 sii EsipIseee eue 136 Loading the Song You Want to Edit sn 136 Using Different Sound Generators for Each Track sss 136 Silencing the Playback of a Track Mute ss 137 Overall Settings for the Song seen 137 Assigning a Name to a Song Song Name 137 Assigning a Name to a Pattern Pattern Name sss 138 Assigning Markers Locate Positions to a Song 138 Specifying the Area of a Song that will Repeat Loop Points 139 Editing Sequencer Data Over the Specified
152. 27 127 127 EQ Preview y Scale Tune Wave Expansion Board Version R SR JUSGO0 O9 Sessn 1 00 B 5RX 91DynamicDrm C 5RX 22ConcertPno write Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 Preview Preview Mode SINGLE The notes specified by Note Number 1 4 parameter will sound successively one by one CHORD The notes specified by Note Number 1 4 parameter will sound simultaneously PHRASE The Phrase associated with the patch s type category is played Note Number 1 4 Preview Note Number 1 4 Specify the pitch of the four notes that will sound when the Preview Mode parameter is set to SINGLE or CHORD Value C 1 G9 yon If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Mode parameter these settings will have no effect Velocity 1 4 Preview Velocity 1 4 Specify the velocity of the four notes that will sound when the Preview Mode parameter is set to SINGLE or CHORD Value 0 127 nore If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Mode parameter these settings will have no effect 185 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Settings Common to All Modes System Function Scale Tune settings Scale Tune HELIUM 1 i General Scale Tune Sequencer E MIDI C D E F G A B Controller t a fo e We Ms Preview Scale Tune Switch oH Wave Expansion Board Version
153. 4 ReVetD 4e iecore neaper cepe nes cous yo s ea A E Scale Tunes eti erts Multitimbre List E Multitimbre mode s 27 Playing in Multitimbre mode see 106 Multitimbre Name Multitimbre Part Write MULTITIMBRE PLAY Mu ltitimbre Write 20 8 eser eut er pedi ce teet de Mute lr 109 Track 137 Mute GrOUD c pacte t terit qnie secet tee ie e tree n eda 74 Mute Switch multitimbre part ss 119 Mute Switch performance part ssssssssssseeene 103 N Namie WIndOoW 22 54 50 en ees ee emot Non drop format ie Note Assign performance Note Assign rhythm set Note Number 1 4 nennen iraa O S c NAE EEEE E Octave Range patch Octave Range performance sss clu d Octave Shift multitimbre part Octave Shift patch tte inet re Octave Shift performance part LON OPEP tie entree repone dete One shot waveform iii OUTPUT A MIX jacks OUTPUT B jacks Output Gain 7 Ov rriding Tempo eee tede redet te dede eret P Pan multitimbre part ss 115 Pan multitimbtre 4 2 e base inae eR eei 119 Pan performance part ss 100 Pan performance Teresan an oM tert 104 Pan key follow ss 65 Pan KF li MERE Current patt 7 euenit eee et tms 108 Multitimbre 115 Performance 100 Part Chorus Send Lev
154. 4 p 56 Value NORM The tone begins to play after the time specified in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed Delay time A Note on Note off HOLD Although the tone begins to play after the time specified in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed if the key is released before the time specified in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed the tone is not played No sound played Delay time Note on Note off OFF N Rather than being played while the key is pressed the tone begins to play once the period of time specified in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key This is effective in situations such as when simulating noises from guitars and other instruments Delay time o A A Note on Note off OFF D Rather than being played while the key is pressed the tone begins to play once the period of time specified in the Delay Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key Here however changes in the TVA Envelope begin while the key is pressed which in many cases means that only the sound from the release portion of the envelope is heard Xx i Delay time A A Note on Note off o s you have selected a waveform that is a decay type sound i e a sound that fades away naturally even if the key is not released selecting OFF N or OFF D may result in no sound being heard Delay Time Tone Delay Time Specifies the time from when the key is pressed or i
155. 5 Alternate pan switch ss 78 Analog Feel A7 Analog feel depth 1 entente eene tenen 47 Arabian scale 105 120 186 ATP SPIATOF E 38 ARPEGGIO iiiter iet hi m a E 16 38 PRTC ilo 39 Patch 51 Performance 4 95 Arpeggio accent rate patch 51 Arpeggio accent rate performance sss 95 Arpeggio hold switch patch m Arpeggio hold switch performance sss 95 Arpeggio key trigger patch ssssssssssssseeeene 52 Arpeggio key trigger performance Arpeggio keyboard velocity patch Arpeggio keyboard velocity performance Arpeggio motif patch ss Arpeggio motif performance ssssssssssesseeeenenenenenees Arpeggio octave range patch Arpeggio octave range performance Arpeggio shuffle rate patch a Arpeggio shuffle rate performance sssssssssseeee Arpeggio shuffle resolution patch sss 52 Arpeggio shuffle resolution performance sss 95 Arpeggio style patch s ismes 51 Arpeggio style performance Arpeggio switch patch 51 Arpeggio switch performance Arpeggio variation patch sssssssssssssseeeneneenene 51 Arpeggio variation performance sssssssssssseeeenetee 95 Arpeggio zone number Assign performance Assign rhythm set
156. 6 Part 16 MIDI receive channel 16 Zone 1 MIDI transmit channel 1 Patch Rhythm Set Under these conditions you could simply consider that each of the zones from 1 to 16 is linked in a one to one relationship with its numerical counterpart among parts 1 to 16 In other words you can use zone 1 when controlling part 1 zone 2 is when controlling part 2 and so on MEMO In this manual the expression the zone and part are linked refers to the condition whereby a zone s MIDI transmit channel and a part s MIDI receive channel are matched in this one to one relationship About the PERFORMANCE PLAY Screen Displaying PERFORMANCE PLAY Screen To access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen use the following procedure 1 Press MODE The Mode window appears PATCH MULTITIMBRE PERFORMANCE RHYTHM sEQ Enos E 2 Press 4 or wW to select PERFORMANCE and then press 8 Select You will enter Performance mode and the PATCH PLAY screen appears oo Internalsong User Library Control Ch 16 J 120 USER Fantasm D Beam MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay Se ot MFX B Stereo EQ REU SRU Room e MFX C Slicer m Realtime Control cutott Resonance Porta Time Tempo GD arr How Ptn Ho EJ Portamento ED Tap Tempo Functions in the PERFORMANCE PLAY Screen
157. A message of QUANTIZE Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern that you want to quantize 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern that you want to quantize and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Quantize window appears Track Edit Quantize Track Measure 8061 for Dno Type GRID Grid Resolution F Strength 109 Shuffle Resolution Rate al Range c4 2169 Channel ALL Press PLAY to Preview 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the editing operation and then make corrections if you want to change it Track Check modify the phrase track s or pattern that is to be quantized Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Editing Songs Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures that are to be quantized If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Type Quantize Type Specifies the Quantize range Value GRID Grid Quantize will be applied to recording Since the notes will be adjusted to the timing of the specified note value you can use this when you want drums or bass for example to play in an accurate rhythm PLDI ID
158. AILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CEN TRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 668 0480 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PA
159. C MFX A MFX C Part Dry Send Level Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination specified by Part Output Assign Value 0 127 Q Part Chorus Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each part Value 0 127 Q Part Reverb Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each part Value 0 127 MEMD For the following parameters settings can be made individually for each multi effects MFX1 MFX3 selected in Part Output MFX Select MFX Type Multi Effects Type Use this parameter to select from among the 90 available multi effects For details on multi effects parameters refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List Value 0 Through 90 yon Depending on the multi effects you select here it may not be possible to use three multi effects simultaneously Q MFX Dry Send Level Multi Effects Dry Send Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the multi effects Value 0 127 Q MFX Chorus Send Level Multi Effects Chorus Send Level Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through multi effects If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 9 MFX Reverb Send Level Multi Effects Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through multi effects If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 QD MFX Outp
160. CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern into which you want to insert blank measures If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern into which you want to insert blank measures and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Insert Measure window appears Track Measure 9001 for 1 Beat ov 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the track s or pattern into which blank measures will be inserted Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures into which blank measures will be inserted If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Beat In general the time signature of the measure immediately before insertion will be used for the blank measures To change the time signature of the blank measures to be inserted use the Beat parameter yon Beat can be specified only when you have set the Track parameter to ALL 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Ex
161. D Tap Tempo a_r Indicates the functions that are assigned to each realtime controller knob 6 and button B The value will be displayed when you turn the knob ca a ERR men FER zzi A LE CEEEEEELZRELELE Indicates the names of the performances that can be selected by 1 8 Turns the RPS function on off RPS Playing in Performance Mode Selecting a Performance The Fantom has two performance groups including the User group and Preset groups with each group storing 64 performances for a total of 128 performances USER This is the group inside the Fantom which can be rewritten Performances you yourself create can be stored in this group The Fantom contains 64 preset performances PRST Preset This is the group inside the Fantom which cannot be rewritten However you may modify the settings of the currently selected performance and then store the modified performance in User memory The Fantom contains 64 preset performances 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 Performance group Performance number Hew Song M 1 4 4 STOP Joo Internalsong 41120 odo hrans c E uro am User l brary Control Ch 16 USER Q Fantasm 1 MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay Seo MFX B Stereo EQ REV SRU Room MFX C Slicer r Realtime Control cutorr Resonance Porta Time Tempo GB Arp nois Ptn nois EJ Porta
162. DLE Mz1 4 4 STOP Track Output Status 1 5 3 13 AO INT LES OO NN m NN C7 C2 C3 mam 1 INT RINT mu 2 C2 C2 CO 3 mao C2 CO mm 2 INT y JC C2 C a E m 9 M OO Om m E INT PLAY OO CO m mmm 4 INT_fFLAY Lc c c pb ba paarmo o m m m O 5 INT PLAY DOOO000000MMMMON e INT PLAY COO aaa OOO mm INT PLAY OO C m zu oi UM O O C2 C2 mmm E INT FLAY COO m oi C3 O O C2 di mm 9 O E INT PLAY ncianmamuaoauaoauuaguuuru m INT PLAY LOC M m om on UM C2 C2 CO C2 mmm 12 INT PLAY DiOOO0000000000000 13 INT PLAY DOOO0000000000000 14 INT EMPTY Tempo PLAY m Load J Save Init ET Hm Eg Eg 3 Tracks in which no sequencer data has been recorded are displayed as EMPTY Turn the VALUE dial or press DEC to select MUTE yon HINT Note that if you save a song with a Phrase track muted in the Standard MIDI File format that Phrase track s data will not be saved If you save a song that has a muted Phrase track in the MRC Pro song format the mute status of the track will also be saved If you set the tempo track Tempo Status to MUTE the tempo track will be muted If tempo changes have been recorded in a song but you want to play the song at a fixed tempo you can mute the tempo track Overall Settings for the Song Here you can assign a song name make Locate Position settings and make other settings that affect the entire son
163. ET Reinstates the patch and performance selected at the time the Fantom was last turned off DEFAULT The Fantom will be ready to play Performance USER 01 Backlight Saver Specify the time to pass before the backlight saver function is activated If you do not want to use the backlight saver set it to OFF If there are no panel operations or MIDI input for longer than the time specified here the backlight will go dark While the backlight is off the display darkens and the BEAT orange indicator lamp blinks Value OFF 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 minutes The backlight saver function will be defeated when you play the keyboard or operate the panel of the Fantom or when the following MIDI messages are received Channel Voice Message Channel Mode Messages System Exclusive Message Backlight Saver This backlight saver extends the backlight s operational life If the backlight becomes dim or fails to light the display screen will be dark and difficult to read The factory default settings call for the Backlight Saver function to be switched off However in order to maximize the life of the backlight we recommend that you turn the Backlight Saver function on 180 Sequencer Settings Sequencer General Sequencer Sync Mode MASTER Ss OFF Sync Output OFF Soft Through 0 MMC Mode MMC Output MTC Syne Output MTC Frame Rate MTC Offset Hour MTC Offset Minute 8 MIDI Controller E
164. Effects Structure 1 amp 2 5 o Booster 1 amp 2 15 MEX Structure 3 amp 4 1 MFX Control Booster 3 amp 4 o Chorus Key Fade Lower 5 8 8 8 Key Range Lower c 4 C4 C4 cA Reverb KeuRangeUpper os co es es Matrix Ctrl Key Fade Upper o 6 Ey g TMT Vel Control on For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 TMT Structure 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 Structure Type1 amp 2 3 amp 4 Determines how tone 1 and 2 or tone 3 and 4 are connected Value 1 10 The following 10 different Types of combination are available TONE 1 3 TONE 2 4 With this type tones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 are independent Use this type when you want to preserve PCM sounds or create and combine sounds for each tone E TONE 2 4 This type stacks the two filters together to intensify the characteristics of the filters The TVA for tone 1 or 3 controls the volume balance between the two tones an V M B TONE 2 4 This type mixes the sound of tone 1 3 and tone 2 4 applies a filter and then applies a booster to distort the waveform Creating a Patch a This type applies a booster to distort the waveform and then combines the two filters The TVA for tone 1 or 3 controls the volume balance between the two tones and adjusts booster level Jug V LS R A TONE 2 4 This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones
165. Effects Units Work in Different Modes In Patch Mode The multi effects chorus and reverb effects can be set up individually for each patch rhythm set Adjusting the signal level to be sent to each effects unit Send Level provides control over the effect intensity that s applied to each tone Multi Effects gt Chorus gt Reverb Rhythm Set AO Multi Effects Chorus gt Reverb 23 Overview of the Fantom Overview of the Fantom In the Performance Mode or Multitimbre Mode The multi effects chorus and reverb effects can be set individually for each performance and multitimbre The intensity of each effect will be set for each part Fig 1 but the Send Level setting for each tone can also influence effect intensity Fig 2 When you apply effects in Performance mode or Multitimbre mode the effect settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to each part will be ignored and the effect settings of the performance or multitimbre will be used Thus the effects for the same patch or rhythm set may differ when played in Patch mode and in Performance Multitimbre mode However depending on the settings you can have effect settings for a patch or rhythm set assigned to a part applied to the entire performance multitimbre p 178 p 174 In addition when using the multi effects settings of a performance or mul
166. F Value OFF ON Rx GS Reset Receive GS Reset Switch Specifies whether GS Reset messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx Exclusive Receive System Exclusive Switch Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Program Change Transmit Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Bank Select Transmit Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Active Sensing Transmit Active Sensing Switch Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Edit Data Transmit Edit Data Switch Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch multitimbre or performance will be transmitted as system exclusive messages ON or will not be transmitted OFF Value OFF ON 183 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Settings Common to All Modes System Function Controller Settings Controller System Edit LL j General Controller Sequencer Sys Ctrl 1 Source MODULATION ous Gtr 2 Source AFTERTOUCH MIDI Sys Ctrl 3 Source BREATH Sys Ctrl 4 Source FOOTTYPE Ep Hold Pedal Polarity STRHDR Cont Hold Pedal 0 Preview Pedal 1 Assign Scale Tune Pedal 1 Polaritu 0 Pedal 2 Assign
167. F Envelope applied is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed Value FIXED 1 7 VISTA Env V Sens TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVF envelope Positive settings will cause the TVF envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause the effect to be less Value 63 63 Env T1 V Sens TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVF envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env T4 V Sens TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the Time 4 value of the TVF envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 63 Creating a Patch Env Time KF TVF Envelope Time Key Follow Use this setting if you want the TVA envelope times Time 2 Time 4 to be affected by the keyboard location Based on the TVF envelope times for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative sett
168. FO2 Pan Depth Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan Value 63 63 HINT Positive and negative settings for the Depth parameter result in differing kinds of change in pitch and volume For example if you set the Depth parameter to a positive value for one tone and set another tone to the same numerical value but make it negative the modulation phase for the two tones will be the reverse of each other This allows you to shift back and forth between two different tones or combine it with the Pan setting to cyclically change the location of the sound image von When the Structure parameter PATCH TMT is set to any value from 2 through 10 the output of tones 1 and 2 will be combined into tone 2 and the output of tones 3 and 4 will be combined into tone 4 This applies to the 1 2 Pan Depth parameter settings For this reason tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2 and tone 3 will follow the settings of tone 4 p 56 How to Apply the LFO Apply the LFO gradually after the key is pressed n Delay high more Time Fade Time Pitch Cutoff Frequency Depth Level 4 ae an Note on low less Fade Mode ON lt Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is played until the LFO begins to be applied Apply the LFO immediately when the key is pressed and t
169. Fantom Use the following procedure to switch between these modes 1 Press MODE The Mode window appears MULTITIMBRE PERFORMANCE RHY 2 Press or w to select the desired mode and then press 8 Select When you select a mode the PLAY screen of the corresponding mode appears In each mode the upper left of the PLAY screen will indicate the mode Hew Song qui Trans PATCH User Library Ch Tx 1 Rx 1 4 120 USER Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DO D Beam M Foot Type Realtime Control Cutoff GB Portamento pues na Tight Br xv Tron Legato3 Soaring rp upitr MFX LoFi Compress CHO Delay REU SRU Hall Decay Time KJ octup Resonance Breath E mono Poty ED oct Down RHYTHM CRE This mode is used to play individual sounds patches or rhythm sets from the keyboard If a rhythm set is selected you can play percussion instruments from the keyboard The keyboard controller section and the sound generator section are connected by a single MIDI channel the patch receive channel Multitimbre Mode FART 1 E PART 16 For Quick Composition Playback This mode is suitable when you are using the sequencer to create a song or when playing song data When creating songs or playing song data a different MIDI channel is assigned for each patch used in a part Su
170. For details on control change messages refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch Hold Pedal Polarity Select the polarity of the Hold pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Range STANDARD REVERSE Cont Hold Pedal Continuous Hold Pedal Switch This setting determines whether the HOLD PEDAL jack will provide support for half pedaling ON or not OFF When this is set to support use of half pedaling techniques you can then connect an optional expression pedal EV 5 etc and employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in performances in which piano tones are used Value OFF ON Pedal 1 2 Assign This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jacks Value OFF The control pedal will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 LU For details on control change messages refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List BEND UP The pitch will rise in semitone steps maximum 4 octaves each time you press the pedal BEND DOWN The pitch will fall in semitone steps maximum 4 octaves each time you press the pedal AFTERTOUCH Aftert
171. HM turn the VALUE dial or press DEC to change it to PATCH 3 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Category 4 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the desired category 5 Press b to move the cursor to Lock and turn the VALUE dial or press INC to add a check mark v PATCH PLAY Hew Song SENE LEE Bet e pense ares an cro PATCH User Library Chi Tx 1 Rx 1 J120 USER 001 Generat i onXV Category Frot CCE Tone Sw DO D Beam MFX LoFi Compress ME Foot Type CHO Delay REU SRU Hall Realtime Control cutort Resonance Breath Decay Time GB portamento EP Mono Poly EP octooun KJ octup Favorite Sound Bank1 m ee ee eee f f rpe ass bone upitr Hrns2 Now you can select patches within the category you selected in step 4 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the patch group or patch number and turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to select the patch When the cursor is located at the Patch group you can select the group When the cursor is located at the Patch number you can specify the number Selecting from the Patch List Window 1 Access the Patch List window p 33 USER 001 GenerationXU CMB USER 002 Grand xu PNO Preset A USER 003 GlobalWarmup SPD Preset B USER 004 Chordbender TEK User Library Preset C USER 005 Mu Orchestra ORC USER 006 VORTEX PLS Preset D USER 007 TempoMadness BTS
172. IDI Device Patch rhythm set multitimbre performance and setup and system settings will be transmitted to an external MIDI device This operation is called bulk dump Use this operation when you want to connect another Fantom and play it using the same settings or to save your data on an external MIDI device as a precaution against possible loss of sound data or system settings To transmit data to an external MIDI device connect the external MIDI device and Fantom as shown in the diagram MIDI IN B Ty Roland 5 gp0g000000 9 MERO o o 00000000 0 Ds e ES ES a C 000000 o oo ooo ooo ooo 000 oooorDr o co OO coco ooocaoo o MIDI Sequencer MIDIOUT B fft Roland n 1 Press MENU to open the Menu window 2 Press 4 or w to select Data Transfer and then press 8 Select The Data Transfer window appears 3 Move the cursor to Destination and select MIDI Type of data to transmit Transmit destination CE DNE Source 3 Dest nation mar r Transmit source data 4 Move the cursor to Source and use the following choices to specify the data that will be transmitted Type of data to transmit Transmit source data ALL USER
173. If t to select f these fil P th WAIT The song will begin playing when you press STOP 6 List lH you want toselectone ofthese file names move thie cursor to the desired chain name and press 8 Select PLAY 5 Press 8 Execute to save the file MEMD The chain file will be given a filename extension of SVC nore If you assign a file name that is the same as the name of a file Playing Back a Song already existing on the disk and attempt to perform a save a message of File Already Exists Over Write OK will appear If it is OK to overwrite the existing file press 7 OK To cancel the Save operation press 8 Cancel If you attempt to save data on a disk that has not been formatted by the Fantom a message of Unformatted Disk will appear Please format the disk on the Fantom p 191 123 Playing Back a Song Loading a Chain from Disk Load Here s how to load a previously saved Chain file from disk 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk that contains the desired chain file 2 Access the Chain Play screen p 122 3 Press 1 Load The Load Chain File window appears Load Chain File 1 FANTOM SUC Select 4 Use or W to select to select the chain file that you want to load and then press 8 Select The selected chain file will be loaded then you ll be returned to the Chain Play screen Playing a Chain Here s how to play back
174. MLT If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value MLT P1 P16 yon When the MFX A Source parameter is set to P1 P16 MFX B and MFX C will be disabled When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the patch or rhythm set s multi effects settings are selected those settings are shown in each of the multitimbre s performance s multi effects setting screens and the settings can be then be changed as well Changes to patch or rhythm set multi effects parameter settings are lost when another patch or rhythm set is selected To keep the modified settings save the patch rhythm set settings p 93 p 114 173 Adding Effects Adding Effects Chorus Source When a performance is selected Selects the chorus parameter settings that will be used by the performance If you wish to use the performance settings select PRF If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value PRF P1 P16 When a multitimbre is selected Selects the chorus parameter settings that will be used by the multitimbre If you wish to use the multitimbre settings select MLT If you wish to use the settings of the patch rhythm set assigned to one of the parts select the part number Value MLT P1 P16 When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the patch or
175. Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 General Rhythm Name Rhythm Set Name You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the rhythm set Value space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt A oe UE For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 Clock Source Rhythm Set Clock Source The LFO cycle multi effects changes Phrase Loop and Tone Delay time can be synchronized to a clock tempo When this is used by the rhythm set this Clock Source setting determines the clock which will be used Value RHYTHM The Rhythm Set Tempo will be used SEQUENCER Synchronize to the clock of the Fantom s sequencer or of an external sequencer D For details on using clock tempo refer to Q amp A p 16 Tempo Rhythm Set Tempo When Rhythm Clock Source is set to RHYTHM this setting value is effective MEMD The Rhythm Set Tempo Clock does not transmit clock messages from the MIDI OUT connector Rhythm Tone Tone Name Rhythm Tone Name You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the rhythm tone Value space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt A oe SEN For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 Assign Type Assign Type sets the way sounds are played when the same key is pressed a number of times Value MULTI Layer the sound of the same keys Even with continuous sounds where the sound plays for an ex
176. Matrix Control Ordinarily if you wanted to change tone parameters using an external MIDI device you would need to send System Exclusive messages MIDI messages designed exclusively for the Fantom However System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large For that reason a number of the more typical of the Fantom s tone parameters have been designed so they accept the use of Control Change or other MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values This provides you with a variety of means of changing the way patches are played For example you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the LFO cycle rate or use the keyboard s touch to open and close a filter The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the tone parameters is called the Matrix Control Up to four Matrix Controls can be used in a single patch To use the Matrix Control specify which MIDI message Source parameter will be used to control which parameter Destination parameter and how greatly Sns parameter and the tone to which the effect is applied Tone parameter Source 1 4 Matrix Control Source 1 4 Sets the MIDI message used to change the tone parameter with the Matrix Control Value OFF Matrix control will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 is For more information about Control Change messages plea
177. N100 The specified pattern MEMD In order to make efficient use of screen space display is normally omitted for locations in which no sequencer data is recorded LEN For an explanation of each type of sequencer data refer to Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track Pattern below 4 Use or wW to move upward or downward and view each data item 153 iting Songs Editing Songs HINT If you want to move the current location in steps of a measure move the cursor to the measure position and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC You can also move in steps of a measure by pressing BWD or FWD If you want to move the current location in steps of a beat move the cursor to the beat position and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC When you press 8 Test the sequencer data currently shown at the Re will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector In the case of a note message the note will sound as long as you hold down 8 Test A note off will be transmitted when you release 8 Test 5 To close the Microscope window press EXIT Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track Pattern Phrase tracks or patterns can record the following nine types of sequencer data The recorded location measure beat clock is displayed at the far left of each data item and the MIDI channel number is displayed beside it Note These MIDI messages represent notes From the left the pa
178. OK will appear If you want to overwrite the existing file press 7 OK If you decide to cancel without saving press 8 Cancel If you attempt to save data to a disk that has not been formatted by the Fantom a message of Unformatted Disk will appear Please format the disk on the Fantom p 191 135 Editing Songs This chapter explains the procedure for editing songs Loading the Song You Want to Edit When you edit a song you re modifying a song that s already recorded into internal memory When you re going to edit a song saved to disk you have to first load it into the internal memory voe The internal song will be lost if you turn power off or load another song into internal memory If internal memory contains a song you wish to keep you must save that song to disk p 135 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk that contains the song you want to edit 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press or w to select Song Edit and then press 8 Select The Song Edit screen appears EXE tue eem Mz1 AA STOP Track Output Status 1 5 E 13 10 BOTH EMPTY y z y LP ee Biz Jar coo hs Load Save Init J Setup AT Eg Eg 4 Press 1 Load The Load Song File window appears Load Song File DEMO_001 5VQ Altered State 54KB DEMO_082 S5VQ Ain tNoTrippin 36KB DEMO O83 5UQ Stem Cells 115KB DEMO_004 5VQ Disappearance 25KB RPS_DEMO SV
179. P B et EXP C Ces fentes correspondent aux groupes de cartes d expansion Wave XP A XP C lorsque l expansion Wave les correctifs et rythmes sont utilis s 1 Avant d installer la carte d expansion Wave coupez l alimentation du Fantom et de tous les appareils branch s et d branchez tous les c bles du Fantom y compris le c ble d alimentation 2 Placez le Fantom l envers retirez les quatre vis indiqu es dans le sch ma ci dessous et retirez le couvercle t 2 Vis enlever von Lorsque vous d posez le Fantom face vers le bas placez des piles de journaux ou de magazines sous les quatre coins ou des deux c t s pour le soutenir Ainsi les boutons manettes et autres pi ces ne seront pas endommag s En placant l appareil sens dessus dessous manipulez le avec soin pour viter de l chapper de le laisser tomber ou de se renverser 198 Installation de la carte d ex pansion Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard 5 Remettez le couvercle en place l aide des vis retir es l tape 2 3 l int rieur vous apercevrez une fente pour la carte SR JV80 EXP A et des fentes pour deux cartes SRX EXP B EXP C Comme le montre l illustration ci dessous branchez le connecteur de la carte d expansion Wave dans la fente appropri e et en m me temps ins rez le support de carte de circuits imprim s dans l ouverture de la carte d expansion Wave V rification des cartes
180. PTN100 The specified pattern Below the Track parameter is displayed the location of the beginning of the specified track and the position of the first note on 6 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Editing Individual Items of Sequencer Data Micro Edit Micro Edit lets you edit individual items of sequencer data recorded in a song such as MIDI messages and tempo data Viewing Sequencer Data in the Microscope Window Access the Microscope window when you want to view the sequencer data recorded in a song Each line indicates the location measure beat clock at which the sequencer data is recorded and the data recorded at that location 1 Access the Song Edit screen or the Pattern Edit screen and then load the song that contains the sequencer data you want to view edit p 136 2 Press 7 Micro Edit The Microscope window appears Select the track or pattern Displays the parameter data at the cursor location Microscoge Track st n Name 00 000 ge 0 4 4 ecc 4 a 0 000 a A acc 1 E ft erase rove Copy Place E View Test MIDI channel Sequencer data Location of the sequencer data measure beat clock 3 Move the cursor to Track and select the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to view edit TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track BEAT Beat track PTNO001 PT
181. Performance Edit IAT PER PIO Y CR AS SR E ptem EINE Controller General Reverb ae ARV PAT RON EDDA 96 Scale T tie 3 i ER e a ogee tes 104 Performance Initialize essent terrent 91 Performance List Performance mode siennes 27 Playing in Performance mode 1 e 84 Performance Name sioi i iie ATH te rens Performance Part Write eesseesseseseseeseeeete tnt ttnntnt tenet PERFORMANCE PLAY Performance Write sise Phase Lock multitimbre Phase Lock performance Phase lock switch multitimbre Phase lock switch performance zs PHONES jack eee luu Bia Phrase preview Phrase track Pitch Patchs conce een et eM BSR C e E IE tl es Rhiythtu Set 5 mee teneo Ke netiis vie d hconstee Pitch Bend multitimbre e Pitch Berid performance ence ent Pitch Bend Range multitimbre part sss 116 Pitch Bend Range performance part sssssssssss 101 Pitch bend range rhythm tone sse 74 Pitch bend range down Pitch bend range Up enr tee eee tee rene Pitch bend Modulation lever essere 17 Pitch envelope depth tone 61 Pitch envelope level 0 4 rhythm tone 80 Pitch envelope level 0 4 tone ss 61 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone 80 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensiti
182. Q Preview Scale Tune Wave Expansion Board Version A SR JV60 09 Sessn 1 00 B iSRK O1DunamicDnrm C SRX 9ZConcertPno a s ILES Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 Sequencer Sync Mode Specify the synchronization message that the Fantom s sequencer will use for operation Value MASTER The Fantom will be the master Choose this setting when using the Fantom by itself without synchronizing to another device or when you want other MIDI devices to synchronize to the Fantom SLAVE MIDI The Fantom will be the slave Choose this setting when you want the Fantom to synchronize to MIDI Clock messages received from another MIDI device SLAVE MTC The Fantom will be the slave Choose this setting when you want the Fantom to synchronize to MTC MIDI Time Code received from an external device REMOTE Use this setting when you wish an external MIDI device to have remote start stop control The tempo will be in accord with what has been set on the Fantom MIDI Clock and MTC MIDI Clock and MTC MIDI Time Code are both messages used for synchronization Select either of them depending on the application MIDI Clock transmits and synchronizes operations to a sequencer s performance tempo whereas MTC synchronizes operations between devices based on an absolute time Since Roland VS Series workstations are hard disk recorders they cannot send
183. Q RELAX WITH RPS 21KB Selec 5 Use or W to select the song that you want to edit and then press 8 Select The Load Song File window appears Load Song File DEMO 881 SUG Ritered State 6 Press 8 Execute When the song has finished loading the performance data of the loaded song will be displayed in the Song Edit screen Track number Output destination of each track Status of each track Indicates the name of the currently selected song the measure location Measure number the time signature and the sequencer status ES s I ia Track Output Status 1 5 E 13 30 J INT PLAY CH C2 m 34 m4 2 a 1 PLAY mm 23 C3 C3 C3 C3 mooomm Measures 2 INT PLAY OO N m containing 3 INT _fFLAY oooooooo0 dat 4 1iNT PLAY pxoaimuagapaaouco 5 INT FLRY crooooooo SEgUencon Cale 6 INT PLAY O00 mw mua wd wi wi TINT PFLRY COO m ut w M C2 C2 C2 C2 E m m a d INT PLAY C00 m m m C2 2 C3 C2 39 394 396 340 C2 Measures 3 INT PLAY Ciooooooooooooooo ae 11 INT PLAY C0 ma ma O O O CO GN GN containing no 12 INT PLAY Ciooooooooooooo00 12 CNT fon foio oO OO oOooooooooo sequencer data 14 INT EMPTY H 15 INT EMPTY i 16 INT EMPTY Tempo PLAY Beat i r KEEN Cell Locate number Turns the RPS function on off RPS Turns Loop Play and Loop Recording on off LOOP Indicates sets the song s playback tempo MEMD
184. R to move the cursor to Trans 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press 44 or W to select a Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen appears PATCH PLA Hew Song M 1 4 4 STOP Betts Cane Yes ao a USER 001 Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DD 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Tone Switch d Generationxy CMB Tone Switch vie Biv Av Yone Select 1 2 3 4 D Beam MFX LoFi Compress prp RE SRU am r Realtime Control General General cutoff Resonance Breath decay Time Rrpeggio Patch Name WB Portamento EB mono Poly ED octooun GD octup entromer Patch Category Controller Voice Priority ETIENNE ENT TE Effects Analog Feel id ad ed SN Me Crit offset MFX Control Resonance Offset 3 Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to adjust the Chorus PatchTene c B Reverb Env Mode SUST Transpose setting G F 5 6 semitones Delay Mode NORM Delay Time 6 o Rx Bender OH a LJ Write Init Copy There is a single Transpose setting Setup parameter for the entire Fantom The changed setting will be remembered even if 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to turn each tone you switch patches or performances on off From the left these are Tone Switches 1 4 Assigning a chec
185. R SR JUSO 09 Sessn 1 00 B SRX 81DynamicDrm C SRX ZConcertPno a X Write Init For details on the setting refer to How to Make the System Function Settings p 178 Scale Tune C B Patch Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings for Patch mode Value 64 63 Scale Tune Switch Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal temperament Value OFF ON One set of Scale Tune settings can be created in Patch mode In Performance mode or Multitimbre mode this can be set for each part of the performance or multitimbre p 104 p 120 The Fantom allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments other than equal temperament The pitch is specified in one cent units relative to the equal tempered pitch MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an external MIDI device 186 Equal Temperament This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and is the most widely used method of temperament used in Western music The Fantom employs equal temperament when the Scale Tune Switch is set to OFF Just Temperament Tonic of C Compared with equal temperament the principle triads sound pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter
186. RAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 PERU VIDEO Broadcast S A Portinari 199 ESQ HALS San Borja Lima 41 REP OF PERU TEL 01 4758226 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAN D LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 039 16 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Lauttasaarentie 54 B Fin 00201 Helsinki FINLAND TEL 9 682 4020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 061 43 5400 HUNGARY Intermusica Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 26
187. Range Track Edit sss 139 Basic Operation for Track Editing ss 139 Aligning a Song s Timing Quantize ss 140 Erasing Unwanted Performance Data Erase ss 142 Deleting Unwanted Measures Delete ss 143 Copying Phrases Copy seen 143 Inserting a Blank Measure Insert Measure sss eee nen 145 Transpose the Key Transpose nennen nennen nennen 145 Changing the Velocity Volume Change Velocity ss 146 Changing the MIDI Channel Change Channel 147 Modifying the Length of Notes Change Gate Time 147 Combining Two Phrase Tracks or Patterns into One Merge sss 148 11 Extracting and Moving a Part of Sequencer Data Extract sess 149 Shifting Performance Data Forward and Back Shift Clock ss 150 Thinning Out the Sequencer Data Data Thin 151 Swapping Two Phrase Tracks or Patterns Exchange 152 Adjusting the Song s Playback Time Time Fit 152 Deleting Blank Measures Truncate sus 153 Editing Individual Items of Sequencer Data Micro Edit 153 Viewing Sequencer Data in the Microscope Window sss 153 Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track Pattern sss 154 Viewing sequencer data View tenente enne nenne nennen 155 Editing the Sequencer Data sen 155 Inserting Sequencer Data Create 156 Erasing Sequencer Data Erase cccceccccssesescensesssescsne
188. Roland mig OWNER S MANUAL Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland Fantom FA 76 Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Owner s Manual p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY Owner s Manual p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES Owner s Manual p 4 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Quick Start Owner s Manual Sound Parameter List and Q amp A should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Roland 09 pey SaaS Biles s CON e Er Copyright 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enc
189. Save Destination Rhythm Set Compare Before you save a rhythm set you can audition the rhythm set which currently occupies the save destination to make sure that it is one you don t mind overwriting This can help prevent important rhythm sets from being accidentally overwritten and lost 1 Follow the procedure in Saving Rhythm Sets You ve Created Write through step 5 to select the save destination 2 Press 7 Compare The Rhythm Compare window appears making it possible to sound the currently selected save destination rhythm set Rhythm Compare USER 001 R amp B Kit 1 USER 002 R amp B Kit 2 USER 003 it USER 004 Kit USER 005 Kit USER 006 Pop Kit 2 USER 007 XV Rock Kit USER 008 Rock Kit 2 USER 009 XV Jazz Kit USER 010 Jazz Kit 2 Save destination rhythm set 3 Play the keyboard to sound the save destination rhythm set then check whether you really want to overwrite it yon The rhythm set auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played normally 4 If you wish to change the save destination re specify the save destination rhythm set by using 4 or w n Press 7 Write to return to the Rhythm Write window m Press 8 Execute once again to execute the Save operation Registering Favorite Rhythm Sets Favorite Sound You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used rhythm sets in one place by register
190. Space D REU SRU Room seo MFX E Space D REU SRU Room G MFX C Stereo Phaser we MFX C Stereo Phaser p Realtime Control m Realtime Control cutott Resonance Porta Time Tempo cutott Resonance Porta Time Tempo E arp Hold E Ptn Hola ED Portamento ED Tap Tempo E Arp Hold 3 Ptn Hola ED Portamento ED Tap Tempo Favorite Sound Bank 1 Favorite Sound Bank 1 Fantasn Rook it Imm m That Trippin rene id erem Fantasn rock it vortex Jan that Trippin em FRE eenpse 40455589 01 11 C3 21N
191. Status Selects the type of data for which you wish to change the MIDI channel Value ALL All following sequencer data types NOTE Note P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers PROG Program numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend Ra nge If you have set the Status parameter to NOTE P AFT C C or PROG you can specify the range of data Specify the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To change all MIDI channels of Note or Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C 1 G9 To change the MIDI channel of C4 Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C4 C4 To change the MIDI channels of Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data of a C3 to C4 range specify C3 C4 If you want to change the MIDI channel of all controller numbers set this to 0 127 If you want to change the MIDI channel of all program numbers set this to 1 128 To change the MIDI channel of number 4 set 4 4 To change the MIDI channels of numbers 3 to 14 set this parameter to 3 14 Channel MIDI Channel Set the source MIDI channel at the left section of this parameter and destination MIDI channel at the right section If you have selected ALL for the source MIDI channel the sequencer data of all MIDI channels will be combined into the destination MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 yon It is not possible to select ALL for the destination MIDI
192. TEL 02 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON A Chahine amp Fils Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Bldg No 47 Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 221 1230 TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sheroog Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 0604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd To
193. Type parameter PATCH TMT has a setting of Type 2 10 the outputs of tones 1 and 2 will be combined with tone 2 and the outputs of tones 3 and 4 will be combined with tone 4 For this reason tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2 and tone 3 will follow the settings of tone 4 p 56 When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks MEMD If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 HINT When setting the MFX set the output destination with the MFX Output Assign for the sound after it has passed through the multi effects Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times The output destination of the signal after passing through the chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select B and the Chorus Output Assign The output destination of the signal after passing through the reverb is set with the Reverb Output Assign O Tone Dry Send Level Set the level of the signal that is sent to the output destination specified by Output Assign Value 0 127 Q Tone Chorus Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to c
194. VA settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the TVA envelope while dotted lines are used for the TVF envelope This lets you compare the TVA and TVF envelopes while you make settings Modulating Sounds LFO Patch Edit NM Generationxu CMB Tone Switch Wy 2v Sv 4v Tone Select ijv 2 3 4 Reverb LFO o S a co Marisca Wave Form TRI sin INN d o TMT 1 0ffset 108 168 Wave 1 Rate Detune o a 6 ii 1 Delay Time 6 a g g Riton 1 Delay Time KF 8 8 8 8 TUF 1 Fade Mode ON ON OH lt on TUR 1iFade Time 8 8 8 8 1 Key Trigger on ON ON ON For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 Mem An LFO Low Frequency Oscillator causes change over a cycle in a sound Each tone has two LFOs LFO1 LFO2 and these can be used to cyclically change the pitch cutoff frequency and volume to create modulation type effects such as vibrato wah and tremolo Both LFOs have the same parameters so only one explanation is needed LFO 1 2 Waveform LFO1 LFO2 Waveform Selects the waveform of the LFO Value SIN Sine wave TRI Triangle wave SAW U Sawtooth wave SAW D Sawtooth wave negative polarity Creating a Patch SQR Square wave RND Random wave BND U Once the attack of the waveform output by the LFO is allowed to develop in stand
195. W to select the sequencer data that will be inserted HINT If you want to insert a system exclusive message select Sys Excl Default However if you want to insert a General MIDI System On message or General MIDI 2 System On message in order to initialize the sound generator to the GM default state select Sys Excl GM ON or Sys Excl GM2 ON and to exit the GM state select Sys Excl GM OFF 5 Press 8 Execute to insert the sequencer data Once the sequencer data has been inserted you ll be returned to the Microscope window 6 The sequencer data that was inserted will have the default parameter values so edit them as necessary HINT If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo Erasing Sequencer Data Erase If desired you can erase just an individual event of sequencer data You can also use the same operation to erase individual items of data from the tempo track or beat track von It is not possible to erase the tempo change located at the beginning of the tempo track the beat change and key signature located at the beginning of the beat track or the pattern beat 1 Access the Microscope window for the track or pattern from which you want to erase sequencer data p 153 2 Press or w to move the cursor to the sequencer data that
196. Waveform changes oy Shift in waveform by WG1 Ring Modulator A ring modulator multiplies the waveforms of two tones with each other generating many new overtones inharmonic partials which were not present in either waveform Unless one of the waveforms is a sine wave evenly spaced frequency components will not usually be generated As the pitch difference between the two waveforms changes the harmonic structure the result will be an unpitched metallic sound This function is suitable for creating metallic sounds such as bells Key Fade Lower Keyboard Fade Width Lower This determines what will happen to the tone s level when a note that s lower than the tone s specified keyboard range is played Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Key Range Lower Keyboard Range Lower Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each tone Value C 1 UPPER Key Range Upper Keyboard Range Upper Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each tone Value LOWER G9 von If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value will be automatically modified to the same setting Key Fade Upper Keyboard Fade Width Upper This determines what will happen to the tone s
197. a of a specific MIDI channel select that MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 yon If you set the Status parameter to EXC TUNE or PTN the Channel parameter will not be available 8 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Shifting Performance Data Forw ard and Back Shift Clock This function shifts the timing of sequencer data backward or forward in time within a specified area in steps of 1 clock Slight shifts of timing can speed up or drag performance yon When this function is executed data that would be moved to a point before the beginning of the song will automatically shift to the beginning of the song If data would be moved to a point past the end of the song additional new measures will be created automatically as needed The time signature of the newly created measures will be the same as that of the measure immediately preceding 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press 44 or w to select Shift Clock and then press 8 Select A message of SHIFT CLOCK Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to move If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or
198. a song These are called Locate Positions Normally locations in a song are indicated as measure beat clock but a locate position is also displayed as an absolute time of hours minutes seconds frames Assigning a Locate Position Up to four locate positions can be assigned in each song It is not possible to assign a locate position to a pattern 1 Loadthe song in which you want to specify a locate position p 136 2 Access the Song Setup window p 137 3 Use or W to select Locate and then press 8 Select The Locate window appears 86 ae ae 60 88 60 86 68 98 ae 66 60 aa a0 a8 aa 4 Move the cursor to the measure or beat value of the locate number that you want to set 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set each value At the bottom of the Song Edit screen you will see the locate numbers H E of the locate positions you have specified HINT When you press 7 Set the locate position will be stored as the current location of the song You can also set this by pressing 7 Set while you listen during song playback Moving to a Locate Position Use the following procedure to change the song location to a Locate Position 1 Access the Locate window 2 Use or wW to move the cursor to the locate number of the locate position to which you want to move 3 Press 8 Jump You will move to the s
199. a to tom If the conga sound is assigned to the D4 key and the tom sound is assigned to the C3 key set the Range parameter to D4 D4 and the Bias parameter to 14 Changing the Velocity Volume Change Velocity This function modifies the keyboard playing dynamics velocity of a specified note area 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or w to select Change Velocity and then press 8 Select A message of CHANGE VELOCITY Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern whose velocity you want to change If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 146 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern whose velocity you want to change and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Change Velocity window appears Track Edit Change Velocity Track ETHIE Measure 6991 for 1 Bias fo Magnify 166 Channel ALL 2 Range c 1 Efco 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the phrase track s or pattern whose velocity will be changed Val
200. able Options Wave Expansion Board SRX Series SR JV80 Series Keyboard Stand KS 12 Pedal Switch DP 2 6 Foot Switch BOSS FS 5U Expression Pedal EV 5 Note In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 200 Symbols OHO 3 C3 Numerics Tc 17 28 Delay Time succi mp reise prie ERE AYER HORREA 67 1 Delay Time KF ii 67 TiFade Mode 67 V Fade Time s r haaat 67 1 Key Trigger 68 LOPES Cb E 67 T Pan Depth esos S ec tiet tel te dee Ae 68 1 Pitch Depth 68 1 Rate 67 1 Rate Detune 67 VEVA Depth m aS 68 DEVE DOP 1 nA E E E T ennemies 68 1 Waveform 66 2 Delay Time 2 Delay Time KF 2 Fade Mode 2 F de Time EN TR 2 Key Trigger DOVES OU is rete eenuiisedam item irn iidem seine 2 Pan Depth ses 2 Pitch Depth 68 2 Rate 67 2 Rate Detune 67 DIV A Depth eec ce dite tette tuse dents 68 ZIVER Depth is ichs aae E 68 PARANE EO t 0 IEEE E E E E A A E enda 66 A AC inl E A E TAE ET EEE A E EE Accent Rate patch nn Accent Rate performance Accent Rate rhythm set Aftertouch Sens ss Aftertouch sensitivity ss Alter Pan Depth Alter Pan SW sss Alternate Pan Depth rhythm tone 82 Alternate pan depth tone ss 6
201. ach assigned to one rhythm tone When adding 3D effects to the sound make the Pan settings for each rhythm tone individually WMT Wave Group Select the groups containing the Waves comprising the rhythm tone Value INT Waveforms stored in internal memory XP A Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 series installed in EXP A slots XP B Waveforms residing on a Wave Expansion Board SRX series installed in the EXP B slot XP C Waveforms residing on a Wave Expansion Board SRX series installed in the EXP C slot note You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board that is not installed 77 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set Wave No L Wave Number L Wave No R Wave Number R This selects the Waves comprising the rhythm tone Along with the Wave number the Wave name appears at the lower part of the display When in monaural mode only the left side L is specified When in stereo the right side R is also specified Value 1 1083 Wave Gain Sets the gain amplification of the waveform The value changes in 6 dB decibel steps an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform s gain Value 6 0 6 12 FXM Switch This sets whether FXM will be used ON or not OFF Value OFF ON FXM FXM Frequency Cross Modulation uses a specified waveform to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected waveform creating complex overtones Thi
202. ai Destination 3 981 Most 2 Move the cursor to Type and select the type of data that will be transferred PATCH 001 128 Patch RHYTHM 001 016 Rhythm Set MULTITIMBRE 01 16 Multitimbre PERFORMANCE 01 64 Performance SYSTEM System FAVORITE PATCH Favorite list for patches FAVORITE PERFORMANCE Favorite list for performances 3 If you will be loading patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance settings move the cursor to Source and specify the range of data that will be transferred Then move the cursor to Destination and specify the starting number of the load destination yon If you carry out this operation while set so there is more data at the load source than can fit into the load destination as much of the source data as possible will be loaded into the destination starting with the beginning of the source data Example TypelPATCH Source Destination 3 SOUND_G9 SUD USER eet foes 128 If the above settings are made and transmission is executed only the two PR A group patches 001 and 002 will be transmitted to USER group patches 127 and 128 4 Press 8 Execute Saving Data on Disk Save This function saves a song stored in internal memory internal song patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance settings or a data file containing System settings to disk yon Data cannot be saved to the master disks of Standa
203. aise the cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the cutoff frequency use negative settings Value 63 63 Resonance Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Value 0 127 LPF BPF HPF PKG Level High 4 4 4 ie E Frequency Cutoff frequency al 4 4 A 4 2 A v E 5 x aa de d m Ba 4 n 4 3 Que DNE N MM 4 4 4 UN LA LT Low Bi Le E Ha gt x gt Resonance V Sens Resonance Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance If you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance effect set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to have less Resonance use negative settings Value 63 63 Env Depth TVF Envelope Depth Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope Higher settings will cause the TVF envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope Value 63 63 Creating a Rhythm Set Env V Curve TVF Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TVF Envelope applied is no
204. aj Performance roe eee tenerte bt shade todas op Re ie de a repe site ares 85 Selecting Favorite Performances Favorite Sound 86 Selecting Performances from the List 86 Combining and Playing Sounds Together Layer 87 Playing Different Sounds in Different Areas of the Keyboard Split 87 Playing Arpeggios in a Specific Region of the Keyboard 88 Playing Rhythm Patterns in a Specific Region of the Keyboard sss 89 Using the Fantom As a Master Keyboard 90 Changing the Connections between Keyboard and Sound Generator Zone 90 Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part Part Information ss 90 Creating a Performance sucette D T How to Make the Performance Settings 91 Initializing Performance Settings Init 91 Copying Performance Settings Copy ss 92 Saving Performance You ve Created Write 93 Registering a Favorite Performance Favorite Sound sss 93 Functions of Performance Parameters sse nn 94 Settings Common to the Entire Performance General ss 94 Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio siennes 95 Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn ss 96 Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller sss 97 Zone Settings ZOnE erret e ee e re ee edere eee teet suede rte dn 98 Making Settings for Each Part Part 100 M
205. aking Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI 103 Setting Effects for a Performance Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb 104 Scale Tune Settings Scale T rie 5 etcetera he ends 104 Changing the Settings of the Patch Assigned to a Part 105 Playing in Multitimbre Mode 106 About the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen 106 Displaying the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen cscscesessssesesescecessseecenenesesesnsnenesesceseeesesesnanenes 106 Selecting a MultitimDre aote edem evaserit Ee rise tn agree tere it deside 107 Selecting Multitimbres from a List 107 Playing Back Song eee repere En ete e e eka e preset se TII ia esee eoe ind 108 Selecting a Part to Play from the Keyboard Current Part 108 Selecting a Part to Play Individually Solo ss 108 Silencing the Playback of a Specific Part Mute sse 109 Assigning a Different Patch to a Part sus 109 Adjusting the Volume and Pan of Each Part 109 Recording an Arpeggio Performance 110 Recording the Performance of a Rhythm Pattern 110 Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part Part Information 111 Creating a Multitimbre ree en eee 112 How to Make the Multitimbre Settings 112 Initializing Multitimbre Settings Init sse 112 Copying Multitimbre Settings Copy ss 113 Saving Multitimbre You ve Created Write 114
206. allowing you to play multiple patches simultaneously Layer or in separate regions of the keyboard Split Performance Multitimbre Part 16 La Patch Rhythm Set Part A part is the place to which a patch or rhythm set is assigned when using the Fantom in Multitimbre mode or Performance mode A single multitimbre performance comprises sixteen parts with a patch or rhythm set being assigned to each part Overview of the Fantom MEMO About Simultaneous Polyphony E i i ke Voice R ttings that Id The Fantom can play a maximum of 64 sounds simultaneously The lis not possible tomake Voice Reserve Eres that wou the total of all parts to b ter than 64 voices following paragraphs discuss what this means and what will cause the tota otau pants o hepteater Man Gtyoices happen when more than 64 simultaneous voices are requested from Overview of the Fantom the Fantom Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used The Fantom is able to play up to 64 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of sounds actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the patches and the number of Waves used in the tones The following method is used to calculate the number of sounds us
207. ame rate is fixed so the Fantom s setting must correspond to that frame rate Types of MTC The types of MTC that can be selected by the Fantom are shown below Select the same frame rate as that set for the external device When not using a video device then any frame rate may be selected as long as the rates are the same on both devices being synchronized 30 This is 30 frames per second non drop format This is used by audio devices such as analog tape recorders and for NTSC format black and white video used in Japan and the U S 29N This is 29 97 frames per second non drop format This is used for NTSC format color video used in Japan and the U S 29D 29 97 frames per second drop format This is used for NTSC format color video used in Japan and the U S 25 25 frame per second frame rate This is used for SECAM or PAL format video audio equipment and film used in Europe and elsewhere 24 24 frame per second frame rate This is used for video audio devices and film in the US Non Drop Format and Drop Format There are two types of format used by NTSC video cassette recorders non drop and drop Non drop format features continuous time code whereas in drop format which is used for NTSC color video format the first two frames of every minute are dropped except for those at ten minute intervals In most video and audio production since formats with continuous frames are easier to deal with non drop is genera
208. ameter to ALL To erase sequencer data of one specific MIDI channel only select that MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 von If you set the Track parameter to TEMPO or if the Status parameter is set to EXC TUNE or PTN the Channel parameter will not be available 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Editing Songs Deleting Unwanted Measures Delete This function deletes a specified area of sequencer data and moves the subsequent data to fill the gap As a result the measure length will be shortened by the number of deleted measures 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Delete and then press 8 Select A message of DELETE Select target point will be displayed 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern that you want to delete If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern that you want to delete and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Delete window appears Track Edit Delete Track GEM Measure 9901 for 1 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting Firs
209. ances Playing in Multiimbre Mode This explains how to play the Fantom in Multitimbre mode Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Creating a Multitimbre This explains how to create a multitimbre and the functions and structure of the multitimbre parameters Read this when you wish to create a multitimbre Playing Back a Song This explains how to play back a song using the Fantom s sequencer Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Recording a Song This explains how to record a song using the Fantom s sequencer Reading it is essential for understanding Fantom operational procedures Editing a Song This chapter explains song editing and song settings in detail Read this when you wish to edit a song that you ve recorded Playing Phrase with One Finger RPS Function This explains the settings of the RPS Realtime Phrase Sequence function and how to use it for performance Read this chapter when you wish to use the RPS Changing Tones in Realtime This explains how to use the D Beam controller and realtime controllers to modify the sound and how to make the necessary settings Read this when you want to modify the sound in realtime Applying Effects This chapter explains how to make settings for the Fantom s onboard effects and describes the type and operation of each effect Be sure to read this when adding effects to patches and performances
210. ange to be higher than the mathematical tuning ratios would otherwise dictate With a setting of OFF the patch s tuning will be equal temperament A setting of 3 will produce the greatest difference in the pitch of the low and high ranges Value OFF 1 3 The diagram shows the pitch change relative to equal temperament that will occur in the low and high ranges This setting will have a subtle effect on the way in which chords resonate Pitch difference from equal temperament Parameter value OFF Low note range High note range Tone C Tune Tone Coarse Tune x Adjusts the pitch of the tone s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Tone F Tune Tone Fine Tune x Adjusts the pitch of the tone s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Creating a Patch Rnd Pitch Depth Random Pitch Depth This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed If you do not want the pitch to change randomly set this to 0 These values are in units of cents 1 100th of a semitone Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Pitch KF Pitch Key Follow This specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you play a key one octave higher i e 12 keys upward on the keyboard If you wan
211. anges Portamento ss 37 Playing Arpeggios Arpeggiator sienne 38 Holding an Arpeggio esse 38 Simulating a Rhythm Guitar siennes 38 Using an External MIDI Keyboard to Play Arpeggios sssssseeeeeeee 39 Making Arpeggiator Settings ss 39 Playing Percussion Instruments sn 40 Selecting a Rhythin S8t ete e sh tet nte nt er e dete RA E eee foit egt 40 Playing a Rhythm Set ze eR RR oes 41 Playing Rhythm Patterns from the Keyboard 41 Holding the Playback of a Rhythm Pattern ss 41 Making Rhythm Pattern Settings 41 Greating a Patcli en on ttes cn da set es 42 How to Make the Patch Settings seen 42 Initializing Patch Settings nit ss 43 Copying Patch Settings Copy ss 43 Cautions When Selecting a Waveform ss 44 Saving Patches You ve Created Write sisi 45 Auditioning the Save Destination Patch Compare 46 Registering a Favorite Patch Favorite Sound sess 46 Functions of Patch Parameters seen 47 Settings Common to the Entire Patch General ss 47 Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio siennes 51 Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller sss 52 Setting Effects for a Patch Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb 53 Matrix Control Settings Matrix Ctrl ss 54 Changing How a Tone Is Sounded TMT ss 56 Modifying Wav
212. annel of a specified area of sequencer data into a different MIDI channel 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Change Channel and then press 8 Select A message of CHANGE CHANNEL Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern whose MIDI channel you want to change If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track whose MIDI channel you want to change and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Change Channel window appears Track Edit Change Channel Track EIEI Measure 0901 for Status RLL Range Channeli 3 1 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the phrase track s or pattern in which the MIDI channel will be changed Value ALL Phrase Tracks 1 16 TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures in which the MIDI channel will be changed If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified
213. ansion Board is not being recognized correctly Re install the Wave Expansion Board correctly 197 Installing the Wave Expansion Board Installation de la carte d expansion Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard French language for Canadian Safety Standard Un maximum de trois cartes d expansion Wave une carte SR JV80 deux cartes SRX peuvent tre install es dans le Fantom Les cartes d expansion Wave emmagasinent des donn es Wave correctifs et rythmes et en ajoutant ces cartes au Fantom il est possible d largir consid rablement la palette de sons Pr cautions prendre lors de l installation d une carte d expansion Wave Veuillez suivre attentivement les instructions suivantes quand vous manipulez la carte afin d viter tout risque d endommagement des pi ces internes par l lectricit statique Toujours toucher un objet m tallique reli la terre comme un tuyau par exemple avant de manipuler la carte pour vous d charger de l lectricit statique que vous auriez pu accumuler Lorsque vous manipulez la carte la tenir par les c t s vitez de toucher aux composants ou aux connecteurs Conservez le sachet d origine dans lequel tait la carte lors de l envoi et remettez la carte dedans si vous devez la ranger ou la transporter Utilisez un tournevis de type Philips de la taille adapt e celle des vis tournevis num ro 2 Un tournevis inad quat peut endommag
214. ar multi effects in realtime p 55 Source 1 4 Multi Effects Control Source 1 4 Sets the MIDI message used to change the multi effects parameter with the multi effects control Value OFF Multi effects control will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IN For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 MIDI messages used as common multi effects controls If you want to use common controllers for the entire Fantom select SYS CTRL 1 SYS CTRL 4 MIDI messages used as System Control 1 4 are set with the Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source parameters SYSTEM Control p 184 175 Adding Effects Adding Effects yon In patch rhythm set mode there are parameters that determine for each tone rhythm tone whether or not Pitch Bend Controller Number 11 Expression and Controller Number 64 Hold 1 are received p 51 When these settings are ON and the MIDI messages are received then when any change is made in the settings of the desired parameter the Pitch Bend Expression and Hold1 settings also change simultaneously If you want to change the targeted parameters only then set these to OFF There are parameters that determine whether or not specific MIDI messages are received for each MIDI channel p 108 p 119 When using the multi effects control confir
215. ard fashion the waveform then continues without further change BND D Once the decay of the waveform output by the LFO is allowed to develop in standard fashion the waveform then continues without further change TRP Trapezoidal wave S amp H Sample amp Hold wave one time per cycle LFO value is changed CHAOS Chaos wave nore If you set this to BND U or BND D you must turn the 1 2 Key Trigger parameter to ON If this is OFF it will have no effect 1 2 Rate LFO 1 LFO2 Rate x Adjusts the modulation rate or speed of the LFO Value 0 127 Note LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo that specifies the LFO cycle Patch Tempo is synchronized with the tempo set in a sequencer Example For a tempo of 120 120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute 60 seconds Setting d half note d quarter note d eighth note Delay time 1 second 60 60 1 second 0 5 seconds 60 120 0 5 seconds 0 25 seconds 60 240 0 25 seconds yon This setting will be ignored if the 1 2 Waveform parameter is set to CHAOS 1 2 Offset LFO 1 LFO2 Offset Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to the central value pitch or cutoff frequency Positive settings will move the waveform so that modulation will occur from the central value upward Negative settings will move the waveform so that modulation will occur f
216. ase be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside Making Settings for the D Beam Controller 1 Hold down JUMP and press D BEAM ON OFF The D Beam window appears Switch OH 34 Assign d Polarity STANDARD Range 8 Eg 127 In this window you can set the following parameters for the D Beam controller Switch Switch the D Beam controller on off Assign Specify the function that will be controlled by the D Beam controller Polarity Switch the polarity of the D Beam controller Valid Settings Adjust the variable range upper limit lower limit of the D Beam controller MEMD When using this in Performance mode Zone will be added in addition to the above parameters This parameter specifies the zone that will be controlled by the D Beam controller Modifying the Sound in Real Time For details on each parameter refer to Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller p 52 2 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to set and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting 3 Press 8 Close to close the D Beam window Settings for the D Beam controller are saved independently for each patch performance as part of the patch performance settings This lets you create patches performances that make effective use of controller settings Using Knobs or Buttons to Modify the Sound Realtime Controller You can use the REALTIME CONTROL
217. assigned when the disk was formatted von N me 4 It is not possible to modify the volume label of the master disks of the Standard MIDI Files releases etc from Roland Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 Press 6 Tools The Select Command window appears Press or w to select Change Volume Label and then press 8 Select The Change Volume Label window appears Change Volume Label FRHTOM FD gt FANTOM_FD b M 0123456789 2 amp Ca O B Prev next Insert Delete EH Modify the volume label and press 8 OK D 5 For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 The Change Volume Label window appears Change Volume Label from FANTOM_FD to DEMO Press 8 Execute to execute the operation 192 Checking Files Recorded on Disk If a disk is scratched slightly bent or damaged in some way song data or sound data files on it will no longer be readable and functions such as quick play and chain play will be interrupted To avoid such problems this function checks all the files on disk to see whether they can be read correctly 1 2 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 Press 6 Tools The Select Command window appears Press or w to select Check Floppy Disk and then press 8 Select The Check Floppy Disk window appears Check Floppy Disk Press Execute to Check Flo
218. b stone Patch Initialize Patch Level i Patch List asser An eee eed edes Patch Mode Playing in Patch mode siie e 31 Patch mode Patel Name a E nn edere eee 47 Patch Number multitimbre part ss 115 Patch Number performance part sss 100 Patch Output Assign ss 168 Patch Pan ip usd ud 31 Patch Remain ertet rtr ttt ette teeth hehe 179 Patch remain switch 179 Batch dip 45 Patch Rhythm multitimbre part 115 Patch Rhythm performance part sssssssssseeee 100 Patch Rhythm Rx Ch iii 182 Patch rhythm set multitimbre part Patch rhythm set performance part Patch rhythm set receive channel 182 Patch rhythm set transmit channel 7 183 Patch Rhythm Tx Ch ins 183 Pattern Assigning a pattern to a phrase track sssssssss 134 Pattern name oon eser tec PE a ges ERST 138 Pattern call message 134 Patteri take es ee e UU soe cierta 25 Pedal 1 2 Assign 184 Pedal 1 2 Polarity ss 185 Performance How a performance is organized sss 20 Layer performance Performance group Performance parameters sse 94 Performance settings sss Selecting a performance Split performanc 5 eoe tri be nente dehet epe eena Performance control channel sss 182 Performance Copy ss 92 Performance Ctrl Ch sese 182
219. be off when you release your finger from the button LATCH The button will switch on off each time you press it D Beam Switch D Beam Switch Switches the D Beam controller on off Value OFF ON Assign D Beam Assign Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller Value OFF The D Beam controller will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 D For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch NOTE Play the sound of the most recently pressed key OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller ARP SWITCH Switches the Arpeggiator on off ARP VAR Arpeggio Variation ARP ACCENT Arpeggio Accent Rate ARP SHFFLE Arpeggio Shuffle Rate ARP OCT UP The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will rise in steps of an octave maximum 3 octaves ARP OCT DW The range in which the arpeggio is sounded will lower in steps of an octave maximum 3 octaves Polarity D Beam Polarity Switch the polarity of the D Beam co
220. ber of voices used Sys Control1 4 System Control 1 4 Information The MIDI message specified as the Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source parameter SYSTEM Controller 111 Multitimbre Mode ing in Play Creating a Multtimbre With the Fantom you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating multitimbres and the functions of the multitimbre parameters How to Make the Multitimbre Settings Start with an existing multitimbre and edit it to create a new multitimbre But before you do try to envision what the entire multitimbre will sound like and decide which patch or rhythm set to assign to each of 16 parts 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen and select the multitimbre whose settings you wish to modify p 107 HINT If you want to create all your multitimbres from the ground up rather than the multitimbres that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 112 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Menu Multitimbre Edit Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play D 3 Press 44 or W to select Multitimbre Edit and then press 8 Select The Multitimbre Edit screen appears FRNTOM Temp General Grand xu PNO
221. button at which you wish to register the sound The display will indicate Register OK 4 Press 8 OK to execute the registration To cancel the operation press EXIT Using the Favorite List Window to Register 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen to select the performance that you wish to register p 85 2 Make sure that you are in the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and that the cursor is located at the performance group or the performance number 3 While holding down SHIFT press LIST The Favorite List window appears Favorite List Performance Bank 1 Bank 2 1 2 Bank 3 1 3 Bank 4 Cs Bank 5 1 6 Bank 6 ler Bank 7 Us Bank 8 current USER 91 Fantasm Regist Remove Select 4 Press to move the cursor to the Bank 1 8 tab and press or w to select the bank in which you wish to register the performance Perf FavList 5 Press to move the cursor within the list and press or W to select the number to which you wish to register The number you select here corresponds to 1 8 6 Press 5 Regist to execute the registration HINT By pressing 6 Remove you can cancel the performance registration that is selected in the Favorite List window 7 When you have finished registering favorite sounds press EXIT to close the Favorite List window Functions of Performance Parameters This section explains the functions the di
222. ch This sets whether FXM will be used ON or not OFF Value OFF ON FXM FXM Frequency Cross Modulation uses a specified waveform to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected waveform creating complex overtones This is useful for creating dramatic sounds or sound effects FXM Color Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation Higher settings result in a grainier sound while lower settings result in a more metallic sound Value 1 4 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch FXM Depth x Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM Value 0 16 Tempo Sync Wave Tempo Sync When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock tempo set this to ON This is valid only when an optional Wave Expansion Board such as SR JV80 10 BASS amp DRUMS is installed and you have selected a tone which uses a waveform that displays tempo BPM Value OFF ON yon When the Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON settings related to Pitch p 60 and FXM p 59 are disabled When the Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON set the Delay Time parameter PATCH General to 0 With other settings a delay effect will be applied and you will be not be able to play as you expect Phrase Loop Phrase loop refers to the repeated playback of a phrase that s been pulled out of a song e g by using a sampler One technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of a Phrase
223. ch a set of sounds selected for each part to play is called a multitimbre The keyboard controller section and the sound generator section are connected by a single MIDI channel the receive channel of the current part Performance Mode FART 1 L For Live Performance Composition This mode allows you to combine multiple sounds patches or rhythm sets to create complex setups or to use the Fantom as a master keyboard You can play patches together Layer or divide the keyboard into two regions and play different patches in each region Split The keyboard controller section and sound generator section are connected according to the zone settings 27 Overview of the Fantom Overview of the Fantom Switching Screens from the Menu IMENU The Fantom has a variety of screens and windows in which its numerous functions can be executed and you can move between these screens as desired Use the following procedure to access the desired screen or window 1 Press MENU The Menu window appears System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play 2 Press or to select the desired screen window and then press 8 Select The screen window for the desired function appears MEMD The screens windows that can be selected from the Menu window will depend on the mode of the sound generator Window The somewhat smaller screens that app
224. ch window HINT Realtime controller settings are saved independently for each patch performance as part of the patch performance settings This lets you create patches performances that make effective use of controller settings Using a Pedal to Modify the Sound Control Pedal You can modify the sound by pressing a pedal that is connected to the rear panel CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jack Pedal such as expression pedals EV 5 available separately pedal switches DP 2 6 available separately or foot switches BOSS FS U available separately can be connected to the Fantom 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 While playing the keyboard to produce sound operate a pedal The sound will change according to the function that is assigned to the control pedal Making Control Pedal Settings 1 Press MENU to access the Menu window 2 Use or w to select System Edit and then press 8 Select The System Edit screen appears 3 Press 1 A or 2 V to select the Controller tab A screen like the following appears General Controller Sequencer Sus Ctrl 1 Source MODULATION o Sus Ctrl 2 Source RFTERTOUCH MIDI Sys Ctrl 3 Source BREATH Sys Ctrl 4 Source FOOT TYPE w Hold Pedal Polarity STANDARD _ Cont Hold Pedal Preview Pedal 1 Assign Scale Tune Pedal 1 Polarity Pedal 2 Assign Wave Expansion Board Version A SR JVS0 89 Sessn 1 00 B SRX O1DynamicDrm C
225. chain you create can be saved to disk as a Chain file Hn 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk on which you want to save By holding down SHIFT and pressing 4 amp or W youcan the chain file jump to the beginning or end of the song list By pressing 6 Select AII you can add all songs on the disk to er Access the Chain Play screen pcdes the chain 3 Press 2 Save To add sounds data files to the chain press 4 Sound and The Save Chain File window appears make your selection in the Select Sound window that appears 6 When you are finished selecting songs for the chain press EXIT to close the Select Song File window babe kab Aint rane Puis fret If a chain already exists in internal memory you can insert 4 Assign a file name up to 8 characters Press 5 Name additional songs at the cursor location the current step and in the Name window that appears assign the desired file By holding down SHIFT and pressing 4 amp or W you can name jump to the first or last step 7 Next specify how the songs registered in the chain are to For details on assigning a name refer to Assigning a Name begin playing Play Mode In the chain move the cursor to p 30 the song whose Play Mode you want to set and press 7 HINT Play Wait to switch the setting PLAY The song will begin playing automatically If you want to see a list of the chain files saved on the disk press List
226. channel 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Modifying the Length of Notes Change Gate Time This function modifies the gate time time from note on to note off of notes within a specified area Depending on the setting you can also create staccato or tenuto 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Change Gate Time and then press 8 Select A message of CHANGE GATE TIME Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern whose gate times you want to change If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern whose gate times you want to change and press 8 Select 147 Editing Songs Editing Songs The Track Edit Change Gate Time window appears Track Edit Change Gate Time Track Measure 5001 for 1 Bias 8 Magnify 146 Channel ALL Range c3 fcs 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the phrase track s or pattern whose gate time
227. ck Edit The Track Edit window appears ange Gate Time Shift Clock 139 iting Songs Editing Songs 3 Use or W to select the desired function and press 8 Select A message like the following appears prompting you to specify the region that is to be affected by the track editing operation QUANTIZE Select target point 4 Specify the region that you want to edit Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the measure of the track or pattern that you want to edit If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAll To specify a range of measures hold down SHIFT and press gt The region you specify here will be reflected in the editing region setting in the window of the track edit function 5 Once you ve specified the region you intend to edit press 8 Select A window with settings for the desired function appears Verify that the object of editing is as you specified earlier and make changes here if necessary 6 Set the parameters for each function Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value UE For details on the setting windows of each track editing function refer to the following explanations of each function 7 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will briefly indicate Complete HINT If you decide not to execute the operation press
228. ck s or pattern that is to be erased Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures that are to be erased If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified 142 Status Selects the type of data to be erased Value ALL All types of sequencer data NOTE Note P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers PROG Program numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend EXC System Exclusive messages Tune Tune Request PTN Pattern Call Message data nore If the Track parameter is set to TEMPO the Status parameter will not be available Range If you have set the Status parameter to NOTE P AFT C C or PROG specify the range Set the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To erase all Note or Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C 1 G9 To erase C4 Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C4 CA If you wish to delete all controller numbers select 0 127 If you wish to delete all program numbers select 1 128 To erase number 4 specify 4 4 To erase numbers from 3 to 14 specify 3 14 Channel MIDI Channel Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be erased When you want to erase all sequencer data set this par
229. control messages from a pedal connected to the CTL 1 and CTL 2 PEDAL jacks will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON 99 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Making Settings for Each Part Part Performance Edit Fantasm General Part West End Bs SBS Parti Arpeggio PRTI 2 3 4 Ets Patch Rhuthm A PAT Rhythm Ptn Patch Bank PRD Controller Patch Number 188 Zone Level a 115 7 Pan o o 8 Part Coarse Tune e e e e MIDI Fine Tune e e e e Effects Mono Poly Pat PAT PAT MON poe i id je H 0 D TT TT a X Write Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Patch Rhythm Patch Rhythm Set Sets the assignment of a patch PAT or rhythm set RHY to each of the parts Patch Bank Selects the group to which the desired patch or rhythm set belongs Value USR User PRA E Preset A E GM GM GM2 XPA C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots Patch Number Selects the desired patch or rhythm set by its number Value 001 Level Part Level Adjust the volume of each part This setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between parts Value 0 127 Pan Part Pan Adjust the pan of each part L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R
230. creen like the one shown below appears Patch Edit NI Generationxy CMB Tone Switch lv 2 Siv alv Tone Select sl ai 4 Press 1 A or 2 to select the General tab A screen like the one shown below appears General i Patch Name Generationxy Ai Le ft pa d Patch Category COMBINATION Controller Uoice Priority LRST EX GenerationXU CMB Effects Analog Feel Tone Switch i 2v Bv av toneSelect 1 2 JS 4 MFX Mono Poly POLY 2 Aona Cutoff Offset 8 MFX Control Resonance Offset 8 Ex General Chorus Rrpeggio Patch Name ationxy Patch Tone D CO Patch Category 0 Reverb Env Mode sust susr susr susr Controller Voice Priority v Delay Mode HORM HORM HORM HORM Effects Analog Feel Delay Time 8 8 8 8 MFX Mono Poly Rx Bender ON ON ON ON Aoa Cutoff Offset 8 MFX Control Resonance Offset 8 4 hd rite Init Copu Chorus PatcehTone D gt o CO CO Reverb Env Mode sust sust sust SUST 66 Delay Mod ORI HORM HORM ORM 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Mono Poly Blyth 6 Rx Bender ON ON OH OH 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press DEC to select MONO Now you can play in mono mode write J Init Copy 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Portamento Switch If you assign MONO POLY as a fun
231. cted Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 1 Melle St Braamfontein ohannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 ohannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 7 Werdmuller Centre
232. cted to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through UJ USING THE UNIT SAFELY Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Infor mation page Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board SR e JV80 SRX Series Quick Start p 3 4 N CAUTION The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS 12 Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability A causing possible injury Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this e9 unit Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled of the reach of children IMPORTANT NOTES N CAUTION Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit S Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands 1 when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this W unit Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from externa
233. ction to be controlled by the realtime control buttons amp B 3 you can easily switch 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC to select ON You re ready to play portamento between mono poly by pressing a button 7 When you want to change the portamento setting edit the following parameters in the screen of step 4 Portamento Mode Portamento Type Portamento Start Portamento Time See p 48 for each parameter s functions 8 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 9 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY screen and play If you assign CC65 Portamento as a function to be controlled by the realtime control buttons KB 31 you can use a button to easily turn portamento on off 37 Playing in Patch Mode Playing Arpeggios Arpeggiator The Arpeggiator provides for the play of the various notes in chords With the Arpeggiator you can play arpeggios that use the component notes of a chord just by pressing the chord In addition to normal arpeggios you can also accurately simulate rhythm guitar or strumming techniques depending on the Arpeggiator settings The Arpeggiator can in fact be used as a handy automatic arranger 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on 3 Play a chord on the keyboard The Fantom will play an arpeggio according to the notes forming the chord you have just voiced 4 To finish playing arpeggio
234. d Value For thinning data which incorporates rapid changes use higher settings If you don t want to thin that much data even though it is subject to rapid change use lower settings Time If you are thinning data that changes gradually over time use higher settings If you don t want to thin that much data even though the changes are gradual use lower settings Status Selects the type of data to be thinned Value ALL All following sequencer data types P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend Range If you set the Status parameter to P AFT or C C specify the range of data Specify the minimum value of the range at the left and the maximum value at the right HINT To thin all Polyphonic Aftertouch data set C 1 G9 To thin C4 Polyphonic Aftertouch data set C4 C4 To thin Polyphonic Aftertouch data from C3 to C4 set C3 CA To thin all Controller numbers set 0 127 To thin number 4 set 4 4 To thin numbers from 3 to 14 set 3 14 Channel MIDI Channel Selects MIDI channel of the data to be thinned To thin all sequencer data set this parameter to ALL To thin sequencer data of just one specific MIDI channel select that MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation 151 Editing Songs Editing Songs Swapping Two Phrase Tracks or
235. d bank 5 After switching the bank press gt to move the cursor within the list and press 4 or wW to select the patch 6 When you press 8 Select the patch will be selected and the Favorite List window will close Selecting Patches from the List You can display a list of patches and select a patch from that list 1 In the PATCH PLAY screen make sure that the cursor is located at the patch group or patch number 2 Press LIST The Patch List window appears USER 001 Generationxu CMB lc USER 002 Grand xu PNO Preset A USER 003 GlobalWarmup SPD Preset B USER 004 Chordbender TEK Face USER 005 My Orchestra ORC USER 006 VORTEX PLS Preset D USER 007 TempoMadness BTS Preset E USER 008 Stream Bell BEL oa USER 009 Blue Mutes DGT USER 010 UltraSmooth STR User Library Bank Select MSB LSB 687 660 Program Change eet 3 Press 44 or w to choose the patch 4 To switch patch groups press to move the cursor to the patch group tab and press or wW to select the patch group 5 After switching the patch group press gt to move the cursor within the list and press or w to select the patch 6 Press EXIT to close the Patch List window In the Patch List window you can press 7 Ctg to add a check mark v and switch to viewing a list organized by category Here you can select patches by category p 34 33 Patch Mode ing in Play P
236. dal connected to the CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jack p 184 126 Recording Songs This chapter explains the procedure for using the Fantom s sequencer to record a song HINT Normally when recording or playing back a song you will put the sound generator in Multitimbre mode The reason for this is that in this mode only the sound of the specified MIDI channel will be heard when you record while playing the keyboard of the Fantom and that when the song is played back the parts can independently play up to 16 different sounds Thus Multitimbre mode is suitable for recording and playing back a song that uses an ensemble of multiple instruments such as drums bass and piano Two Recording Methods You can use one of two methods of recording realtime recording or step recording Select the method that is appropriate for your situation Realtime Recording p 129 Realtime recording is the recording method in which your keyboard playing and controller operations are recorded just as you perform them Step Recording p 132 Step recording is the recording method in which you can input notes and rests one by one This method is suitable for inputting drums or bass with precise timing In addition to using notes you can also create a song by putting patterns together Before You Record a New Song Overview of the Recording Process 1 Select a sound Clear the internal memory 2 3 Specify the time signature of the
237. dal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc can be connected to this jack for use as a hold pedal Quick Start p 28 This can also be set so it supports the use of half pedaling techniques So after connecting an optional expression pedal EV 5 etc you can employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in performances in which piano tones are used p 184 DI a A DUI erica COAXIAL 9o DIGITAL OUT Connectors S P DIF OPTICAL S P DIF COAXIAL The Fantom features both optical and coaxial digital out connectors conforming to S P DIF These connectors output a digital audio signal stereo The output signal is identical to the signal that is output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks MEMD S P DIF is a digital interface format used for consumer digital audio devices CONTRAST CONTRAST Knob Adjusts the display contrast Quick Start p 5 MIDI THRU OUT MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive and transmit MIDI messages QUIPUT E one MONO PHONES Le NE INDIVIBUAL TIP ert RING COLD SLEEVE GND OUTPUT A MIX Jacks L MONO R These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo For mono output use the L jack Quick Start p 3 OUTPUT B Jacks L R These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo INDIVIDUAL 1 4 Jacks
238. ding drums or bass 22522525252 Grid quantize with Resolution 2225252222525 SHUFFLE Shuffle Quantize will be applied while recording Use this when you want to give the rhythm a shuffle or swing character 2225252252525 Shuffle quantize with Rate 75 D D DD D D Grid Resolution Make this setting when you are using Grid Quantize Specify the quantization interval in terms of a note value Select the shortest note value that will occur in the range to which Grid Quantize will be applied Value R 3 4 45 4 Ja d Strength Grid Quantize Strength Make this setting when you are using Grid Quantize It specifies the degree to which notes will be adjusted toward the timing intervals specified by the Grid Resolution parameter With a setting of 100 the notes will be corrected precisely to the timing of the Grid Resolution parameter As you lower this setting the note timing will be corrected to a lesser extent and with a setting of 0 the timing will not be adjusted at all Value 0 100 Shuffle Resolution When you are using Shuffle Quantize make this setting to specify the note value used for quantization Value F J Rate Shuffle Quantize Rate Make this setting when using Shuffle Quantize It specifies the degree to which the backbeat will be separated from the downbeat specified by the Shuffle Resolution parameter With a setting of 50 the backbeat will be exactly
239. e Chain file Copy file Date nn ee M eM ce Delete file eerte tete Nar eei teo eee 191 File name Loading a file Rename file ju Song file re cete teneam a de d cete o Pea leere Standard MIDI file iie nn etis Filter Type rhythm tone Filter Type tone esee tu e e e e i D cien ea Fine Tune multitimbre part ss 115 Fine tune patch reig nn een eene rede ite 60 Fine Tune performance part sss 100 Fine tune rhythm tone ss 79 Fine T ne rhythm wave tee Aa a ails 78 Fine CUE tone erret eter etre oe Cette rtt Fe ee etit 60 Bl ppy disk drive Scenes eee ancre 16 Format ases 2m Frequency cross modulation 59 78 EWD issues FXM Color rhythm wave sn 78 FXM Color tone FXM Depth rhythm wave FXM Depth tone 60 FXM Switch rhythm wave ss 78 EXM Switch tone 55 Rs ore deco nas o uie cry 59 Gate Me ornis idii i e i E ia 133 General Multitimbre System General MIDI General MIDI 2 H High Freg eee eee aei and High frequency 5 High Gain oreet n t eser EH uites eei eges a tapete Hold patch tee diete ee dine osea pene Hold performance Hold rhythm set HOLD PEDAL jack Hold Pedal Polarity sse Hold 1 multitimbre Hold 1 performance issus 104 l PING Jie essari EDEN 17 29 INDIVIDUAL ITA Jacks 1er cheer 18 Initialize Multitimbre sa
240. e C 1 UPPER Key Range Upper Keyboard Range Upper Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each zone Value LOWER G9 note When the Key Range p 59 is set for each individual tone in a patch sounds are produced in the range where the Key Range of each tone and the Key Range for the zone overlap Key range specified for Performance ee a ee iu Ei E L L J pi range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play vos If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value will be automatically modified to the same setting Control Bender Control Pitch Bend Switch For each zone specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Control Aftertouch Control Aftertouch Switch For each zone specify whether MIDI Aftertouch messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Control Modulation Control Modulation Switch For each zone specify whether MIDI Modulation messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Control Hold Pedal Control Hold Pedal Switch For each zone you can specify whether control messages from a pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL jacks will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Control Pedal 1 2 Control Pedal 1 2 Switch For each zone you can specify whether
241. e Merge operation has been executed the sequencer data will be combined into this track Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTN001 PTN100 The specified pattern 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation 148 Editing Songs Extracting and Moving a Part of Sequencer Data Extract This function extracts a specified sequencer data area from a phrase track or pattern and moves it to the same Song position of another phrase track or pattern Additionally just as with Standard MIDI File Format 0 when sequencer data from multiple MIDI channels is recorded on one track you can also assign one MIDI channel to a single phrase track 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or W to select Extract and then press 8 Select A message of EXTRACT Select source point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern from which you want to extract sequencer data 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern from which you want to extract sequencer data and press 8 Select A message of EXTRACT Select destination point appears 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the track or pattern to which the data will be moved and press 8 Select to specify it
242. e ae ien ree ien EE Delay Tite ueteri rere re top en Delete Delete file Track edit De Delete File 4i t tnt te t eee E e ei e redes Destination 1 4 aie riprendere rerba tesi inneren enean adno 55 176 Device ID Device ID number sis 183 DIGITAL OUT connector eee 18 Disk Utility 51 nt eate A ierit 187 Drop format ek eet estem aet rece rene re RU REES 181 E Effects ett e tete ee tb e se dts 170 Applying effects in Multitimbre mode ssss 170 Applying effects in Patch mode 165 Applying effects in Performance mode 170 CROTUS 2 en e arte hn VATE rt TATE le 23 M lti effects 2 eee eee detiene RH 23 M ltitimbre eet erint 170 Performance sise 170 Revetb Anne en Se ALL eM EN eh el UA Re 23 Rhythtn 5 eee ee EAE E 165 Turning effects on and off ssssssssssssssssee 165 Env Depth rhythm tone ee Env Depth tone sn Env Level 0 4 rhythm tone ss 80 81 Env Level 0 4 tone 5 ee ntt ertet nte rh ether 61 64 202 Env Level 1 3 rhythm tone ss 83 Env Level 1 3 tone ss 66 Eny Mode rhythm tone Re tette 74 Env Mode tone denied e nets 49 Env T1 V Sens rhythm tone es 80 82 Env T1 V Sens tone 61 63 65 Env T4 V Sens rhythm tone ss 80 81 83 Env T4 V Sens tone rss 61 63 66 Env Time 1 4 rhythm tone 80 82 83 61 64 66 Env Time 1 4 tone
243. e factory set condition Factory Reset Type of data to transmit First number of the transmit destination CEE J Source Destination PATCH a 12 2 Mill 661 687 PR R 66121901 Transmit source data Move the cursor to Source and use the following choices to specify the data that will be transmitted Last number of the transmit destination This is set automatically according to the number of transmit source data items a 6 If there is important data you ve created that s stored in the Fantom s internal memory all such data is discarded when a Factory Reset is performed If you want to keep the existing data save it on a disk p 189 or transmit it to an external MIDI device and save it p 194 1 Press MENU to open the Menu window Type of data to transmit Transmit source data PATCH PR A_E 001 128 2 Press or w to select Factory Reset and then press XP A C 001 8 Select RHYTHM PRST 001 016 The Factory Reset window appears XP A C 001 Factory Reset MULTITIMBRE PRST 01 16 This will clear all the internal memory contents PERFORMANCE PRST 01 64 and recall factory presets Depends on the Wave Expansion Board installed Type of Data to Transmit PATCH Patch RHYTHM Rhythm set Press Execute to initialize 3 Press 8 Execute to execute the Factory Reset When the display indica
244. e middle of a measure You must change the time signature at the beginning of a measure If the time signature of the beat track differs from the pattern beat p 128 setting the setting of the beat track will be used For example if a pattern with a 3 4 time signature is assigned in the middle of a 4 4 song the pattern will not be aligned correctly with the other phrase tracks To make this play back correctly insert a 3 4 beat change into the beat track To return the time signature to 4 4 insert a 4 4 beat change into the measure that follows the last measure of the pattern HINT If you want to change the time signature from a measure that is later than the end of the song or if it is ok to change the length of the song you will find it more convenient to use the track edit Insert Measure function p 145 1 Access the Microscope window for the beat track p 153 2 Press or w to move the cursor to the location at which you want to insert a beat change HINT If the location at which you want to insert the beat change is not shown in the display move the cursor to the appropriate location measure beat clock and specify the location at which the beat change is to be inserted 3 Press 1 Create to insert the beat change 4 The inserted beat change will have the default values so edit it as necessary HINT If you are not satisfied with the results of executing this operation press MENU and from the Me
245. e notes to be delayed MIDI messages other than note messages should be recorded in a phrase track Settings for the RPS Function You can assign a pattern to each note of the keyboard and specify how the pattern will be played These settings are made independently for each song and will be saved when you save the song in MRC Pro song format 1 Load the song for which you want to make RPS settings p 136 N Press MENU to access the Menu window w Use or w to select Song Edit and then press 8 Select The Song Edit screen appears O zd you select a song that is stored on disk a message of The Song is not Internal Song Load anyway for Song Edit will ask you for confirmation If you want to erase the song from the internal memory and load the new song press 7 OK If you decide not to erase the song from the internal memory press EXIT 4 Press 5 Setup The Song Setup window appears Song Name Pattern Name 5 Use or w to select RPS Setup and then press 8 Select The RPS Setup window appears Key Common Key Patt or ERO cwn k Trigger Quantize REAL i OFF Playback Mode Loop 1 SL EAN on Mute Group OFF TECTENTENTENETENTENEL ERT PER TER TEPETET RAAKAA AAA RAAKAA RAAKAA AA NAAALAALA In this window you can set various parameters related to the RPS function 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to each
246. e off when you release your finger from the button LATCH The button will switch on off each time you press it Zone 1 4 Realtime Control Button Zone Number 1 4 Specify the zone that will be controlled by each button amp B 31 The effect will apply only to the part that is connected to the zone you specify here Value 1 16 97 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance D Beam Switch D Beam Switch Switches the D Beam controller on off Value OFF ON Assign D Beam Assign Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller Value OFF The D Beam controller will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 LS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch NOTE Play the sound of the most recently pressed key OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller ARP SWITCH Switches the Arpeggiator on off ARP VAR Arpeggio Variation ARP ACCENT Arpeggio Accent Rate ARP SHFFLE Arpeggio Shuffle Rate ARP OCT
247. ear temporarily on top of the normal screens are called windows Various types of windows appears according to the situation Some display lists others allow you to make settings and still others ask you to confirm an operation 44 STOP Bet e Trans c t Gu Gu foo Internalsong ru Lan pu MADRE ationXU CMB Grand XU PNO Preset A E GlobalWarmup SPD Preset B USER 004 Chordbender TEK USER 005 My Orchestra ORC USER 006 VORTEX PLS Preset D USER 007 TempoMadness BTS PresetE USER 008 Stream Bell BEL Fe USER 009 Blue Mu DGT ELM USER 010 uitr th STR User Library eae E ND Bank Select MSB LSE 667 666 Program Change 661 Patch Rhythm E Ctg Prevu Press EXIT to close the window Some windows will close automatically when an operation is performed Viewing a List of Patches or Other Data LIST The Fantom can display sound lists and favorite lists You can select and audition patches from these lists and register your own favorite patches Use the following procedure to display these lists 1 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the object e g patch number for which you wish to view a list 2 Press LIST The desired list window appears according to the cursor location USER 001 Generatic os USER 002 Grand XV PNO Preset A USER 003 GlobalWarmup SPD Preset B USER 004 Chordbender TEK Panc USER 005 My Orchestra ORC USER
248. ected to the MIDI OUT connector Part Settings p 103 Receive Channel Specify the MIDI receive channel of the internal sound generator part External Sound Generator Settings This sets the MIDI receive channel Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part Part Information In Performance mode the reception status of MIDI messages that control various things can be viewed for each part This is useful when you want to check whether the sound generator is responding correctly to the keyboard or to operations from an external MIDI controller 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press or to select Part Information and then press 8 Select The Part Information window appears Modulation Part a OID QSeesescos000000 4 Press 8 Type The Type window appears Modulation 5 Press or wW to select the message that you want to check and then press 8 Select Modulation Modulation Information Breath Breath Information Foot Type Foot type Information Volume Volume Information Panpot Panpot Information Expression Expression Information Hold 1 Hold 1 Information Pitch Bend Pitch Bend Information Aftertouch Aftertouch Information Voices Voice Information The number of voices used Sys Control1 4 System Control 1 4 Information The MIDI message specified as the Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source parameter SYSTEM
249. ects inside the drive Handling Floppy Disks Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area To preserve their integrity please observe the following when handling floppy disks Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle Recommended temper ature range 10 to 50 C 50 to 122 F Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields such as those generated by loudspeakers Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk Protect tab Write writing permitted Protect writing prohibited The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive it may be difficult to remove the disk Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them and to protect them from dust dirt and other hazards By using a dirty or dust ridden disk you risk damaging the disk as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction How To Use This Manual
250. ecute to execute the operation Transpose the Key Transpose This transposes the pitch of notes within a specified area over a 99 semitone range Use this function to modulate from one key to another in a song or to transpose the entire song 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or wW to select Transpose and then press 8 Select A message of TRANSPOSE Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern that you want to transpose If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern that you want to transpose and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Transpose window appears Track Edit Transpose Track Measure 2061 for 1 Range fc Efes Bias 8 Channel aLL 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the phrase track s or pattern that is to be transposed Value ALL Phrase Tracks 1 16 TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTN001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modif
251. ed Rhythm patterns will be played according to the keys you press and the performance will be recorded on the part track you selected in step 3 11 When you finish recording press STOP PLAY The REC indicator will go dark Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part Part Information In Multitimbre mode the reception status of MIDI messages that control various things can be viewed for each part This is useful when you want to check whether the sound generator is responding correctly to the keyboard or to operations from an external MIDI controller 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press 44 or w to select Part Information and then press 8 Select The Part Information window appears Part Information Modulation D SA OOOO UN amp B SCION C COGOGO CO COO COO GO o Co Co Coon 4 Press 8 Type The Type Information window appears Breath Foot Type Uolume Panpot Expression Hold 1 Pitch Bend Aftertouch Voices 5 Press or W to select the message that you want to check and then press 8 Select Modulation Modulation Information Breath Breath Information Foot Type Foot type Information Volume Volume Information Panpot Panpot Information Expression Expression Information Hold 1 Hold 1 Information Pitch Bend Pitch Bend Information Aftertouch Aftertouch Information Voices Voice Information The num
252. ed for each Matrix Control and controlled simultaneously MEM In this manual Parameters that can be controlled using the Matrix Control are marked with a H Opening and Closing the Filter CUTOFF Changes the cutoff frequency RESONANCE Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Changing the Volume Pan and Pitch LEVEL Changes the volume level PAN Changes the pan PITCH Changes the pitch Changing How the Effects Are Applied DRY LEVEL Changes the volume of dry sounds CHORUS SEND Changes the amount of chorus REVERB SEND Changes the amount of reverb Applying LFO to Modulate Sounds LFO1 LFO2 PCH DEPTH Changes the vibrato depth LFO1 LFO2 TVF DEPTH Changes the wah depth LFO1 LFO2 TVA DEPTH Changes the tremolo depth LFO1 LFO2 PAN DEPTH Changes the effect that the LFO will have on pan LFO1 LFO2 RATE Changes the speed of the LFO cycles Changing the Pitch Envelope PIT ENV A TIME Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the pitch envelope PIT ENV D TIME Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3 parameters of the pitch envelope PIT ENV R TIME Changes the Env Time 4 parameter of the pitch envelope Changing the TVF Envelope TVF ENV A TIME Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the TVF envelope TVF ENV D TIME Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3 parameters of the TVF envelope TVF ENV R TIME Changes the Env Time 4 paramet
253. ed for one patch being played Number of Sounds Being Played x Number of tones Used by Patches Being Played x Number of Waves Used in the tones For example with a patch combining four tones each of which uses two Waves the actual number of sounds being played comes to 8 Also when playing in Multitimbre mode or Performance mode the number of sounds for each part is counted to obtain the total number of sounds for all parts How a Patch Sounds When the Fantom is requested to play more than 64 voices simultaneously currently sounding notes will be turned off to make room for newly requested notes The note with the lowest priority will be turned off first The order of priority is determined by the Voice Priority setting p 47 Voice Priority can be set either to LAST or LOUDEST When LAST is selected a newly requested note that exceeds the 64 voice limit will cause the first played of the currently sounding notes to be turned off When LOUDEST is selected the quietest of the currently sounding notes will be turned off Usually LAST is selected Note Priority in Multitimbre Performance Mode Since Multitimbre Performance mode is usually used to play an ensemble consisting of several patches it is important to decide which parts take priority Priority is specified by the Voice Reserve settings p 47 When a note within a patch needs to be turned off to make room for a new note the Voice Prio
254. edit D For details on how the parameters are grouped refer to Parameter list Sound Parameter List 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify MEM Some of the parameters have a MJ symbol This indicates that if you press LIST when setting one of these parameters the related window will appear For example if you press LIST at a parameter that requires you to specify a name the Name window will appear When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings screen a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen In such cases press W to scroll the screen downward Creating a Patch HINT If you have selected a screen for parameters that can be set for each tone first move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit and then press d or P to select a tone From the left this is tone 1 4 If you want to simultaneously edit the same parameter for multiple tones move the cursor to Tone Select in the upper part of the Patch Edit screen and assign a check mark v to each tone that you want to edit From the left these correspond to Tone Select 1 4 To switch a tone on off move the cursor to the Tone Switch in the upper part of the Patch Edit screen and make the desired settings From the left these are Tone Switches 1 4 Assigning a check mark W will turn the tone on and removing the check mark will turn it off 6 Turn t
255. edure for Rhythm Set Copy 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the copy destination rhythm set p 40 2 Access the Rhythm Edit screen p 69 3 Press 8 Copy The Rhythm Copy window appears Mode CITE Source Destination RHYTHM fuser fast p Temporary Rhythm R amp B Kit 1 R amp B Kit 1 4 Move the cursor to Mode and select the data that you wish to copy Three types of copy are available Rhythm Set Name Copy Rhythm Set Effects Copy and Rhythm Tone Copy You should select the one that is relevant to the type of data you wish to copy For details refer to Types of Rhythm Set Copy following section 5 Move the cursor to Source and select the copy source sound 6 Press 8 Execute to execute the Copy operation 7 Press EXIT to return to the Rhythm Edit screen Types of Rhythm Set Copy Rhythm Set Name Copy NAME The name of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected rhythm set Mode CET Source Destination RHYTHM user Host p Temporary Rhythm R amp B Kit 1 R amp B Kit 1 The Compare Function Rhythm Set Effects Copy MFX CHORUS REVERB The effect settings of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected rhythm set USER 2981 Temporary Rhythm R amp B Kit 1 R amp B Kit 1 Effect contents tha
256. een left and right For example if two tones are set to L and R respectively the panning of the two tones will alternate each time they are played Value L63 0 63R nore When any value from Type 2 10 is selected for the Structure parameter PATCH TMT in the Pan KF Rnd Pan Depth Alter Pan Depth parameter settings the output of tones 1 and 2 are joined in tone 2 and the output of tones 3 and 4 are joined in tone 4 For this reason tone 1 will follow the settings of tone 2 and tone 3 will follow the settings of tone 4 p 56 Env T1 V Sens TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVA envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 65 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Env T4 V Sens TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the Time 4 value of the TVA envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env Time KF TVA Envelope Time Key Follow Use this setting if you want the TVA envelope times Time 2 Time 4 to be affected by the keyboard location Based on the TVA envelope times
257. eforms Wave sens 59 Modifying Pitch Bitch ette erem dats don in tie dit e dte ie tha 60 Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF 62 Adjusting the Volume TVA nee 64 Modulating Sounds LEO ssn eet emer ette 66 Creating a Rhythm Set ne nere ordei deii net 69 How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings sens 69 Initializing Rhythm Set Settings Init ss 69 Copying Rhythm Set Settings Copy seen 70 Cautions When Selecting a Waveform ss 71 Saving Rhythm Sets You ve Created Write ses 72 Auditioning the Save Destination Rhythm Set Compare 73 Registering Favorite Rhythm Sets Favorite Sound 73 Functions of Rhythm Set Parameters sn 74 Settings Common to the Entire Rhythm Set General 74 Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn ss 75 Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller sss 76 Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set Effects MFX MEX Control Chorus Reverb 77 Changing How a Rhythm Tone Is Sounded WMT ccccsessessscsseseeeeneneesestsneneseseeceneseseseans 77 Modifying Pitch Pitch innen eH te bas nn Re il end ie eoe s 79 Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF 80 Adjusting the Volume TVA eee 82 Playing in Performance Mode 84 About the PERFORMANCE PLAY SCTeen eee 84 Displaying PERFORMANCE PLAY Screen 84 Selecting
258. el sin 172 Part decay time offset sss 101 116 Part Dry Send Level ornet painaen paee naaede re ahi ena 172 Part Information sse ennt 90 111 Part level multitimbre part ss 115 Part level performance part sss 100 Part Output Assign 172 Part Output MFX Select 172 Part output multi effects select 25 172 Part pan multitimbre part ssssssesssssesstssssstsessstsssstessssessnssssnssesnnsne 115 Part pan performance part ss 100 Part Reverb Send Level sse 172 Part Select Part vibrate delay orisni siiis si iiit 101 117 Part vibrate depth sse 101 117 Part Vibrate tate siennes tienne i na 101 117 Patch Cat gOty creme nt Re ren dee 35 How a patch is organized sss 20 irai 32 Patch parameters ss 47 Patch settings X Selecting a p tisi eiiie iia 32 Patch Bank multitimbre part ss 115 Patch Bank performance part 100 Patch C Tune Patch Category 47 Patch COMPAT nre ie Ris ete Lene Gea eene canes 46 Pateh Copy ioo etm Htm trRE 43 Patch Edit 42 Arpeggio wol Chorus 176 Controller sia ree ettet cancun pis 52 REC CUS ec oer EE E eM PRE ESC ER E se Te EIE erat General Wave s Patch E T ne s eerie cetero eere re ee tere eoe cxtasasacesh cesseavasaubcanenenact Patch firider s een be e rei e
259. elope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next cutoff frequency level is reached For example Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2 Value 0 127 i T1 T2 T3 T4 Frequency LO i Y Y L Cutoff e Time Au Gc B jo 9 Note on Note off UY T Time L Level HINT The envelopes appearing at the lower part of the TVF settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the TVF envelope while dotted lines are used for the TVA envelope This lets you compare the TVF and TVA envelopes while you make settings Adjusting the Volume TVA I IL E tO Kit 1 DRM Key JA 2 Wave Switch i 2 3 af p 73 OoOoOoOr lt lt il MFX wA MFX Control Rhythm Level 127 io 127 Chorus Level U Curve 1 Reverb Level U Sens 32 WMT Tone Pan jo Random Pan Depth a Pitch alternate Pan Depth e TUF Env T1 U Sens 8 Env T4 U Sens 8 1 L a AR a D For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 TVA Rhythm Level Rhythm Set Level Sets the volume of the rhythm set Value 0 127 HINT The volume levels of the Waves from which the rhythm tone is composed is set with the Wave Level parameter RHYTHM WMT p 79 Tone Level Rhythm Tone level S
260. en MIDI messages Program Change Bank Select are sent from an external MIDI device Set this to OFF if performances are not to be switched from an external MIDI device Value 1 16 OFF nore If only a program change is received and if the Performance Ctrl Ch parameter setting coincides with the MIDI receive channel of a part priority will be given to switching the performance Multitimbre Ctrl Ch Multitimbre Control Channel Multitimbre Ctrl Ch selects the MIDI receive channel used during switching of Multitinbres when MIDI messages Program Change Bank Select are sent from an external MIDI device Set this to OFF if Multitinbres are not to be switched from an external MIDI device Value 1 16 OFF von If only a program change is received and if the Multitimbre Ctrl Ch parameter setting coincides with the MIDI receive channel of a part priority will be given to switching the multitimbre Patch Rhythm Rx Ch Patch Rhythm Set Receive Channel Specifies the receive channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode Value 1 16 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Patch Rhythm Tx Ch Patch Rhythm Set Transmit Channel Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode If you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices turn this parameter OFF If you want the transmit channel to always match the Patch Rhythm Set Receive Channel set this parameter to Rx Ch Value
261. en without saving the display will indicate EDITED reminding you that the performance settings have been modified yon If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the display indicates EDITED your edited performance will be lost Initializing Performance Settings Init Initialize means to return the settings of the currently selected sound to a standard set of values or to the factory settings von The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected sound the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be affected If you wish to restore all of the Fantom s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 195 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and select the performance that you wish to initialize p 85 2 Access the Performance Edit screen p 91 3 Press 7 Init The Performance Initialize window appears Type Template MFX 4 Move the cursor to Type and select the initialization type 91 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Type Initialize Type There are three initialize methods Select either of them depending on the application DEFAULT Resets the currently selected performance in the Temporary memory to the standard values This is called a Initial Data Use this setting when you wish to create a sound from scratch PRESET Resets the currently selected performance in user memory to the factory
262. ences scitis be letra th nardus etu ea fiii ete ede aae 24 What lsa Song scie oett ie 24 What IS a Track nr nn ae ee Hee ferret 24 Songs and the Sound Generator Mode 25 How Phrase Tracks Parts and MIDI Channels Interact esee 25 Positions for Storing a SONg sise 26 Basic Operation of the Fantom sens 27 Switching the Sound Generator Mode MODE sss 27 Switching Screens from the Menu MENUT sus 28 Viewing a List of Patches or Other Data LISTT ss 28 About the 1 8 Buttons seen 28 Moving the Cursor treten UR SEU EU OE ger EO UIDERI MES e etes 29 Modifying Value 5 epe Re e eee Mibi ieri ne rete ta distent 29 Assigning A Name ue ese eee rne ederent enter eerte SES Eks le ENESTE 30 Playing in Patch Mode nus 31 About the PATCH PLAY Screen tede nte eed RD nn ren ree ero dens 31 Displaying PATCH PLAY Screen 31 Selecting a Patch en dee TR m beg di TR Ne e Eee ent there le 32 Selecting Favorite Patches Favorite Sound 33 Selecting Patches from the List ss 33 Auditioning Patches Phrase Preview sun 34 Selecting Patches by Category Patch Finder 34 Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift ss 35 Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps Transpose sess 36 Selecting the Tones That Will Sound Tone On Off sse ene nennen 36 Playing Single Notes MONO 37 Creating Smooth Pitch Ch
263. er Library ControlCh OFF 3 120 USER 01 FANTOM Temp 4 4 STOP Volume Pan Tr nit 100 S m n 100 m 5 H 212 100 0 oo 35 100 m 0 oo 4 100 m 0 H 515 1 Grand XU 166 m 0 H n 6 PR R 001 Grand XU 166 m 0 oo 217 PR A 991 Grand XU 100 5 H Favorite Sound Bank 1 Grooved AU Steel GlobalW WestEn Grand Mood Ri Rhythm R amp B Kit EEGI Gt 1 armup jdBs v ngz Sync 1 Additional Functions of the Fantom and Undo and Redo in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen See p 109 in the Owner s Manual After editing Patch or Volume settings in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen you can revert to the original value Undo or set the edited value again Redo To revert to the original value hold down JUMP and press INC or DEC To set the edited value again hold down JUMP again and press INC or DEC Copy between performances and multitimbres See pp 92 113 in the Owner s Manual In the Performance Copy window and Multitimbre Copy window an All setting has been added to Mode When you use this mode all name effect and part settings can be copied between performances and multitimbres New type added to performance and multitimbre initialize See pp 91 112 in the Owner s Manual In the Performance Initialize window and Multitimbre Initialize window a new
264. er la t te de la vis Pour retirer une vis tourner le tournevis dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d une montre Pour serrer les vis tourner le tournevis dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre desserrer resserrer Pour installer les cartes d expansion Wave retirer uniquement les vis mentionn es Assurez vous que les vis retir es ne tombent pas dans le Fantom Ne pas laisser le panneau de protection avant detache S assurer de l avoir rattacher apres avoir installe le disque dur Ne pas toucher aux circuits imprim s ou aux connecteurs Faites attention de ne pas vous couper sur l ouverture d installation de la carte Ne jamais forcer lors de l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s Si la carte s ajuste mal au premier essai enlevez la carte et recommencez l installation Quand l installation de la carte de circuits imprim s est termin e rev rifiez si tout est bien install Toujours teindre et d brancher l appareil avant de commencer l installation de la carte SR JV80 SRX series Quick Start p 3 4 N installez que les cartes de circuits imprimes sp cifi es SR JV80 SRX series Enlevez seulement les vis indiqu es p 198 Installation d une carte d expansion Wave Avant d installer la carte d expansion Wave retirez le panneau inf rieur Installez les cartes SR JV80 dans la fente d expansion A EXP AJ installez les cartes SRX dans les fentes d expansion B et C EX
265. er numbers 1 31 33 95 D For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch TEMPO Tempo PTN ACCENT Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate PTN SHFFLE Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate Switch Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Button Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the amp B G3 buttons Value OFF The realtime control button will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 D For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower TRNS UP Raises the key range in semitone steps up to 6 semitones higher TRNS DOWN Lowers the key range in semitone steps up to 5 semitones lower TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you press the button PTN HOLD Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Rhythm pattern playback Mode 1 4 Realtime Control Button Mode 1 4 Specify how the amp B G3 buttons are to operate Value MOMENTARY The button will be on only while you are pressing holding it a
266. er of the TVF envelope Creating a Patch Changing the TVF Envelope TVA ENV A TIME Changes the Env Time 1 parameter of the TVA envelope TVA ENV D TIME Changes the Env Time 2 and Env Time 3 parameters of the TVA envelope TVA ENV R TIME Changes the Env Time 4 parameter of the TVA envelope Splitting Tones That Are Played TMT HINT If the Matrix Control is used to split tones set the TMT Vel Control parameter PATCH TMT to OFF and the TMT Control Sw parameter PATCH Matrix Ctrl to ON p 56 p 58 If the Matrix Control is used to split tones we recommend setting the Matrix Control Sens to 63 Selecting a lower value may prevent switching of the tones Furthermore if you want to reverse the effect set the value to 63 If you want to use matrix control to switch smoothly between tones use the Key Fade Lower and Key Fade Upper parameters PATCH TMT p 58 The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the tones Changing the Depth of Frequency Modulation for FXM FXM DEPTH Changing Specific Multi Effects Parameters MFX CTRL 1 4 Change the parameter that was specified by MFX Control 1 4 Assign parameter von No effects are available even with the Matrix Control when the settings are such that no multi effects are applied 55 Creating a Patch Sns 1 4 Matrix Control Sens 1 4 Sets the amount of the Matrix Control s effect that i
267. erforming with the RPS Function from an External MIDI Keyboard You can use the keys of an external MIDI keyboard to play patterns For example you could refrain from assigning patterns to the keys of the Fantom E1 G7 but assign pattern to the remaining keys note numbers This would let you use an external MIDI keyboard to control pattern playback and use the keyboard of the Fantom to play normally 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the Fantom s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI keyboard 2 Access the PLAY screen of the mode in which you want to perform 3 Press MENU to access the Menu window 4 Use or to select System Edit and then press 8 Select The System Edit screen appears 5 Press 1 A or 2 V to select the MIDI tab A screen like the following appears Sustem Edit General MIDI sl Performance Ctr Ch 16 r Multitimbre Ctr1 Ch OFF Patch Rhythm Rx Ch 1 Controller Patch Rhythm Tx Ch Rx Ch EG Remote Keyboard Sw OFF Exclusive Protect oFF Preview Device ID Ka Scale Tune Rx Program Change ON 700 Ry Bank Select OH Wave Expansion Board Version R SR JUSO 09 Sessn 1 00 B SRX O01DunamicDrm C SRX O2ConcertPno a vy write J Init 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Remote Keyboard Sw and press INC to turn it ON 7 Press EXIT to return to the PLAY screen With this setti
268. ernal Song 3 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation When the operation has been completed the display will briefly indicate Complete 127 Recording Songs Recording Songs Specify the Time Signature Before you record a new song you must specify the time signature However a time signature of 4 4 is automatically specified when you perform the Song Initialize operation or when the power is turned on so you will need to make this setting only if you want to record a new song in a different time signature 1 Access the Song Edit screen p 136 2 Press 7 Micro Edit The Microscope window appears 3 Move the cursor to Track and select BEAT beat track The Microscope window for the beat track appears Track 1 81 000 gt Beat Change 4 4 create Erase Move Copy Place View Test 4 Move the cursor to Beat Change and specify the time signature p If you want to change time signatures midway through the song refer to Changing the Time Signature Midway Through the Song p 158 When you are recording a pattern and want the pattern to have a time signature other than 4 4 you will need to set the time signature of the pattern separately from the time signature of the song Refer to Specifying the time signature of a pattern below 128 Specifying the Time Signature of a Pattern Each pattern has a Pattern Beat setti
269. esesescesescseeceenesesesnsensseececenesesesnananes 156 Moving Sequencer Data Move ss 157 Copying Sequencer Data Copy ss 157 Changing the Tempo Midway Through the Song 158 Changing the Time Signature Midway Through the Song 158 Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function 159 Before You Use the RPS Function ete Gee dre meten e etie a tennis 159 R cord a Patterns ato ne eniiteetaeiti tiger item eng et 159 Settings for the RPS Function sm eee eter eene e HR Ree hne S tees 159 Using the RPS Function While You Perform sse een 160 Performing with the RPS Function from an External MIDI Keyboard 161 Recording a Performance Using the RPS Function 161 Modifying the Sound in Real Time ss 162 Waving Your Hand Over the D Beam to Modify the Sound D Beam Controller 162 Making Settings for the D Beam Controller 162 Using Knobs or Buttons to Modify the Sound Realtime Controller ss 163 Making Realtime Controller Settings 163 Using a Pedal to Modify the Sound Control Pedal sse 164 Making Control Pedal Settings ss 164 Adding EReCIS diner tte tice 165 Turning Effects On and Off uires eere eet prime dg intenses 165 Applying Effects in Patch Mode sn 165 Specifying How the Sound Will Be Output Effects 165 Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters
270. eter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Value 3 3 Key Trigger Arpeggio Key Trigger Turn this ON if you want the arpeggio to start at the moment that you press the key If you want the arpeggio to start playing in synchronization with the sequencer or rhythm pattern turn this OFF Value OFF ON Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller Patel J Ed onu ey Generationxy CMB Tone Switch iy 2 Slv 4v Tone Select iv 2 3 4 General Knob Arpeggio 1 amp e EDEN 7 CUTOFF BREATH Effects Switch MFX a t MFX Control Assign PORTAMENTO MONO POLY Mode LATCH LATCH Chorus Reverb DBeam yO Switeh on Range Lower 6 Assign amp Foor TYPE Range Upper 127 Polarity STANDARD D For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 Knob Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Knob Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the HO knobs Value OFF The realtime control knob will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 D For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH A
271. ets the volume of the rhythm tone Use this parameter to adjust the volume balance between rhythm tones Value 0 127 HINT The volume levels of the Waves from which the rhythm tone is composed is set with the WMT1 4 Wave Level parameter RHYTHM WMT p 79 Level V Curve TVA Level Velocity Curve You can select from seven curves that determine how keyboard playing strength will affect the volume If you do not want the volume of the rhythm tone to be affected by the force with which you press the key select FIXED Value FIXED 1 7 LUUCCULE Level V Sens TVA Level Velocity Sensitivity Set this when you want the volume of the rhythm tone to change depending on the force with which you press the keys Set this to a positive value to have the changes in rhythm tone volume increase the more forcefully the keys are played to make the tone play more softly as you play harder set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Tone Pan Rhythm Tone Pan Sets the pan for the rhythm tone L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R HINT Set the Pan for Waves comprising the rhythm tones with the Wave Pan parameter RHYTHM WMT p 78 Random Pan Depth Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change randomly each time you press a key Higher settings will produce a greater amount of change Value 0 63 Alternate Pan Depth This setting causes panning to be alternated
272. etting p 48 The ultimate Velocity Sensitivity Offset value is the sum of the part s and the patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offsets Accordingly if the patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offset parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change in the part s Velocity Sensitivity Offset even when this is set to a positive value Key Fade Lower Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower This determines what will happen to the part s level when a note that s lower than the part s specified keyboard range is played Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Key Range Lower Part Keyboard Range Lower Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each part Value C 1 UPPER 102 Key Range Upper Part Keyboard Range Upper Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each part Value LOWER G9 yore When the Key Range p 58 is set for each individual tone ina patch sounds are produced in the range where the Key Range of each tone and the Key Range for the part overlap Key range specified for Performance r 1 L L J range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play nore If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value w
273. etune LFOL TVA depth siens LEOTTVE depth zitieren ee nete aa Kaaa LFO1 waveform LFO2 delay time LFO2 delay time key follow L FO2 fade mode nent Re ette rette heat eles LEO fad time etre teer eee oret eed ner aerae LFO2 key trigger E LEO OFC T LEO Path depth sandrine LFO2 pitch depth ss LEOZ rate ee teta tnnt e Miete ee tte M pe EE RS LEO rate det ne n nan epe eerte ene PEE dee ferait LFO2 TVA depth eee tte ed Us 68 LEQ2 TVE depth teu ee p eut 68 EFO2 Wav6efOFtti cente pene m qi ra e eee e e e eed eet eges 66 BIST 17 28 Load Song File 136 Load Song File Track 188 Load Sound File Xfer sn 189 Local Switeh 25 R ge estne Locate position LOOP Loop play a LOOP B1831 ai M M Loop recording Loop waveform DIOWSBEI q iit ette etie ta e c edens o dio Low frequency OW Gain m S M M Master Key Shift ss 179 Master Level ahisi Mn ep trea eter irri oiii 179 Master Tine P 179 Matrix control ins 54 Matrix control destination 1 4 55 Matrix control sens 1 4 56 Matrix control source 1 4 54 Matrix Ctrl Memory Ico Rd Preset memory ins 22 System memory seia eteri a a 22 Temporary area ss 22 User memory Wave expansion board sse 22 MEINE ER TR Pietre Dee err Ur chatte A 17 28 Menu Menu window Merge ui Metronome Mode
274. eyboard 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Combining Two Phrase Tracks or Patterns into One Merge The sequencer data of two phrase tracks or patterns will be combined into one 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or W to select Merge and then press 8 Select A message of MERGE Select source point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the track or pattern that you want to merge and press 8 Select to specify it A message of MERGE Select destination point appears 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the merge destination track or pattern and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Merge window appears Track gt Track TRK 2 6 Checkthe tracks or patterns that you want to merge Should you need to make a change use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and either turn the VALUE dial or use INC or DEC to alter the setting Track Source Track Check modify the phrase track or pattern that is to be merged After the Merge operation has been executed no sequencer data will remain in this track Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTN001 PTN100 The specified pattern Track Destination Track Check modify the merge destination phrase track or pattern After th
275. f a song you can turn off the specific part This allows you to turn off the melody part for karaoke applications or for practicing the muted part 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the Mu area of the part that you want to mute 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to assign a check mark v M 1 4 4 STOP USER 01 FANTOM Temp Part Ch So Mu Patch Volume Pan Wiis AAR PRST 011 XU Pop Kit 100 es 6 a CS JE PR A 991 Grand XU 100 m 5 r 2 2 M PR B 048 KU Ac Bass 1666 r H PR A 001 Grand XU 166 m 8 mr afa PR A 001 Grand XU 100 m 8 or 5 s PR R 001 Grand XU 100 m 8 or 6 e PR A 991 Grand XU 16s 0 Hn 7 7 PR R 8001 Grand XU 100 m 8 om Favorite Sound Bank1 Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient Bend ac Soaring rp pet SELS hord Hrns2 When a song is played back the parts with a check mark will not play back MEMD Part Mute does not turn off the MIDI receive switch rather it sets the volume to the minimum setting to silence the sound Therefore MIDI messages are still received Assigning a Different Patch to a Part If you do not like the patch that is assigned to each part you can easily switch patches 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the Patch area of the part whose patch you want to change Patch
276. f the Delay Mode parameter is set to OFF N or OFF D the time from when the key is released until when the tone will sound Value 0 127 Note Tone Delay Time specifies the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo that specifies the elapsed time until the tone is sounded Patch Tempo is synchronized with the tempo set in a sequencer Example For a tempo of 120 120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute 60 seconds Setting Delay time d half note 1 second 60 60 1 second d quarter note 0 5 seconds 60 120 0 5 seconds d eighth note 0 25 seconds 60 240 0 25 seconds Rx Bender Tone Receive Pitch Bend Switch For each tone specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Creating a Patch Rx Expression Tone Receive Expression Sw itch For each tone specify whether MIDI Expression messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx Hold 1 Tone Receive Hold 1 Switch For each tone specify whether MIDI Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON ore If NO SUS is selected for Env Mode parameter PATCH General this setting will have no effect Rx Pan Mode For each tone specify how pan messages will be received Value CONT Whenever Pan messages are received the stereo position of the tone will be changed K ON The pan of the tone will be changed onl
277. f the LPF2 even with the same TVF Envelope settings yon If you set LPF2 or LPF3 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored Creating a Rhythm Set Cutoff Frequency Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components Value 0 127 With LPF LPF2 LPF3 selected for the Filter Type parameter lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a tone s upper harmonics for a more rounded warmer sound Higher settings make it sound brighter If BPF is selected harmonic components will change depending on the TVF Cutoff Frequency setting This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds With HPF selected higher Cutoff Frequency settings will reduce lower harmonics to emphasize just the brighter components of the sound With PKG selected the harmonics to be emphasized will vary depending on Cutoff Frequency setting Cutoff V Curve Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how keyboard playing dynamics velocity influence the cutoff frequency Set this to FIXED when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed Value FIXED 1 7 ZU Cg Cutoff V Sens Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be applied as a result of changes in playing velocity If you want strongly played notes to r
278. ff RPS The Mode window appears chorus CHO Turns Loop Play on off LOOP and reverb REV on and off ng Patch rhythm set select switch MULTITIMERE Determines whether you will be selecting patches or rhythm sets PERFORMANCE BEST Press or w to select a PATCH and then press 8 Select You will enter Patch mode and the PATCH PLAY screen appears Hew Song M 1 Bet e Trans c t aim cay ee Internalsona PATCH User Library Ch Tx 1 Rx 1 d 120 USER Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock 4 4 STOP Favorite Sound Banki Glues Ha Tight Br AU Trom LegatoJ Soaring rp lass bone upite JHrns2 Indicates the group of the selected patch Indicates the MIDI transmit channel Tx Ch and receive channel Rx Ch Indicates sets the tempo at which the song Arpeggio or Bad pattern is played PATCH User Library Chi Tx 1 Rx 1 USER Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock PE 120 Tone Sw DEC Indicates the tone On Off status Indicates selects the group number and name of the selected patch Indicates selects the patch category Selects whether the patch category will be locked This indicates the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller and the response status of the D Beam controller Displays the type of effect used D Beam MFX LoFi C
279. ff will be indicated by a dashed outline in the Effects setting screen 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to specify how the sound will be output 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 45 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the previous screen 165 Adding Effects Adding Effects Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters When the Patch Output Assign is Set to Something Other than TONE 166 Adding Effects When the Patch Output Assign is Set to TONE Effects 1 OUT FUT TOHE OUTPUT on no 127 AO 127 1 HEAT Bg 5e a 28 Lori ComP 54 h SH A MR De ad g EO Reverb 3 127 A SRU Hal Ae 167 RN Adding Effects Adding Effects Tone Select Select the tone for which you want to make settings Value 1 4 MEMD This parameter is Rhythm Key Select when a rhythm set is being selected You can select the rhythm tone A0 C8 for which you want to make settings Patch Output Assign Specifies for each patch how the direct sound will be output Value MFX Output in stereo through multi effects You can also apply chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through m
280. fferent performance parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters Settings Common to the Entire Performance General EX i vai ice Et t Bn General test End Bs SBS Parti Arpeggio Performance Name Fantasm Seq Tempo Override OH Overriding Tempo 138 Rhythm Ptn Controller Zone Part MIDI Effects For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 General Performance Name You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the performance Value space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt A joe D For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 You can assign a name to the performance of up to 12 characters Seq Tempo Override Sequencer Tempo Override Specify whether the sequencer tempo will change ON or will not change OFF when you switch performances The tempo following the change is specified by the Overriding Tempo parameter If after switching performances you want the arpeggiator and rhythm pattern settings specified for that performance to be played at an appropriate tempo turn this ON Value OFF ON Overriding Tempo If you want the sequencer tempo to change when you switch performances specify the tempo that will follow this change This setting is valid when the Seq Tempo Override parameter is ON Value 20 250 Creating a Performa
281. ftertouch TEMPO Tempo ARP VAR Arpeggio Variation ARP ACCENT Arpeggio Accent Rate ARP SHFFLE Arpeggio Shuffle Rate ARP OCTAVE Arpeggio Octave Range Switch Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Button Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the amp B G3 buttons Value OFF The realtime control button will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 D For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List Creating a Patch BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower TRNS UP Raises the key range in semitone steps up to 6 semitones higher TRNS DOWN Lowers the key range in semitone steps up to 5 semitones lower TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you press the button MONO POLY Pressed to toggle between polyphonic POLY and monophonic MONO play of a patch ARP HOLD Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Mode 1 4 Realtime Control Button Mode 1 4 Specify how the amp B G3 buttons are to operate Value MOMENTARY The button will be on only while you are pressing holding it and will
282. function calculates the playback time of a song or allows you to modify the tempo track data so that the song will play back in a specified time 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or W to select Time Fit and then press 8 Select A message of TIME FIT Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure for which you want to measure adjust the playback time 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure for which you want to measure adjust the playback time and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Time Fit window appears Track Edit Time Fit Measure for Time oo t ee s e2 e an jou 62 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Measure for Edit Range Measure the playback time or check modify the range of measures that are to be adjusted If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Time The current playback time will be displayed at the right of lt Set the playback time at the left of lt From left to right the time display indicates hours minutes seconds 7 When you have finished mak
283. g These settings are saved when you save the song to disk Basic Procedure 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song for which you are going to make settings p 136 Press 5 Setup The Song Setup window appears Song Name Pattern Name Locate Loop RPS Setup Use or w to select the parameter that you want to set and then press 8 Select A window for the selected parameter setting appears Setthe parameter TS Details on how to set each parameter are given below For details on settings for the RPS function refer to Settings for the RPS Function p 159 When you have finished making settings press EXIT to return to the Song Edit screen If you want to save the settings you made press 2 Save to save the song to disk p 135 Assigning a Name to a Song Song Name You can assign a song name to a song or edit the song name This song name is independent of the file name assigned when saving a song to disk Although you are not required to assign a song name you can assign one using up to 15 characters and you may find it a convenient way to store a title or memo that will help you organize your songs note N Some commercially available Standard MIDI Files contain copyright data It is not possible to assign or modify the song name for such songs Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song whose song name you want to assign p
284. ge Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 49 set this to PAT Value 0 127 PAT nore For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this setting is ignored Cutoff Offset Part Cutoff Offset Adjusts the cutoff frequency for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 yon Patches also have a Cutoff Offset setting p 47 The final Cutoff frequency value is the sum of the tone Cutoff Frequency value and the patch and part Cutoff Frequency Offset values If the tone s cutoff frequency is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Cutoff Frequency Offset to a positive value Resonance Offset Part Resonance Offset Adjusts the Resonance for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 ne Patches also have a Resonance Offset setting p 47 The final Resonance value is the sum of the tone Resonance value and the patch and part Resonance Offset values If the tone s resonance is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the resonance offset to a positive value Attack Time Offset Part Attack Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Attack Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 NE Patches also contain the Attack Time Offset setting p 48 The final TVA Envelope attack ti
285. gs and less with lower settings Value 64 63 Vibrate Delay Part Vibrate Delay For each part this adjusts the time delay until the vibrato pitch modulation effect begins Higher settings will produce a longer delay time before vibrato begins while lower settings produce a shorter time Value 64 63 Octave Shift Part Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Value 3 3 von Note that when a rhythm set is assigned to a part if the Octave Shift parameter is set the rhythm tone that is played also changes Vel Sens Offset Part Velocity Sensitivity Offset This changes the volume and cutoff frequency for each part according to the velocity with which the keys are pressed If you want strongly played notes to raise the volume cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the volume cutoff frequency use negative settings Set Velocity Sensitivity to 0 when you want sounds played at a fixed volume and cutoff frequency regardless of the force with which the keys are played Value 63 63 O a also contain a Velocity Sensitivity Offset setting p 48 The ultimate Velocity Sensitivity Offset value is the sum of the part s and the patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offsets Accordingly if the patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offset parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change
286. hat is connected to the part whose sound you want to play 3 Make sure the PERFORMANCE EDIT screen is displayed and press 1 A or 2 to select the Rhythm Ptn tab A screen like the one shown below appears Performance Ed ito Fantasm General Rhythm Ptn Mest End Bs SBS Part 5 Switch ON Ai PD Hold ON Rhythm Ptn Style s 5 Controller Accent Rate Zone Shuffle Rate 5e Shuffle Resolution F Part Keyboard Velocity 127 MIDI Note Assign F6 Effects Key Trigger OFF Sz Zone Number a write J Init Copy Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Zone Number mop Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the zone that is connected to the part that is to play the rhythm pattern 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Note Assign 7 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the lowest key note name of the range that is to play the rhythm pattern MEMO 9 T The rhythm pattern can be played in a one octave range starting from the key you specify here Jg 8 Next specify the range of the zone Press 2 to select c the Zone tab A screen like the one shown below appears o JPerfori E ice Ec t Fantasm 2 General Zone West End Bs SBS Parti c Bree rransni comet 2 5 4 ransmit Cha
287. he Song Name window p 137 6 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation nore If you assign a file name that is identical to a file name that already exists on the disk and attempt to save the file a message of File Already Exists Over Write OK will appear To overwrite the old file and save the new press 7 OK If you wish to abort the saving operation press 8 Cancel If you attempt to save data on a disk that has not been formatted on the Fantom a message of Unformatted Disk will appear Please format the disk on the Fantom p 191 Copying a File to Another Name Copy Here s how to copy a file to one having a different name von Master disks of Standard MIDI Files releases etc from Roland cannot be copied 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press or to select the file that you want to copy 3 Press 3 Copy The Copy File window appears DEMO 881 SUG DEMO G61 2SUG ABCLEFGHI JKLMNOP RS TUVWXYZ 90123456789 H 7 amp C a _ 0 Insert Delete 4 Modify the file name and press 8 OK D For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 The Copy File window appears from DEMO 001 SVQ to DEMO_905 SUG 5 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation 190 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Renaming a File Rename This function changes the name of a file voe File
288. he VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want If you ve selected two or more tones your editing will modify the parameter values for all selected tones by the same amount 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to complete a patch 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 45 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY screen If you return to the PATCH PLAY screen without saving the display will indicate EDITED reminding you that the patch settings have been modified von If you turn off the power or select a different sound while the display indicates EDITED your edited patch will be lost Initializing Patch Settings Init Initialize means to return the settings of the currently selected sound to a standard set of values or to the factory settings yon The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected sound the sounds that are stored in user memory will not be affected If you wish to restore all of the Fantom s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 195 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch that you wish to initialize p 32 2 Access the Patch Edit screen p 42 3 Press 7 Init The Patch Initialize window appears Type Template 4 Move the cursor to Type and select the initialization type Type Initialize Type There are three i
289. hen gradually begin to decrease the effect high more Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Delay Time Fade Time low less Fade Mode ON gt Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is played Apply the LFO gradually after the key is released A Delay high more _Time Fade Time Pitch i Cutoff Frequency i i Depth Level i Pan A Note Note on off low less Fade Mode OFF Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is released until the LFO begins to be applied Apply the LFO from when the key is pressed until it is released and gradually begin to decrease the effect when the key is released high more Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Pan low less v Noteon Note off Fade Mode OFF gt Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is released Creating a Rhythm With the Fantom you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures
290. hich the song will be saved press 8 Select The Save window appears SONG_866 SU0 MEMD The window title will depend on the format in which the song is being saved Assign a file name up to 8 characters Press 5 Name and use the Name window that appears to assign a file name LIN For details on assigning a name refer to Assigning a Name p 30 If a song name has already been assigned to the song the first eight characters of the song name will be used to automatically assign a file name If no song name has been assigned SONG 000 will be assigned automatically Recording Songs If you want to view a list of the files stored on disk press 6 List To select a file name from this list move the cursor to the desired file and press 8 Select File Name and Song Name MRC Pro songs and Standard MIDI Files have a song name in addition to a file name The file name is used to distinguish between files and must be assigned when you save a file It will help you manage songs if you use the file name to distinguish between types of song and use the song name to assign a title E Use the Song Name window to assign a song name p 137 8 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation von If you assign a file name that is the same as the name of a file already existing on the disk then attempt to save it a message of File Already Exists Over Write
291. hidden This will be displayed if a check mark v is assigned and will not be displayed if the check mark is removed If you press 5 All Off no files will be displayed in the file list If you press 6 All On all types of files will be displayed in the file list 5 Press EXIT to close the View Switch window Loading a File from Disk into the Fantom Load This function loads a song on disk into the internal memory As the Fantom loads MRC Pro songs as well as Standard MIDI Files and S MRC format songs it copes efficiently with different song data And with MRC Pro songs a Phrase track or Pattern can be specified for loading A complete song can therefore be created by combining different MRC Pro song data Besides songs you can also load data files or chain files into internal memory yon When a file is loaded internal memory will be rewritten If internal memory contains important data you must save it to disk before you load other data 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press or to select the file that you want to load 3 Press 1 Load The Load File window appears Load Song File DEMO 881 SUGQ Altered State The title of the window will depend on the file being loaded 4 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation Loading Individual Tracks Patterns of Song Data If you have selected a song file extension SVQ or Standard MIDI File exte
292. hm Ptn General West End Bs SBS Parti Arpeggio Performance Name Seq Tempo Override Overriding Tempo Fantasm ON 136 Controller Zone a X IS J Init Copy 4 Press 6 Write The Performance Write window appears USER 01 Fantasm USER 02 All That USER 03 Trippin USER 04 FunkRock Set USER 05 RhuthmCluSet USER 06 Relaxation USER 07 Romance USER 08 Soaring Saws USER 09 VORTEX USER 10 BeatRockSet Save destination performance Fantasm 5 Press 4 or W to specify the save destination performance 6 Press 8 Execute The display will indicate Are you sure 7 Press 8 OK to execute the save operation To cancel the operation press EXIT When Changing the Settings for the Patch or Rhythm Set Assigned to a Part in a Performance After changing the settings for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part in a performance if you then try to save the performance without first saving the changes in the settings the following message appears Edited patch or rhythm will be discard Sure If you do not need to keep the patch or rhythm set settings press 8 Execute to save the performance If you want to keep the patch or rhythm set settings press 7 Write Part to access the Performance Part Write window Performance Part Write West End Bs USER 076 Sumphonidquex USER 077 TS Brass USER 078 Technog
293. horus for each tone Value 0 127 Q Tone Reverb Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone Value 0 127 MFX Type Multi Effects Type Use this parameter to select from among the 90 available multi effects For details on multi effects parameters refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List Value 0 Through 90 Q MFX Dry Send Level Multi Effects Dry Send Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the multi effects Value 0 127 Q MFX Chorus Send Level Multi Effects Chorus Send Level Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through multi effects If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 168 Adding Effects MFX Reverb Send Level Multi Effects Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through multi effects If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 QD MFX Output Assign Multi Effects Output Assign Adjusts the output destination of the sound that has passed through the multi effects Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo MEMD If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 Chorus Type Selects either chorus or delay Value 0 Off Neither chorus or dela
294. i total of 32 multitimbres 1 In the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen make sure that the cursor is located at the multitimbre group or multitimbre USER number This is the group inside the Fantom which can be rewritten 2 Press LIST performances you yourself create can be stored in this group The The Multitimbre List window appears Fantom contains 16 preset multitimbres 3 PRST Preset USER 01 FANTOM Temp User Library USER 02 Techno elc NA A s Preset USER 03 House This is the group inside the Fantom which cannot be rewritten IEEE ustn 04 Hip Hop o However you may modify the settings of the currently selected eria ccs 8 multitimbre and then store the modified multitimbre in User rico hos io E ER ues D memory The Fantom contains 16 preset multitimbres ne ue D Bank Select MSB LSB 665 666 3 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 ProgramChange 861 Multitimbre group iti D Multitimbre number 3 Press or W to choose the multitimbre pr criri ent PLAY BEEN 4 To switch the multitimbre group press 4 to move the a dus me lh axo aam e0 internaisons cursor to the multitimbre group tab and press or wW to amp User I brary Control Ch OFF 42 120 USER E FANTOM Temp select the multitimbre group 5 After switching the multitimbre group press to move the cursor within the list and press or w to select the PartCh So Mu Patch Volu
295. ia aiaiai Solo Part Select multitimbre Solo Part Select performance SONG ae nn ma an reiten ee re ae ci 24 Editing Song ss 136 File name eerte cintre dece 190 Loading Song ss 136 Playing back a song 108 122 Recording song ss 127 Saving a song on disk sssssssssssseeee 135 189 Song initialize sein eee directe ded 127 Song name uarie M Song LIS en Aer Ei ed nn iter rene nn net pers Song Initialize Song S tUP site rm ae eee in e ep e tee dead Sound generator section ssssssssssssssseneneneee 19 208 Source TA ao dansante 54 175 Standard MIDI file sun 26 SHEP recording ieu ose ene a e eie RR cerei neces eer 132 Step Recording Standby oM Step time STOP PLAY Stretch PUN cete nn T Stretch tune d pth eie oek nit eet rnnt eene Structure 1 amp 2 Structure 3 amp 4 Structure Type 1 amp 2 Structure Type 3 amp 4 Style patch itte oie etes nee etre enr Style performance Style rhythm set 1 RE eg hte SWILCM eects acetic och ER Switch patch En en nn nn aut ee ee e ces Switch performance ss 95 96 98 Switch rhythm set Sync Mode en ea er iie eoe a teres etie hab eue eta Sync Output iet metere entered ttti dette Sync output switch a Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source System Control System control 1 4 source sssssssssssseeeenenenetenenee 184 System Edit C
296. iant Filter Specifies how the frequency components of the sound will change TVA Time Variant Amplifier Specifies the volume changes and the sound s position in a stereo soundfield Envelope You use Envelope to initiate changes to occur to a sound over time There are separate envelopes for Pitch TVF filter and TVA volume For example if you wish to modify the way in which the sound attacks or decays over time you would adjust the TVA envelope LFO Low Frequency Oscillator Use the LFO to create cyclic changes modulation in a sound The Fantom has two LFOs Either one or both can be applied to effect the WG pitch TVF filter and or TVA volume When an LFO is applied to the WG pitch a vibrato effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVF cutoff frequency a wah effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVA volume a tremolo effect is produced vow LFO is not included in the rhythm tones percussion instrument sounds 19 Overview of the Fantom Overview of the Fantom Patches Patches are the basic sound configurations that you play during a performance Each patch can be configured by combining up to four tones How the four tones are combined is determined by the Structure Type parameter PATCH TMT p 56 ws m ve im TVA t Pitch Envelope Rhythm Sets Rhythm sets are groups of a number of different percussion E instrument sounds Since percussion ins
297. ified press 6 Write and perform the Write operation If you do not want to save press EXIT to return to the previous screen Initializing the System Settings Init The current settings of the system functions can be restored to a set of standard settings or to the factory settings 1 Access the System Edit screen 2 Press 7 Init The System Initialize window appears Press Execute to initialize 3 Press 8 Execute The settings will be initialized then you ll be returned to the previous screen Saving the System Settings Write Changes you make to the System function settings are only temporary they will be discarded as soon as the power is turned off If you want to keep any changes you ve made in the system settings you must save them in internal system memory ote When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure 1 Change the system function settings and press 6 Write The System Write window appears Press Execute to write 2 Press 8 Execute The display will indicate Are you sure 3 Press 8 OK to execute the save operation To cancel the operation press EXIT 178 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Functions of System Parameters This section explains
298. iles can be loaded you can play back songs using a wide variety of sounds Creating a Chain Before you use Chain Play you must create a chain that contains the playback order of songs or data files One chain can contain up to 99 steps of songs or data files 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk that contains the songs you want to play back 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Use or W to select Chain Play and then select 8 Select The Chain Play screen appears Step number Chain file name Play mode Chain File 7 Repeat All Songs Load J Save insert etete nd Repeat Ifa chain already exists in internal memory and you want to create a new chain you will need to erase the existing chain To erase the chain press 6 Clear All The display will ask Clear All Steps OK so press 8 Execute If you decide not to erase the chain press EXIT To delete a specific step move the cursor to the step that you want to delete and press 5 Delete 4 Press 4 Insert The Select Song File window appears DEMO O001 5UG Altered State rippin 36KB Stem Cells 115KB Disappearance 25KB RELAX WITH RPS 21KB ee Select If the Select Sound window appears press 3 Song 122 Playing Back a Song 5 Use 44 or w to specify the songs in the chain in the Saving a Chain to Disk Save desired order of playback PE Any
299. ill be automatically modified to the same setting Key Fade Upper Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper This determines what will happen to the part s level when a note that s higher than the part s specified keyboard range is played Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Level ALERTA Fade Lower Range Lower Fade Upper Range Upper Voice Reserve This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each part when more than 64 voices are played simultaneously Value 0 63 FUL nore It is not possible for the settings of all parts to total an amount greater than 64 The remaining number of available voices will be displayed at rest Pay attention to this readout as you make set the Voice Reserve parameter Creating a Performance Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used The Fantom is able to play up to 64 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of sounds actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the patches and the number of Waves used in the tones The following method is used to calculate the number of sounds used for one patch being played Number of Sounds Being Played x Number of Tones Used by Patches Being Played x Number of Wave
300. in the part s Velocity Sensitivity Offset even when this is set to a positive value Key Fade Lower Part Keyboard Fade Width Lower This determines what will happen to the part s level when a note that s lower than the part s specified keyboard range is played Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Key Range Lower Part Keyboard Range Lower Specifies the lowest note that the tone will sound for each part Value C 1 UPPER Key Range Upper Part Keyboard Range Upper Specifies the highest note that the tone will sound for each part Value LOWER G9 vo When the Key Range p 58 is set for each individual tone in a patch sounds are produced in the range where the Key Range of each tone and the Key Range for the part overlap Key range specified for Performance L L J pA range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play vor If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value Creating a Multitimbre will be automatically modified to the same setting Key Fade Upper Part Keyboard Fade Width Upper This determines what will happen to the part s level when a note that s higher than the part s specified keyboard range is played Highe
301. ing settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Editing Songs Deleting Blank Measures Truncate Copying or merging may sometimes create blank measures at the beginning of a phrase track or pattern Truncate deletes silent portions from the beginning of the specified phrase track to the first note on yon If other sequencer data such as program changes or control changes is recorded between the beginning and the first note on of the specified phrase track only the last data event of each type will be placed before the note on 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or w to select Truncate and then press 8 Select A message of TRUNCATE Select target point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the track or pattern from which blank measures will be deleted and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Truncate window appears Track Edit Truncate Track 8001 61 000 0005 01 000 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check modify the phrase track or pattern from which blank measures will be deleted Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001
302. ing them in the Favorite sound By using this function you can rapidly select favorite rhythm sets from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board You can register a total of 64 sounds 8 sounds x 8 banks as favorite sounds SEN For details on selecting a favorite sound refer to Selecting Favorite Patches Favorite Sound p 33 Using 1 8 to Register 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the rhythm set that you wish to register p 40 2 Hold down JUMP BANK and press a 1 8 to select the bank in which you wish to register the sound 3 Hold down SHIFT REGISTRY and press a 1 8 to select the button at which you wish to register the sound The display will indicate Register OK 4 Press 8 OK to execute the registration To cancel the operation press EXIT Using the Favorite List Window to Register 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen to select the rhythm set that you wish to register p 40 2 Make sure that you are in the PATCH PLAY screen and that the cursor is located at the rhythm set group or the rhythm set number 3 While holding down SHIFT press LIST The Favorite List window appears Favorite List Patch Rhythm Bank eS rs HRM Bank 2 1 2 PR C 038 Tig RS Bank 3 1 3 PR C 053 x 1 4 PR C 103 Li JBsnk4 1 5 PR E 005 soarinsHrnsz BPD Bank 5 1 6 Bank 6 1 7 Bank Usi Bank 8 current USER 991 GenerationXU CMB Pa
303. ings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Larger settings will produce greater change Value 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Env Level 0 4 TVF Envelope Level 0 4 Specify the TVF envelope levels Level 0 Level 4 These settings specify how the cutoff frequency will change at each point relative to the standard cutoff frequency the cutoff frequency value specified in the TVF screen Value 0 127 Env Time 1 4 TVF Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the TVF envelope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next cutoff frequency level is reached For example Time 2 is the time over which Level 1 will change to Level 2 Value 0 127 rMT 2 Le Cutoff Frequenc 1 T quency Lo L Time A 1 L2 L3 L Note on Note off UY T Time L Level HINT The envelopes appearing at the lower part of the TVF settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the TVF envelope while dotted lines are used for the TVA envelope This lets you compare the TVF and TVA envelopes while you make settings Adjusting the Volume TVA Lll NN Generstionxy CMB Tone Switch 2lv Bv av Tone Select ilv 2 3 4 a Chorus Tun cO CD CD Reverb Patch Level 127 ee 8 127 127 es Matrix Ctrl Bias Level 9 5 rj
304. intere trei ee d dins 182 Metronome Sound o need nep neige dens 182 MEX ep raven discs ane 165 MEX Chorus Send Level multitimbre 25 172 MEX Chorus Send Level patch 168 MEX Chorus Send Level performance sees 172 MEX Chorus Send Level rhythm set sss 168 MFX Control Channel MEX Dry Send Level multitimbre MEX Dry Send Level patch see MFX Dry Send Level performance MEX Dry Send Level rhythm set sss MFX Output Assign multitimbre sa MEX Output Assign patch sss MEX Output Assign performance MEX Output Assign rhythm set MEX Reverb Send Level multitimbre MEX Reverb Send Level patch ae MEX Reverb Send Level performance ss 172 MEX Reverb Send Level rhythm set sss 169 MFX template sssssssss MEX Type multitimbre MEX Type patch 2 MEX Type performance sssssseeeeneeeneenenenetennne MBX A SOUIGCe is cit teens n st nd c tede cedes Micro edit Copy 204 MIDI Mu lt tirbte 1 2 3x0 LAE efe ali Ste eh Oe aces 118 Performance eee eed ea denne eee i 103 System 182 MIDI clock 180 MIDEcOnn eetor iet tete br e rieur Pea bete Gola SS 18 MIDLEtime code nn ns ni ence rero EU tdi oe o 180 MIDI Update re e e e t deret 124 Mix Parallel MMC
305. ion of the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort Value 0 127 HINT To edit the overall patch while preserving the relative differences in the Resonance values set for each tone set the Resonance Offset parameter PATCH General p 47 LPF BPF HPF PKG Level igh 4 A mg m l _A 1 Frequency i gt gt Cutoff frequency al 4 A 4 i D LIE S m Ba 4 n 4 S __ amp x gt x i 4 4 4 oN N 4 Low gt gt gt Reso V Sens Resonance Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance If you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance effect set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to have less Resonance use negative settings Value 63 63 Env Depth TVF Envelope Depth Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope Higher settings will cause the TVF envelope to produce greater change Negative settings Creating a Patch will invert the shape of the envelope Value 63 63 Env V Curve TVF Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TV
306. is parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env Level 0 4 Pitch Envelope Level 0 4 Specify the pitch envelope levels Level 0 Level 4 It determines how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch the value set with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the Pitch screen at each point Positive settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower Value 63 63 Env Time 1 4 Pitch Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the pitch envelope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will result in a longer time until the next pitch is reached For example Time 2 is the time over which the pitch changes from Level 1 to Level 2 Value 0 127 T1 T2 TS T4 Pitch T Time L Level Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF I Th LE tO Kit 1 DRM Key Ta et mave swith i DOW a Effects TUF MFX Filter Type en Cutoff Frequency MFX Control Cutoff U Curve Chorus Cutoff U Sens Resonance Revert Resonance U Sens WMT 0 Env Depth Pitch Env U Curve Env U Sens For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 TVF Filter Type Selects the type of filter A filter is a function that cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds brightness thickness and other
307. ished with step recording press EXIT or STOP PLAY The REC indicator will go dark HINT If you are not satisfied with the step recording that you just performed press MENU and from the Menu window that appears select Undo Step Recording to return to the state prior to recording Undo 134 Recording Songs Saving a Recorded Song on Disk A song you record is temporarily stored in internal memory A song in internal memory will be lost when the power is turned off or when you load another song If you want to keep the song you must save it to disk 1 Into the disk drive insert the disk on which you will save the song 2 Press MENU to access the Menu window 3 Use or W to select Song Edit and then press 8 Select The Song Edit screen appears 4 Press 2 Save The Select Command window appears Save Song File S SMF Format SMF Format 1 Select 5 Use or W to select the format in which the song will be saved Save Song File The song will be saved to disk in MRC Pro song format The settings of the currently selected multitimbre performance will also be saved with the data An extension of SVQ will be added automatically Save SMF Format 0 The song will be converted into a Format 0 Standard MIDI File in which all sequencer data is saved in a single phrase track and saved to disk An extension of MID will be added automatically Save SMF Format
308. k Phase Lock Switch Set Phase Lock to W ON when you want to suppress discrepancies in timing of parts played on the same MIDI channel O os the Phase Lock parameter is set to ON parts on the same MIDI channel are put in a condition in which their timing is matched enabling them to be played at the same time Accordingly a certain amount of time may elapse between reception of the Note messages and playing of the sounds Turn this setting to ON only as needed Velocity Curve Velocity Curve selects for each MIDI channel one of the four following Velocity Curve types that best matches the touch of the connected MIDI keyboard Value 1 4 Jue 119 Creating a Multitimbre Creating a Multitimbre Setting Effects for a Multiimbre Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb D For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Performance Mode or Multitimbre Mode p 170 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MFX Control p 174 Making Chorus Settings Chorus p 176 Making Reverb Settings Reverb p 177 Scale Tune Settings Scale Tune FRNTOM Temp a Part Scale Tune Grand XU PNO Part 1 MIDI n SE a Effects CHOBERFEGHARSB MFX MFX Control 1 Chorus e 6 6 6 2 6 6 6 a a Reverb c 8 8 8 8 8 8 Se Scale Tune o a r1 o a 8 8 e 6 6 8 Li 8 8 6 6 e a
309. k mark v will turn the tone on and removing the check mark will turn it off If you assign TRNS UP DOWN as a function to be controlled by the realtime control buttons KB 31 you can easily change the Transpose by pressing these buttons If you want just one or two tones to sound in a patch turn the others off and store that setting on a patch This cuts nonessential use of the Fantom s simultaneous voices By holding down JUMP and pressing 1 4 you can switch a tone on off Playing in Patch Mode LU T Playing Single Notes Mono Creating Smooth Pitch Changes When using a patch for a naturally monophonic instrument such as Po mento amp sax or flute it is effective to play in mono Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 first played key to the next played key By applying portamento 2 when Mono mode is selected see the preceding item you can gt 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window e simulate performance effects such as slurring on a violin P a ww l Patch Edit and th ss 8 hs a PERTE R press 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 Select The Patch Edit screen appears 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 4 Press 1 A or 2 V to select the General tab 3 Press 4 or to select a Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen appears A s
310. l be recorded or not recorded The message will be recorded if you assign a check mark W and will not be recorded if you remove the check mark If you press 5 All Off no sequencer data will be recorded If you press 6 All On all of the sequencer data will be recorded 5 Press EXIT to close the Recording Select window 131 Recording Songs Recording Songs Erasing Unwanted Data While You Record Realtime Erase Realtime Erase is a function that erases unwanted data during realtime recording This is particularly convenient during loop recording since it lets you erase data without stopping recording nore Realtime Erase can be executed only if the Recording Mode is set to MIX 1 Begin realtime recording p 129 The Realtime Recording window appears Realtime Recording Press REC to close Erase eter 2 Press 7 Erase The Realtime Erase window appears Press Keyboard or Erase All 3 Erase unwanted data To erase all data except for Pattern Call messages press 8 Erase All Data will be erased for as long as you hold down the button To erase notes of a specific key hold down that key Data for that note will be erased for as long as you hold down that key To erase notes of a specific key range hold down the top and bottom keys of that range Data for that range will be erased for as long as you hold down those keys 4 Press EXIT to close
311. l devices e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet Quick Start p 5 e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet Z Install only the specified circuit board s SR JV80 SRX Series Remove only the specified screws p 196 p 198 Q safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of Should you remove screws make sure to put them in a O them being swallowed accidentally In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 and 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Observe the following when using the unit s floppy disk drive For fu
312. lay back repeatedly To stop playback press a Stop Trigger key or press the same key once again ONCE The pattern will play back once Mute Group This function lets you prevent patterns of the same group from sounding together For example a fill in and bridge should never be played at the same time and to ensure that this does not occur you can set the fill in and bridge to the same mute group number Thirty one mute groups can be specified Select OFF if you do not want to use a mute group for a pattern Value OFF 1 31 Trigger Quantize This parameter specifies how pattern playback is to begin when a key is pressed during song playback or recording Value REAL The pattern will begin playing at the moment you press the key BEAT If the song is being played or recorded the pattern will begin playing at the beginning of the next beat if you press the key in the middle of the beat MEASURE If the song is being played or recorded the pattern will begin playing at the beginning of the next measure if you press the key in the middle of the measure Velocity Sens Velocity Sensitivity Turn this OFF if you want the pattern to play back at the volume at which it was recorded If you want to vary the pattern playback volume according to the strength with which you pressed the key select either LOW MID or HIGH Value OFF LOW MID HIGH 7 When you press 8 RPS to assign a check mark
313. laying in Patch Mode Auditioning Patches Phrase Preview The Fantom allows you to preview patches by hearing a phrase appropriate for each type of patch 1 Access the Patch List window p 33 USER 001 Generationxy CMB USER 002 Grand XU PNO Preset A USER 003 GlobalWarmup SPD User Library Preset B USER 004 Chordbender TEK remm USER 005 Mu Orchestra ORC oS usER 006 vortex tPLS Preset D USER 007 TempoMadness BTS Preset E USER 008 Stream Bell BEL Ind USER 009 Blue Mutes DGT USER 010 Ultrasmooth STR Bank Select MSB LSB 887 088 1 Program Change 68 2 Press and hold 8 Prevu The patch selected in the Patch List window will be sounded 3 Release your finger from 8 Prevu and the phrase will stop playing If you wish to change the phrase that is played by Phrase Preview you can edit the Patch Category parameter PATCH General p 47 If you wish to change how the phrase is played by Phrase Preview you can edit the Preview Mode parameter SYSTEM General p 185 Selecting Patches by Category Patch Finder The Fantom provides a Patch Search function Patch Finder which allows you to specify a type category of patch so that you can quickly find the desired patch There are a total of 38 categories 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 Make sure that the patch rhythm set select switch is set to PATCH If it is set to RHYT
314. le pressing the hold pedal the arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the chord 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc to the HOLD PEDAL jack 2 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on 3 Play a chord while pressing the hold pedal 4 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly can apply a wah effect to the guitar strumming Playing in Patch Mode T Using an External MIDI Keyboard Making Arpeggiator Settings to Play Arpeggios 1 Hold down JUMP and press ARPEGGIO You can also use the keyboard of an external MIDI instrument to The Arpeggio window appears c l ios play arpeggios 1 Usea MIDI cable to connect the Fantom s MIDI IN connector Lorr Recent Rate forF Shuffle Rate 2 to the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI keyboard NOTE VALUES Shuffle Resolution S Variation Velociti Motif Ii lice Rae Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on Press MENU to open the Menu window Urs Peas UN Press or wW to select a System Edit and then press 8 Select The System Edit screen appears Key Trigger OFF Tempo SEQ 120 In this window you can set the following arpeggiator parameters Switch Switches the Arpeggiator on off Hold Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator 7 performance 6
315. lect a negative value Larger settings will produce greater change If you do not want the elapsed time before the LFO effect is applied the effect is continuous to change according to the key pressed set this to 0 Value 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 2 Fade Mode LFO 1 LFO2 Fade Mode Specifies how the LFO will be applied Value ON lt ON gt OFF OFF gt LI After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 68 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved 1 2 Fade Time LFO 1 LFO2 Fade Time Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum minimum Value 0 127 I After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 68 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved 67 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch 1 2 Key Trigger LFO1 LFO2 Key Trigger This specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin when the key is pressed ON or not OFF Value OFF ON 1 2 Pitch Depth LFO 1 LFO2 Pitch Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch Value 63 63 1 2 TVF Depth LFO1 LFO2 TVF Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the cutoff frequency Value 63 63 1 2 TVA Depth LFO1 LFO2 TVA Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume Value 63 63 1 2 Pan Depth LFO1 L
316. lid level surface in an area free from vibration If the unit must be installed at an angle be sure the installation does not exceed the permissible range upward 2 downward 18 Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage floppy disks When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it To insert a disk push it gently but firmly into the drive it will click into place To remove a disk press the EJECT button firmly Do not use excessive force to remove a disk which is lodged in the drive Never attempt to remove a floppy disk from the drive while the drive is operating the indicator is lit damage could result to both the disk and the drive Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down To prevent damage to the disk drive s heads always try to hold the floppy disk in a level position not tilted in any direction while inserting it into the drive Push it in firmly but gently Never use excessive force To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only floppy disks into the disk drive Never insert any other type of disk Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign obj
317. ll be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Channel Pressure Receive Channel Pressure Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Channel Pressure messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark v will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Poly Key Pressure Receive Polyphonic Key Pressure Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI polyphonic key pressure messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark VW will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Modulation Receive Modulation Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Modulation messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off 103 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Volume Receive Volume Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Volume messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Pan Receive Pan Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Pan messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Ex pression Receive Expression Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Expression
318. ll have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 Shuffle Resolution Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value The note value can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note Value J Keyboard Velocity Rhythm Pattern Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Note Assign Rhythm Pattern Note Assign Specify the note name of the lowest note in the key range that will play the Rhythm pattern The Rhythm pattern can be played ina one octave range starting from the key you specify here Value C 1 G9 Key Trigger Rhythm Pattern Key Trigger Turn this ON if you want the rhythm pattern to start at the moment that you press the key If you want the rhythm pattern to start playing in synchronization with the sequencer or arpeggio turn this OFF Value OFF ON Zone Number Rhythm Pattern Zone Number Specify the zone that will play the Rhythm pattern The Rhythm pattern will be played for the part that is connected to the zone you specify here Value 1 16 Creating a Performance Realti
319. lly used In contrast in situations such as in broadcast where the time code must match actual clock time drop is used MTC Offset Hour MTC Offset Time Hour Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom and the external device in an hour units Value 00 23 hours MTC Offset Minute MTC Offset Time Minute Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom and the external device in a minute units Value 00 59 minutes MTC Offset Second MTC Offset Time Second Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom and the external device in a second units Value 00 59 seconds 181 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Settings Common to All Modes System Function MTC Offset Frame MTC Offset Time Frame Coordinates the playback timing of the Fantom and the external device in a frame units Value 00 29 frames MTC Error Level Determines how often the reception status is checked when MTC is being received from an external device Stop synchronization if a problem becomes apparent with the check Value 0 10 the checking interval will be longer for larger values von In strict terms the lower the numerical value set the more accurate the check is However playback may be stopped overly frequently if too rigorous a check is made and this soon becomes inconvenient By raising the Error Level setting then even if problems with the reception of MTC do occur synchronization can then continue as long as
320. losure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following OSCR Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with a damp cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety When the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED Never use with a cart stand tripod bracket 10 P
321. lready contain 128 prepared patches each for a total of 640 patches GM GM2 This is an internal group of patches compatible with General MIDI 2 a system of MIDI function specifications designed to transcend differences between makers and types of devices these patches cannot be overwritten Furthermore settings of currently selected patches from this group cannot be changed The Fantom includes 256 preset patches XP A C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots These are groups used when using patches from Wave Expansion Boards installed in the EXP A C slots and cannot be rewritten However you may modify the settings of the currently selected patch and then store the modified patch in User memory The number of onboard patches depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed yon XP A C patches can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board is installed in the corresponding slot XP A EXP A slot SR JV80 series sold separately XP B C EXP B C slots SRX series sold separately Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 Patch group Patch number ode Faset cles Guo Gap ea internaisong Parch User Libr ry Che Tx 1 Rx 1 120 USER R Generat i onXV Category CME Combination Lock Tone Sw DO DBeam MFX LoFi Compress CHO Delay e Foot Tupe REU SRU Hall Realtime Control cutort O resonance Breath decay Time GB Portamento E
322. lue of 00 will be inserted Change this to the desired value To delete data move the cursor to the relevant location and press 6 Delete 5 When you are finished editing press 8 OK to finalize the values of the system exclusive message HINT If you decide to discard the changes you made to the system exclusive message and return to the Microscope window press EXIT In the case of a Roland type IV system exclusive message the checksum can be calculated automatically when you finalize the values If you do not want to calculate the checksum automatically press 1 Checksum to remove the check mark v from Auto Calculate Checksum Inserting Sequencer Data Create You can insert new sequencer data into a desired location of a phrase track or pattern UE For details on the sequencer data that can be inserted refer to Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track Pattern p 154 1 Access the Microscope window for the track or pattern into which you want to insert sequencer data p 153 2 Press amp or w to move the cursor to the location at which you want to insert sequencer data HINT If the location at which you want to insert sequencer data is not shown in the display move the cursor to the appropriate location measure beat clock and then specify the insert location for the sequencer data 3 Press 1 Create The Create Event window appears 4 Press or w
323. lution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value The note value can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note Value F J Keyboard Velocity Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Value 3 3 95 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Key Trigger Arpeggio Key Trigger Turn this ON if you want the arpeggio to start at the moment that you press the key If you want the arpeggio to start playing in synchronization with the sequencer or rhythm pattern turn this OFF Value OFF ON Zone Number Arpeggio Zone Number Specify the zone for arpeggio performance The Arpeggio performance corresponding to the
324. m sets you yourself create can be stored in this group The Fantom includes 16 preset rhythm sets PRST Preset This is the group inside the Fantom which can be rewritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected rhythm set and then save the modified settings in User memory The Fantom contains 16 preset rhythm sets GM GM2 This is an internal group of rhythm sets compatible with General MIDI 2 a system of MIDI function specifications designed to transcend differences between makers and types of devices these rhythm sets cannot be overwritten Furthermore settings of currently selected rhythm sets from this group cannot be changed The Fantom includes nine preset rhythm sets XP A C Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A C Slots These groups are for when using rhythm sets from a Wave Expansion Board installed in slots EXP A C and cannot be rewritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected rhythm set and then save the modified settings in User memory The number of onboard rhythm sets depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed von A Rhythm Set XP A C cannot be accessed if the Wave Expansion Board it belongs to has not been installed XP A EXP A slot SR JV80 series sold separately XP B C EXP B C slots SRX series sold separately 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to PATCH oo Trans c
325. m that any MIDI messages used for the multi effects control will be received If the Fantom is set up such that reception of MIDI messages is disabled then the multi effects control will not function Destination 1 4 Multi Effects Control Destination 1 4 Sets the multi effects parameters to be controlled with the multi effects control The multi effects parameters available for control will depend on the multi effects type For details refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List Sens 1 4 Multi Effects Control Sensitivity 1 4 Sets the amount of the multi effects control s effect that is applied To make an increase in the currently selected value to get higher values move to the right increase rates and so on select a positive value to make a decrease in the currently selected value to get lower values move to the left decrease rates and so on select a negative value When both positive and negative are selected the changes are greater as the value increases To have no effect applied select 0 Value 63 63 MFX Control Channel Multi Effects Control Channel This determines the channel that will be used for reception when using the Multi effects Control to modify multi effects parameters in real time when the MFX Source parameter p 173 is set to PRF or MLT Set this to OFF when the Multi effects Control is not being used Value 1 16 OFF 176 Making Chorus Settings Chorus
326. mance 3 To switch the favorite sound bank hold down JUMP and press 1 8 Selecting from the Favorite List Window 1 In the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen make sure that the cursor is located at the performance group or performance number 2 While holding down SHIFT press LIST The Favorite List window appears Favorite List Performance Bank eS eee 2 USER 48 Rock It 3 USER 09 VORTEX USER 02 A11 That USER 03 Trippin 6 USER 41 xtreme USER 05 RhuthmCcluSet 8 USER 17 Eclipse Select Press or w to select a performance pw To switch banks press to move the cursor to the Bank 1 8 tab and press or wW to select the desired bank 5 After switching the bank press b to move the cursor within the list and press or w to select the performance 6 When you press 8 Select the performance will be selected and the Favorite List window will close Selecting Performances from the List You can display a list of performances and select a performance from that list 1 In the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen make sure that the cursor is located at the performance group or performance number 2 Press LIST The Performance List window appears USER 01 Fantasm USER 02 A11 That Preset USER 03 Trippin USER 04 FunkRock Set USER 05 Rhuthmcluset USER 06 Relaxation USER 07 Romance USER 08 Soaring Saws USER 09 VORTEX USER 10 BestRockSet User Library
327. me timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note This initial attack is what defines much of the instrument s character For such waveforms it is best to use the complex tonal changes of the attack portion of the waveform just as they are and to use the envelope only to modify the decay portion If you attempt to use the envelope to modify the attack portion as well the characteristics of the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that you intend Level gt Looped portion Tone change stored with the wave Time Envelope for the TVF filter Resulting tone change Saving Patches You ve Created Write Changes you make to sound settings are temporary and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound If you want to keep the modified sound you must save it in the internal USER group user memory When you modify the settings of a patch the PATCH PLAY screen will indicate EDITED Once you save the patch into internal memory user memory the EDITED indication goes away von When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure p 43 1 Make sure that the patch you wish to save is selected 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Chain Play Disk Utility Demo Play 3 Pre
328. me Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller EX i L ice Et t 5 BEL General Knob West End Bs SES Parti Arpeggio e E Rhythm Ptn Assign CUTOFF RESONANCE r Zone 1 1 Controller M Switch Zone Part a t3 a Assign ARP HOLD PTH HOLD MIDI Mode LATCH LATCH Effects Zone 1 2 X D Beam Switch orF Range Lower o Assign OFF Range Upper 127 Polarity STANDARD Zone 1 a gt LI J Write Init Copy D For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Knob Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Knob Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the HI 0 knobs Value OFF The realtime control knob will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 TS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch TEMPO Tempo ARP VAR Arpeggio Variation ARP ACCENT Arpeggio Accent Rate ARP SHFFLE Arpeggio Shuffle Rate ARP OCTAVE Arpeggio Octave Range PTN ACCENT Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate PTN SHFFLE Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate Zone 1 4 Realtime Control Knob Zone Number 1 4 Specify the zone that will be controlled by each knob iQ Hl o The effect will apply only to the part that is connected to the zone you specify here Value 1 16
329. me Fan 10 16 R PRST O11 i 0 G H n eifi PR A 001 100 m 0 17 m 2 2 100 ms 0 multitimbre 315 100 S m ai EA E RI ee E 6 Press EXIT to close the Multitimbre List window 6 5 PR R 001 Grand XU 100 0 ooo 27 PR A 001 Grand X 16 0 cor Favorite Sound Bank 1 Blues Ha xv Trum Ambient Bend aC Soaring d pet Sax hord Hrns2 2 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the multitimbre group 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a multitimbre group USER User PRST Preset 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the multitimbre number 5 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the multitimbre number 107 Playing in Multiimbre Mode Playing Ba ck a Song 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Move the cursor to the part list and press or wW to select the part to be played 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 The selected part will be indicated by the i symbol This Use Multitimbre mode to play back a song stored on disk symbol shows that this is the currently selected part current 2 Into the disk drive insert the disk that contains the song you D part want to play d Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the song file name in Mi 4 4 STOP the upper part of the screen User Library Control Ch OFF 7 120
330. me of multi effects sounds the delay time of Delay and the like using an external MIDI device you would need to send System Exclusive messages MIDI messages designed exclusively for the Fantom However System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large For that reason a number of the more typical of the Fantom s multi effects parameters have been designed so they accept the use of Control Change or other MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values For example you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the amount of distortion or use the keyboard s touch to change the delay time of Delay The parameters that can be changed are predetermined for each type of multi effect among the parameters described in Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List these are indicated by a it The function that allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the multi effects parameters is called the Multi effects Control Up to four multi effects controls can be used in a single patch rhythm set multitimbre performance When the multi effects control is used you can select the amount of control Sens parameter applied the parameter selected Destination parameter and the MIDI message used Source parameter E By using the Matrix Control instead of the Multi effects Control you can also change the parameters of some popul
331. me value is therefore the sum of the tone s TVA Envelope Time 1 setting the patch s Attack Time Offset and the part s Attack Time Offset If the tone s Time 1 parameter is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Attack Time Offset to a positive value Release Time Offset Part Release Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Release Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 o es e also contain a Release Time Offset setting p 48 The final TVA Envelope release time value is therefore the sum of the tone s TVA Envelope Time 4 setting the patch s Release Time Offset and the part s Release Time Offset If the tone s Time 4 parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change in the Release Time Offset even when this is set to a positive value Decay Time Offset Part Decay Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Decay Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 116 Creating a Multiimbre Vibrate Rate Part Vibrate Rate For each part adjust the vibrato speed the rate at which the pitch is modulated The pitch will be modulated more rapidly for higher settings and more slowly with lower settings Value 64 63 Vibrate Depth Part Vibrate Depth For each part this adjusts the depth of the vibrato effect the depth at which the pitch is modulated The pitch will be modulated more greatly for higher settin
332. memory to the standard values This is called a Initial Data Use this setting when you wish to create a sound from scratch PRESET Resets the currently selected rhythm set in user memory to the factory settings MFX TEMPLATE The multi effect settings of the currently selected patch will be set to the MFX template settings von If the currently selected rhythm set is preset memory PRST data initializing with the PRESET setting will set the values to those of the identically numbered user memory D For details regarding MFX template refer to MFX Template List Sound Parameter List 5 If you ve set the initialization type to DEFAULT or PRESET move the cursor to Mode and select the initialization mode Mode Initialize Mode ALL The rhythm set will be initialized KEY A rhythm tone will be initialized Move the cursor to Key and select the rhythm tone that will be initialized Key rhythm tone settings can be made by pressing a note 6 If you ve set the initialization type to MFX TEMPLATE move the cursor to Template and select an MFX template 7 Press 8 Execute The initialization will be carried out and you ll be returned to the Rhythm Edit screen Copying Rhythm Set Settings Copy This operation copies the settings of any desired rhythm set to the currently selected rhythm set You can use this feature to make the editing process faster and easier Basic Proc
333. mento GD Tap Tempo ETTTIDETITTESINUEEI pese ge Es peo ped ee es Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the performance group Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a performance group USER User PRST Preset Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the performance number Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the performance number 85 Performance Mode ing in Play Playing in Performance Mode Selecting Favorite Performances Favorite Sound You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used performances in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound By using this function you can quickly select your favorite performances from internal memory I For instructions on how to register to the Favorite Sounds refer to Registering a Favorite Performance Favorite Sound p 93 Selecting from 1 8 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 2 Press 1 8 to select a performance Joa Internalsong Preset ControlCh 16 120 PRST Fantasm RHY D Beam MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay sor MFX B Stereo EQ REV SRU Room 3 MFX C Slicer Realtime Control cutorr Resonance Porta Time Tempo GD Arp nois Ptn nois EJ portamento ED Tap Tempo Fantasn rock It vortex Jan That Trippin aree FPE ecuiese Press 1 8 to select a perfor
334. mit of the range of the D Beam controller Values below this setting will not be output Value 0 UPPER Range Upper D Beam Range Upper Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values above this setting will not be output Value LOWER 127 Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb UE For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Patch Mode p 165 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MFX Control p 174 Making Chorus Settings Chorus p 176 Making Reverb Settings Reverb p 177 Changing How a Rhythm Tone Is Sounded WMT Rhythm Edit 6 0 oo 0 Key TR DIET D 4 Rhythm Ptn WMT TUTTI Controller Wave Group INT INT INT INT Wave No lt L gt Effects Wave No com MFX Wave Gain g g g g FRM Switch OFF OFF OFF OFF MFX Control oo 1 1 1 1 Chorus FxM Depth s e D a Reverb Tempo Sync OFF OFF OFF OFF a gt X Write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 MEMD With rhythm tones sounds are created by combining up to four Waves eight for stereo Tips on Creating a Rhythm Tone The Waves for the bass drum snare hi hat toms and other percussion instruments are e
335. mportant data you have stored in the unit s memory on a floppy disk Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a floppy disk in the unit s memory or another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Before Using Floppy Disks Handling the Floppy Disk Drive Install the unit on a so
336. n Write J Init Copy Type Reverb Type Selects the type of Reverb Value 0 OFF Reverb is not used 1 REVERB Normal Reverb 2 SRV ROOM This reverb simulates typical room acoustic reflections 3 SRV HALL This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic reflections 4 SRV PLATE This reverb simulates a reverb plate a popular type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate You can also achieve unusual metallic sounding reverbs using SRV PLATE 5 GM2 REVERB General MIDI 2 reverb In this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the reverb that is selected by the Reverb Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to Reverb Parameters Sound Parameter List 177 Adding Effects Settings Common to All Modes System Function Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the Fantom such as tuning and MIDI message reception are referred to as system functions This section explains how to make settings for the System functions and describes the functions of the different System parameters How to Make the System Function Settings 1 Press MENU to open the Menu window 2 Press or to select System Edit and then press 8 Select The System Edit screen appears System Edit General Sequencer Local Switch on Master Tune 448
337. n duet dee ede eile tede ede 112 Performance ssl daga endo 91 Rhythiniset c ieri eet e ERR a 69 Song System hs Insert Measure ere Int SWILCh Mo Internal memory Internal song Internal switch 4e aA Nasa nent eo J JUMP rere ete C DH ne JUMP BANK Just temperament ss 105 120 186 K Key Fade Lower multitimbre part sss Key Fade Lower performance part Key Fade Lower tone Key Fade Upper multitimbre part sss Key Fade Upper performance part sss Key Fade Upper tone Key Range Lower sis Key Range Lower multitimbre part sss 117 Key Range Lower performance part 102 Key Range Lower tone ss 58 Key Range Upper multitimbre part 117 Key Range Upper performance part Key Range Upper tone 58 Key Range Upper zone ss 99 Key Trigger patch terne a 52 Key Trigger performance 96 Key Trigger rhythm set 75 Keyboard controller section 19 Keyboard fade width lower multitimbre part 117 Keyboard fade width lower performance part 102 Keyboard fade width lower tone Keyboard fade width upper multitimbre part 117 Keyboard fade width upper performance part 102 Keyboard fade width upper tone s
338. n selecting a favorite sound refer to Selecting Favorite Patches Favorite Sound p 33 Using 1 8 to Register 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch that you wish to register p 32 2 Hold down JUMP BANK and press a 1 8 to select the bank in which you wish to register the sound 3 Hold down SHIFT REGISTRY and press a 1 8 to select the button at which you wish to register the sound The display will indicate Register OK 4 Press 8 OK to execute the registration To cancel the operation press EXIT Using the Favorite List Window to Register 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen to select the patch that you wish to register p 32 2 Make sure that you are in the PATCH PLAY screen and that the cursor is located at the patch group or the patch number 3 While holding down SHIFT press LIST The Favorite List window appears Favorite List Patch Rhythm Bank 1 i 1 PR A 121 Blues Bank 2 1 2 PR C 038 Tigi Bank 3 1 3 PR C 053 x 1 4 PR C 103 L BSNS 1 5 PR E 005 soaringHrns2 BPD Bank 5 1 6 Bank 6 i Bank 7 Bank 8 Current USER 991 GenerationXU CMB Patch Rhythm Favtist Regist Renove Preuu IET 4 Press to move the cursor to the Bank 1 8 tab and press or W to select the bank in which you wish to register the patch 5 Press to move the cursor within the list and press or W t
339. nal MIDI keyboard in octave units HINT In arpeggio settings the Style Arpeggio Style is particularly important The playback pattern of the arpeggio is determined mainly by this selection IE For details regarding each parameter refer to Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio p 51 2 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to each parameter and either turn the VALUE dial or press INC or DEC to make the setting 3 Press 8 Close to close the Arpeggio window HINT Arpeggiator settings can be saved with each patch as part of the patch settings This means that you can create patches that contain the most effective settings 39 Playing in Patch Mode Playing Percussion Instruments In Patch mode you can play percussion instruments from the keyboard by selecting a rhythm set As the rhythm tone assigned to each key varies by the rhythm set selected you can play a wide range of percussion instruments Selecting a Rhythm Set The Fantom has three rhythm set groups including the User group Preset group and GM group with 16 rhythm sets in the User group 16 rhythm sets in Preset group and 9 rhythm sets in GM group for a total of 41 rhythm sets What s more you can further expand your options by installing up to three optional Wave Expansion Boards one SR JV80 two SRX series enabling you to select from a large selection of rhythm sets USER This is the group inside the Fantom which can be rewritten rhyth
340. name extensions cannot be changed Files on the master disks of the Standard MIDI File releases etc from Roland cannot be renamed 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press or to select the file whose file name you want to copy 3 Press 4 Rename The Rename File window appears DEMO_681 SUG DEMO 8681 SU RBGTEF GHI JKLMNOPORS TUVWXYZ 0123456789 14558 O 9 O Insert Delete 4 Modify the file name and press 8 OK D For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 The Rename File window appears from DEMO 881 S5UG to DEMO_905 SUG 5 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation Deleting Unwanted Files Delete Use this function to delete unwanted files from disk yon Master disks of Standard MIDI Files releases etc from Roland cannot be deleted 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press amp or to select the file that you want to delete 3 Press 5 Delete The Delete File window appears yN DEMO 81 5UG 4 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation Executing Disk Related Functions Tools You can execute a variety of disk related functions such as formatting Format or changing the name Volume Label Preparing a Disk for Use by the Fantom This function initializes formats a disk so that Fantom data can be saved to it Before a new disk or a disk used on anothe
341. nce Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio EX i g ce Ee ERN ranas General firpeggio West End Bs SBS Parti 1 i Switch on ca Hold OH Rhythm Ptn Style RHYTHMIX 5 Controller Variation 2 Motif Zone Accent Rate 96 Part Shuffle Rate 56 MIDI Shuffle Resolution F Effects Keyboard Velocity REAL s Octave Range 8 Key Trigger 0 Zone Number 1 A LEE write Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Arpeggio Switch Arpeggio Switch Switches the Arpeggiator on off Value OFF ON Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Value OFF ON Style Arpeggio Style Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played SEN For details regarding Arpeggio Style refer to Arpeggio Style List Sound Parameter List Variation Arpeggio Variation The arpeggiator provides several variations performance patterns for each arpeggio style This parameter selects the variation number The number of variations will differ according to the arpeggio style Motif Arpeggio Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound Value UP Notes you press will be sounded beginning from low to high DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from high to low UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from low to high and then back down from high
342. nce Part Copy You should select the one that is relevant to the type of data you wish to copy For details refer to Types of Performance Copy following section 5 Move the cursor to Source and select the copy source sound 6 Press 8 Execute to execute the copy 7 Press EXIT to return to the Performance Edit screen Types of Performance Copy Performance Name Copy NAME The name of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected performance Performance Copy Mode ETT NM Source Destination CE USER H001 gt Temporary Performance Fantasm Fantasm Performance Effects Copy MFX CHORUS REVERB The effect settings of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected performance Performance Copy Destination USER H001 Temporary Performance Fantasm Fantasm MER A MER A 3e Copy source multi Copy destination multi effects effects Effect contents that will be copied Mode MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings If you want to copy the multi effect settings of a multitimbre or performance select the MFX MFX A MFX C whose data will be copied Performance Part Copy PART Part settings of a performance will be copied to the part you specify of the current performance Performance Copy Mode LEE Sou
343. nd Generator Mode The Fantom s sequencer can be used at any time regardless of the mode of the sound generator Patch Multitimbre Performance Normally when recording or playing back a song you will put the sound generator in Multitimbre mode The reason for this is that in this mode only the sound of the specified MIDI channel will be heard when you record while playing the keyboard of the Fantom and that when the song is played back the parts can independently play up to 16 different sounds Thus this mode is suitable for recording and playing back a song that uses an ensemble of multiple instruments such as drums bass and piano If you wish to record your playing using a layered split performance set the sound generator to Performance mode If you wish to record your playing using a single sound you can set the sound generator to Patch mode How Phrase Tracks Parts and MIDI Channels Interact When the sound generator is in Multitimbre mode you will need to be aware of how the phrase tracks parts and MIDI channels correspond to one another Otherwise you may not hear the sounds you expect or song editing may be more difficult than it should be For this reason we recommend that you always maintain the direct numerical correspondence between Phrase tracks 1 16 parts 1 16 and MIDI channels 1 16 These are the settings that will be in effect when the power is turned on or after you perform the Song Initialize operation
344. nd will be off when you release your finger from the button LATCH The button will switch on off each time you press it D Beam Switch D Beam Switch Switches the D Beam controller on off Value OFF ON Assign D Beam Assign Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller Value OFF The D Beam controller will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IN For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List Creating a Rhythm Set BEND UP Raises the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves higher BEND DOWN Lowers the pitch in semitone steps up to 4 octaves lower AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch NOTE Play the sound of the most recently pressed key OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller PTN SWITCH Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off PTN ACCENT Rhythm Pattern Accent Rate PTN SHFFLE Rhythm Pattern Shuffle Rate Polarity D Beam Polarity Switch the polarity of the D Beam controller With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted Range STANDARD REVERSE Range Lower D Beam Range Lower Specify the lower li
345. negative value Value 63 63 HINT If you wish to make adjustments to the entire patch while maintaining the relative values of TVA Level Velocity Sensitivity among tones adjust the Velocity Sens Offset parameter PATCH General p 48 However this setting is shared by the Cutoff V Sens parameter PATCH TVF p 63 Patch Pan Specifies the pan of the patch L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R Tone Pan x Sets the pan of the tone L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R Pan KF Pan Key Follow Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning Positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned increasingly further toward the right and negative settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned toward the left Larger settings will produce greater change Value 100 100 Rnd Pan Depth Random Pan Depth Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change randomly each time you press a key Higher settings will produce a greater amount of change Value 0 63 Alter Pan Depth Alternate Pan Depth This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed Higher settings will produce a greater amount of change L or R settings will reverse the order in which the pan will alternate betw
346. ng patterns can be played back from your external MIDI keyboard Turn on the RPS function p 160 ve Press keys on your external MIDI keyboard to play back patterns Recording a Performance Using the RPS Function A performance that uses the RPS function can be recorded in real time in the same way as a conventional performance This provides an easy way to remix patterns and create a song MEMD If you use the RPS function during realtime recording the pattern performance will be recorded just as it occurs 1 Make sure that preparations for the RPS function have been made correctly 2 Access the PLAY screen for the mode in which you want to perform 3 Turn on the RPS function p 160 4 Press REC The REC indicator will blink and the Recording Standby window appears In this window you can make various settings for realtime recording Recording Standby Track Mode wx Count In 1MEAS Tempo Rec OFF Loop Punch OFF Start Point FES End Point mii Quantize OFF Grid Resolution Strength Shuffle Resolution Rate 5 Specify how recording is to take place EN For details on these settings refer to Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording p 129 6 Press STOP PLAY The Recording Standby window will close the REC indicator will change from blinking to lit and recording will begin 7 Press a key to which a pattern is assigned The a
347. ng refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 General Patch Name You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the patch Value space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt A d penses UE For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 Patch Category Specifies the type category of the patch The Patch Finder uses this setting It also determines the phrase that will be sounded when using the Phrase Preview function D For details on the possible category names refer to p 35 Voice Priority This determines how notes will be managed when the maximum polyphony is exceeded 64 voices Value LAST The last played voices will be given priority and currently sounding notes will be turned off in order beginning with the first played note LOUDEST The voices with the loudest volume will be given priority and currently sounding notes will be turned off beginning with the lowest volume voice Analog Feel Analog Feel Depth Specifies the depth of 1 f modulation that is to be applied to the patch 1 f modulation is a pleasant and naturally occurring ratio of modulation that occurs in a babbling brook or rustling wind By adding this 1 f modulation you can simulate the natural instability characteristic of an analog synthesizer Value 0 127 Mono Poly Specifies whether the patch will play polyphonically POLY or monophonically MONO The MONO
348. ng that manages the time signature of that pattern The pattern beat acts as a guide when the pattern is played or recorded and is handled independently of the time signature of the song i e the time signature recorded in the beat track The pattern beat is normally set to a time signature of 4 4 but you can change this setting when the song has a time signature other than 4 4 or when you want to record a pattern with a time signature different than that of the song Only one pattern beat setting can be specified at the beginning of each pattern This means that it is not possible to change time signatures midway through a pattern Nor is it possible to delete the pattern beat or move or copy it 1 Press MENU to access the Menu window 2 Use or w to select Pattern Edit and then press 8 Select The Pattern Edit screen appears 3 Press 7 Micro Edit The Microscope window appears 4 Move the cursor to Track and select the pattern whose time signature you want to specify Microscope O O O O OOOO O O OOO_ Track Pattern Beat 4 4 P 1 01 0080 o ze 5 Move the cursor to Pattern Beat and set the time signature Recording Songs Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording Realtime Recording is the recording method in which your keyboard playing and controller operations are recorded just as you perform them Use this recording method when you wa
349. nge switch sse 183 TranspoSe 2 5 soot det Sa E AR la 36 145 Track edit i n oen te ice etre iti i s 145 Truncate eee sui RUE erige dedi 153 TVA Patelizocuebutecsetecc recte ots bee cine ee 64 Rhythm set se 82 TVA envelope level 1 3 rhythm tone 83 TVA envelope level 1 3 tone ccc ses 66 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone 82 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity tone 65 TVA envelope time 1 4 rhythm tone 83 TVA envelope time 1 4 tone 66 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone 83 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity tone 66 TVA envelope time key follow sss TVA level velocity curve rhythm tone TVA level velocity curve tone sse TVA level velocity sensitivity rhythm tone sss 82 TVA level velocity sensitivity tone sss 65 TVF Rhythm set TVF envelope depth rhythm tone x TVF envelope depth tone sss TVF envelope level 0 4 rhythm tone sss TVF envelope level 0 4 tone sse TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity tone E TVF envelope time 1 4 rhythm tone sss TVF envelope time 1 4 tone
350. ngs Scale Tune Performance Ed it Fantasm a Part Scale Tune West End Bs SBS Parti HDI Ea Ea Ea Em MN 1 Effects CHOBERFREGRARB MFX Fe 1 e fe e e fo ped cona e ge He fe We We io Chorus 2 6 6 e 6 8 Reverb e We fe je We We We 3 e To Te fe e fo fe fo Yo Yo We 6 6 6 6 8 1 6 6 6 5 L L 6 A L J Write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 C B Part Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings for each part Value 64 63 LN Scale Tune is switched on off by means of the Scale Tune Switch parameter SYSTEM Scale Tune p 186 Creating a Performance Changing the Settings of the Equal Temperament Patch Assigned to a Part This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and is the When using patches in Performance mode some settings such as most widely used method of temperament used in Western effects settings will be affected by performance settings If you wish music The Fantom employs equal temperament when the Scale to edit a patch while hearing how it will sound in the performance Tune Switch is set to OFF use this procedure Just Temperament Tonic of C Here we explain how to change the setting of a patch assigned to a part The procedure for changing the settings of rhythm sets is the same Compared with equal tem
351. ngs of a multitimbre will be copied to the part you specify of the current multitimbre Mode Source p Destination MULTITIMBRE Temporary Multitimbre FANTOM Temp FANTOM Temp Parthi Parthi e Copy source part Copy destination part To specify the currently selected multitimbre as the copy source set Source to TEMP 113 Creating a Multitimbre Creating a Multi imbre Saving Multitimbre You ve Created Write Changes you make to sound settings are temporary and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound If you want to keep the modified sound you must save it in the internal USER group user memory When you modify the settings of a multitimbre the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen will indicate EDITED Once you save the multitimbre into internal memory user memory the EDITED indication goes away von When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure p 112 1 Make sure that multitimbre you wish to save is selected 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play 3 Press or wW to select Multitimbre Edit and then press 8
352. nitialize methods Select either of them depending on the application DEFAULT Resets the currently selected patch in the Temporary memory to the standard values This is called a Initial Data Use this setting when you wish to create a sound from scratch PRESET Resets the currently selected patch in user memory to the factory settings MFX TEMPLATE The multi effect settings of the currently selected patch will be set to the MFX template settings von If the currently selected patch is preset memory PR A E data initializing with the PRESET setting will set the values to those of the identically numbered user memory D For details regarding MFX template refer to MFX Template List Sound Parameter List 5 If you ve set the initialization type to MFX TEMPLATE move the cursor to Template and select an MFX template 6 Press 8 Execute The initialization will be carried out and you ll be returned to the Patch Edit screen Copying Patch Settings Copy This operation copies the settings of any desired patch to the currently selected patch You can use this feature to make the editing process faster and easier Basic Procedure for Patch Copy 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the copy destination patch p 32 2 Access the Patch Edit screen p 42 3 Press 8 Copy The Patch Copy window appears Mode ETT Source Destination PATCH user fast Tempo
353. nnel 1 2 3 4 o Rhythm Ptn int Switch OH OH ON ON c Controller Ext Switch ON OH oM OFF S Ext Bank Select MSB _ _ _ Ext Bank Select LSB Co Part Ext Program Number a MIDI Ext Level Effects Ext Pan y 1 1 2 A MAALALANG ARAINA TENTE PETIT 9 To set the lower limit of the range use CURSOR to move the cursor to Key Range Lower To set the upper limit of the range move the cursor to Key Range Upper 10 Press or to select the zone that you set in step 5 11 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the range Specify a keyboard range extending one octave above the key you specified in step 7 This specifies the range of the zone connected to the part that is to play the rhythm pattern 12 Press or to select a zone that is connected to a part other than the part that is to play the rhythm pattern 13 Set the range of the zones that are connected to parts other than the part that plays the rhythm pattern so that they do not overlap the zone that plays the rhythm pattern 14 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY page and begin playing The zone that plays the rhythm pattern will be displayed as RHY and will be enabled when you press RHYTHM 89 Playing in Performance Mode Using the Fantom As a Master Keyboard Although the Fantom s keyboard controller section and sound generato
354. normally Cautions When Selecting a Waveform The sounds of the Fantom are based on complex PCM waveforms and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of the original waveform the results will not be as you expect The internal waveforms of the Fantom fall into the following two groups One shot These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays A one shot waveform records the initial rise and fall of the sound Some of the Fantom s one shot waveforms are sounds that are complete in themselves such as percussive instrument sounds The Fantom also contains many other one shot waveforms that are elements of other sounds These include attack components such as piano hammer sounds and guitar fret noises Looped These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well as sustained sounds Loop waveforms repeatedly play back loop the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively steady state The Fantom s looped waveforms also include components of other sounds such as piano string resonant vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments 71 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set Cautions When Using a One shot Waveform It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one shot waveform to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform or to turn it into a sustaining sound If you were to program such an envelope you would be attempting to shape a portion of
355. note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third On the Fantom you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F lt Example gt Note Equal tem Just Tempera Arabian Scale name perament ment tonic C ecjolojlooo jo jo jo jo Joi co Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Disk mode performs disk related functions such as loading data from disk into the Fantom s memory Load and saving a song or sound generator settings to disk Save You can also format a disk or create a backup disk in this mode Before You Perform Disk Utility Operations In order to perform disk utility operations you will need a 3 5 inch 2DD or 2HD type disk Before using a new disk or one that has been used on another device please initialize format it on the Fantom A 3 5 2DD disk should be formatted to 720 K bytes and 3 5 2HD disk to 1440 K bytes These are standard formats used with most song data software and computers instruments If you save a song created on the Fantom as a Standard MIDI File you can use many devices to play your song About Disk Utility Disk Utility includes the following functions and these functions are executed by pressing 1 6 Load This function loads data from disk in
356. ns When Installing an Wave Expansion Board 196 How to Install a Wave Expansion Board 196 Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards 197 Installation de la carte d expansion Wave French language for Canadian Safety Standard 198 Pr cautions prendre lors de l installation d une carte d expansion Wave ss 198 Installation d une carte d expansion Wave sus 198 V rification des cartes d extension audio apr s installation 199 SPOCINICATIONS Bee n 200 13 Main Features A synthesizer with the operability and playability of a musical instrument The category of synthesizers known as workstations consisting of a sound generator section that creates the sound a controller section and a sequencer section to produce music has taken its own evolutionary path adding various new functionality that opens up new possibilities of musical expression and creation On the other hand access to such functionality has generally been provided through a restrictive complex interface which has all too often hampered the creativity of the musician The Fantom not only features superb operability for performance but also is comprehensively designed to support the musician s creativity in every area including composition It lets you work seamlessly through every aspect of the music production process from performance to composition allowing you to hold onto your inspiration
357. nsion MID you can load individual phrase tracks or patterns 1 After step 3 of Loading a File from Disk into the Fantom Load press 6 Track The Load Song File Track window appears Load Song File Track TRK 1 Source Destination DEMO_661 SUQ int 18 Altered State p Internal Song 2 Move the cursor to the left of s load source and select the track TRK 1 16 or pattern PTN001 100 that you want to load von If you are loading from a Standard MIDI File it is not possible to select patterns PTN001 100 Also if you are loading from a Format 0 Standard MIDI File this will be fixed at TRK ALL and individual tracks cannot be selected 188 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility 3 Move the cursor to the right of load destination and select the load destination track TRK 1 16 or pattern PTNO01 100 4 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation Loading Individual Items of Sound Data If you have selected a sound file extension SVD you can load individual items of sound data Patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance settings will be loaded into user memory and system settings will be loaded into system memory 1 After step 3 of Loading a File from Disk into the Fantom Load press 6 Xfer The Load Sound File Xfer window appears Load Sound File kfer Type USER Source SOUND G SUD 661 jo
358. nt to capture the nuances of your own performance Basic Operation for Realtime Recording 1 Make sure that the preparations for recording have been completed as described in Before You Record a New Song p 127 HINT If you want to record into an existing song load the desired song into internal memory p 136 Then press FWD or BWD to specify the measure at which you want to begin recording The measure at which recording will begin is indicated by the M in the upper part of each PLAY screen 2 Press REC The REC indicator will blink and the Recording Standby window appears Recording Standby Track Mode mx Count In 1MEAS Tempo Ree OFF Loop Punch or 8 Start Point re End Point an on Quantize OFF Grid Resolution Strength Shuffle Resolution Rate This window lets you set various parameters for realtime recording MEM If you want to record a pattern access the Pattern Edit screen p 139 and then press REC 3 As basic settings specify the following three parameters Use CURSOR to move the cursor to each parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting Track Specify the phrase track or pattern on which you want to record Value AUTO TRK 1 TRK 16 PTN001 PTN100 when recording on a pattern AUTO can be selected only when recording in Multitimbre mode If you select AUTO the part current part
359. ntroller With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted Range STANDARD REVERSE Range Lower D Beam Range Lower Specify the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values below this setting will not be output Value 0 CUPPER Range Upper D Beam Range Upper Specify the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values above this setting will not be output Value LOWER 127 Setting Effects for a Patch Effects MFX MFX Control Chorus Reverb E For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Patch Mode p 165 Making Multi Effects Settings MFX MFX Control p 174 Making Chorus Settings Chorus p 176 Making Reverb Settings Reverb p 177 53 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Matrix Control Settings Matrix Ctrl Patch Edit lt OOE CMB Tone Switch 1 v 12 lv lv Tone Select iv 2 3 a Arpeggio Matrix Ctrl Controller Source Destination Sns Tone Effects 1 CUTOFF 8 vlv Iviv MFX somi OFF a viii a lou OFF a vw v v v MFX Control OFF e vieil chorus 2 LEVEL a vi vivly Reverb rs CUTOFF 21 A n SYS CTRL2 Matrix Ctrl OFF 8 vivi a le OFF a v vi7 v TMT Control Sw OFF a X Write Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42
360. nu window that appears select Undo Micro Edit to return to the state prior to execution Undo Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function The RPS Realtime Phrase Sequence function lets you assign patterns to the keyboard and play a pattern by pressing a single note For example a complex phrase that would be difficult to play live can be assigned to a note of the keyboard and played with one finger at the appropriate moment Since up to eight patterns can be playing at once you can create patterns for separate instruments such as drums bass and keyboard and combine them to create a new song This performance can also be recorded allowing you to use it in a way similar to phrase sampling Song Phrase track 16 J Phrase track 15 Aes i Phrase track 2 Phrase track 1 Pattern track Pattern Pattern Pattern Pattern 1 2 99 100 DJ5 D5J6 10 Before You Use the RPS Function Record a Pattern Before you use the RPS function you must record the desired phrase in a pattern For details on recording refer to Recording Your Performance as You Play It Realtime Recording p 129 or Inputting Data One Step at a Time Step Recording p 132 von Only note messages should be recorded in a pattern If a large amount of MIDI data is recorded in a pattern using RPS to play back the pattern can caus
361. o a range for normal playing and a range for arpeggio playing This setting for instance allows you to play arpeggios with the left hand and a melody with the right hand Performance Edit Edit Fantasm General Zone West End Bs SBS Parti Rr io zoel 2 3 4 ies Transmit Channel 1 2 3 4 Rhythe Pin Int Switch oN ow ON ON Controller Ext Switch ON oM JON OFF Ext Bank Select MSB Ext Bank Select LSB Part Ext Program Number MIDI Ext Level Effects Ext Pan id 1 H i IA AAZ P X Write J Init Copy To set the lower limit of the range use CURSOR to move the cursor to Key Range Lower To set the upper limit of the range move the cursor to Key Range Upper Press or gt to select the zone whose range you want to set Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the range By specifying sections for different zones so that they overlap each other you can combine two or more patches only in a specific section When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and begin playing 1 2 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 As described in the procedure for Combining and Playing Sounds Together Layer p 87 turn on the Internal Switch for the zone that is connected to the part whose sound you want to play Make sure that the Performance Edi
362. o select the number to which you wish to register The number you select here corresponds to 1 8 6 Press 5 Regist to execute the registration HINT By pressing 6 Remove you can cancel the patch registration that is selected in the Favorite List window By pressing 7 Prevu you can audition the sound of the registered patch Phrase Preview 7 When you have finished registering favorite sounds press EXIT to close the Favorite List window Creating a Patch Functions of Patch Parameters This section explains the functions the different patch parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters MEMD Parameters marked with a can be controlled using specified MIDI messages Matrix Control Settings in the Control screen will determine how these parameters are controlled p 54 Settings Common to the Entire Patch General Patch Edit Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 1 v 27 lv av Tone Select 4 General Arpeggio Patch Name Generationxy i Patch Category ABINATION Controller Uoice Priority AS Effects Analog Feel g MFX Mono Poly POLY ooo 8 MFX Control Resonance Offset 8 Chorus Patch Tone CD GO CD co Reverb Env Mode sust susr susr susr SA Delay Mode HORM HORM HORM HORM Delay Time g g g g Rx Bender OH ON ON OH a L IZ J Init Copy For details on the setti
363. o select the zone that you set in step 5 Playing in Performance Mode 9 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the range of notes This specifies the range of the zone that is connected to the part that will be played by the arpeggios 10 Press or to select a zone that is connected to a part that is not playing arpeggios 11 Set the key range of the zones linked to the parts other than the part for which arpeggios are played so that this range does not overlap with the key range over which the arpeggios are played 12 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and begin playing The zone that plays the arpeggio will be displayed as ARP and will be enabled when you press ARPEGGIO Playing Rhythm Patterns in a Specific Region of the Keyboard In Performance mode you can create a split keyboard setup that divides the keyboard into a region for normal keyboard playing and a separate region for playing rhythm patterns For example you could hold a rhythm pattern while you play a melody In addition you could specify a region for arpeggio performance and use this to produce an accompaniment while you play the melody an easy way to produce ensemble performances 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen p 84 2 As described in the procedure for Combining and Playing Sounds Together Layer p 87 turn on the Internal Switch for the zone t
364. of the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq and cuts the rest This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds HPF High Pass Filter This cuts the frequencies in the region below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones PKG Peaking Filter This emphasizes the frequencies in the region of the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq You can use this to create wah wah effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency cyclically LPF2 Low Pass Filter 2 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq are cut the sensitivity of this filter is half that of the LPF This makes it a comparatively warmer low pass filter This filter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano LPF3 Low Pass Filter 3 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq are cut the sensitivity of this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency While this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds the nuance it exhibits differs from that of the LPF2 even with the same TVF Envelope settings yon If you set LPF2 or LPF3 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored Cutoff Freq Cutoff Frequency x Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components Value 0 127 With LPF LPF2 LPF3 selected for the
365. ol source 1 4 ss Multi effects dry send level multitimbre Multi effects dry send level patch sss Multi effects dry send level performance ssss 172 Multi effects dry send level rhythm set sss 168 Multi effects output assign multitimbre sss 172 Multi effects output assign patch Multi effects output assign performance sss Multi effects output assign rhythm set sss Multi effects reverb send level multitimbre Multi effects reverb send level patch Multi effects reverb send level performance e Multi effects reverb send level rhythm set Multi effects select ss Multi effects type Multi effects type multitimbre Multi effects type performance is Multi effects type rhythm set sssssssssssseeenee Multi timbral sound generator sss Multitimbre How a multitimbre is organized sss 20 Multitimbre group rtt tee ntt idee 107 Multitimbre parameters 115 Multitimbre settings 112 Selecting a multitimbre 107 Multitimbre control channel sse 182 Multitimbre Copy ect germ deer eo e etn destina 113 Multitimbre Ctrl Ch 182 Multitimbre Edit 112 170 eU M H 176 Generali 115 MEX ee RE EE edes 17
366. om is compatible with both General MIDI and General MIDI 2 standards Any General MIDI and or General MIDI 2 compatible music data GM score can be played back on the Fantom General MIDI General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 15 Panel Descriptions Front Panel Roland
367. ompress Tone Sw DO SF Foot Ture CHO Delay REU SRU Hall DBeam hate pee Compress Realtime Control e roots REV SRU Ham cutort Resonance Breath decay Time Se KB Portamento EB Mono Poly ED oct Down GD octup cutott Resonance Breath Q Decay Time SSE GB Portamento E Mono Poly EB oct Down GD octup a A Indicates the functions that are assigned to each realtime controller knob 6 and button Ii The value will be displayed when you turn the knob Favorite Sound Bank 1 Dre Ha Tight Br AU Trom LegatoJ Soaring lass bone upitr Hrns2 Indicates the names of the patches or rhythm sets that can be selected by 1 8 31 Playing in Patch Mode Selecting a Patch The Fantom has six patch groups including the User group and Preset groups A E and GM with each group storing 128 patches 256 in GM for a total of 1 024 patches What s more you can further expand your options by installing up to three optional Wave Expansion Boards one SR JV80 two SRX series enabling you to select from a huge assortment of available patches USER This is the group inside the Fantom which can be rewritten patches you yourself create can be stored in this group The Fantom includes 128 preset patches PR A E Preset A E This is the group inside the Fantom which cannot be rewritten However you may modify the settings of the currently selected patch and then store the modified patch in User memory Banks A E a
368. one Name Assign Type Mute Group Env Mode Bend Range Rx Expression Rx Hold 1 Rx Pan Mode CONTINUOUS write Init Copy Parameter list Sound Parameter List 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify MEMO Some of the parameters have a MJ symbol This indicates that if you press LIST when setting one of these parameters the related window will appear For example if you press LIST at a parameter that requires you to specify a name the Name window will appear When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings screen a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen In such cases press W to scroll the screen downward HINT If you have selected a screen of parameters that can be specified individually for each rhythm tone move the cursor to Key located in the upper part of the Rhythm Edit screen and specify the key rhythm tone whose settings you want to edit You can also press a note on the keyboard to specify the key Toswitch a wave on off move the cursor to the Wave Switch in the upper part of the Rhythm Edit screen and make the desired settings From the left these are Wave Switches 1 4 Assigning a check mark W will turn the wave on and removing the check mark will turn it off 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to complete a rhythm set
369. one settings in realtime by playing patches f you want to use common controllers for the entire Fantom select SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRLA MIDI messages used as System Control 1 4 are set with the Sys Ctrl 1 4 Source parameters SYSTEM Control p 184 Creating a Patch yon There are parameters that determine whether or not Pitch Bend Controller Number 11 Expression and Controller Number 64 Hold 1 are received p 51 When these settings are ON and the MIDI messages are received then when any change is made in the settings of the desired parameter the Pitch Bend Expression and Hold 1 settings also change simultaneously If you want to change the targeted parameters only then set these to OFF There are parameters that let you specify whether specific MIDI messages will be received for each channel in a multitimbre or performance p 108 p 119 When a patch with Matrix Control settings is assigned to a part confirm that any MIDI messages used for the Matrix Control will be received If the Fantom is set up such that reception of MIDI messages is disabled then the Matrix Control will not function Destination 1 4 Matrix Control Destination 1 4 Matrix Control Destination selects the tone parameter that is to be controlled when using the Matrix Control The following parameters can be controlled When not controlling parameters with the Matrix Control set this to OFF Up to four parameters can be specifi
370. ongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Note Assign Rhythm Pattern Note Assign Specify the note name of the lowest note in the key range that will play the Rhythm pattern The Rhythm pattern can be played ina one octave range starting from the key you specify here Value C 1 G9 Key Trigger Rhythm Pattern Key Trigger Turn this ON if you want the rhythm pattern to start at the moment that you press the key If you want the rhythm pattern to start playing in synchronization with the sequencer or arpeggio turn this OFF Value OFF ON 75 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set Realtime Controller D Beam Controller Settings Controller TL Ec tO Kit 1 DRM Key Ta et WaveSwitch 7 2 a a General Knob Rhythm Ptn a Controller Assign mm PTH ACCENT PTH SHFFLE Effects Switch MFX a 2 MFX Control Assign PINHOLD OFF Mode LATCH LATCH Ei Reverb DBeam id Switch orr Range Lower e Assign M BRERTH Range Upper 127 Polarity STANDARD a gt LI J Write Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 Knob Assign 1 4 Realtime Control Knob Assign 1 4 Specify the functions that will be controlled by the HI 0 knobs Value OFF The realtime control knob will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controll
371. onttoll r 1e ete taedet ei etes 184 EO General PrGVIeW 4 eerie tie i eee ette esit deeem ice Scale Tune SEGUEN o Udo Re dese dien ME System Exclusive Edit tectis System exclusive message ss System f hction au e eee Neteco e te System function settings System parameters ss System Initialize mise ns etie dte dee T Tempo patch au orae oe n e eus Tempo rhythm set Tempo recording ss Tempo Sync rhythm wave sss 78 Tempo Sync tone TEMPO tack se epe Rent tener Time Fitness ATA aerem duci eiat Time SIMA CULE E MT TMT Control Sw TMT control switch issus 56 EME el Control iicet eh bee eet ttis 58 TMT velocity control switch sss 58 Tone How a tone is organized sss 19 Tone on off 2 5 ne Rs n deren P ened 36 Tone C Tune ie deett sh bec i e e etae 60 Tone Chorus Send Level Tone Coarse Tune Tone Delay z Tone delay mode ss Ton delay time ec eee nee ee e e aD ER Tone Dry Send Level E Tone E TUNE ss nn nn rene Tone Fine Tain sern oreta a ient ederet rene edere dria Tone Level rhythm tone ss 82 Tone Level tone 5 trente tirer peris 64 Tone NAME eet ire rtr ERO RT ARR Pt e RR A ass ate 74 Tone Output Assign soneran e eea aa aeaiia 168 Tone Pan CONE oe urn des teret ette t eee Creo trt terere 65 Tone receive pitch bend switch
372. opy all Note or Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C 1 G9 To copy C4 Note Polyphonic Aftertouch data specify C4 C4 If you want to copy all controller numbers set this to 0 127 If you want to copy all program numbers set this to 1 128 To copy number 4 set 4 4 To copy numbers from 3 to 14 specify 3 14 Channel MIDI Channel Selects the MIDI channel of the data to be copied When you want to copy all the sequencer data set this parameter to ALL To copy only the sequencer data of a specific MIDI channel select the MIDI channel Value ALL 1 16 von If you set the source track to TEMPO or if the Status parameter is set to EXC TUNE or PTN the Channel parameter will not be available 8 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation 144 Editing Songs Inserting a Blank Measure Insert Measure This function inserts blank measures into a specified song position As you can set the time signature of the blank measures this is convenient when inserting a phrase having a different time signature in the middle of a song 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Insert Measure and then press 8 Select A message of INSERT MEASURE Select target point appears 4 Use
373. opy are available Multitimbre Name Copy Multitimbre Effects Copy and Multitimbre Part Copy You should select the one that is relevant to the type of data you wish to copy For details refer to Types of Multitimbre Copy following section 5 Move the cursor to Source and select the copy source sound 6 Press 8 Execute to execute the copy 7 Press EXIT to return to the Multitimbre Edit screen Types of Multitimbre Copy Multiimbre Name Copy NAME The name of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected multitimbre Multitimbre Copy Source Destination MULTITIMBRE USER Bee Temporary Multitimbre FANTOM Temp FANTOM Temp Multitimbre Effects Copy MFX CHORUS REVERB The effect settings of a patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected multitimbre Mode Source p Destination MULTITIMBRE user foot Temporary Multitimbre FANTOM Temp FANTOM Temp MFR IA MERTA Copy source multi Copy destination multi effects effects Effect contents that will be copied Mode MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings If you want to copy the multi effect settings of a multitimbre or performance select the MFX MFX A MFX C whose data will be copied Multitimbre Part Copy PART Part setti
374. or details regarding Arpeggio Style refer to Arpeggio Style List Sound Parameter List Variation Arpeggio Variation The arpeggiator provides several variations performance patterns for each arpeggio style This parameter selects the variation number The number of variations will differ according to the arpeggio style Motif Arpeggio Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound Value UP Notes you press will be sounded beginning from low to high DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from high to low UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from low to high and then back down from high to low RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded in random order NOTE ORDER Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered GLISSANDO Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the lowest and the highest notes CHORD All notes you press will sound simultaneously AUTO The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the lowest key that was pressed AUTO2 The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the highest key that was pressed PHRASE Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the pitch of tha
375. orus Reverb Send Level Reverb 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen p 106 2 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you want to change Mz1 4 4 STOP Control Ch OFF EE E 2 USER O01 FANTOM Temp User Library PartCh Se Mu Patch Volume Pan ie R PRST 911 XU Pop Kit enl wifi 81 Grand XU KIT 2 2 U Ac Bass i 9 oo 35 i Grand XU 100 or CHE Grand XU io0 X 6 or 215 21 Grand XU 196s 0 L2 Grand XU 166 m 0 H z Grand XU 166 m 0 Favorite Sound Bank i Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient Bend ac Soaring rp pet Sax hord Hrns2 To move the cursor to Out Chorus or Reverb move the cursor to Pan and then press b 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC set the value MEMD These settings are linked with the Receive Channel Level Pan Part Output Assign Part Chorus Send Level and Part Reverb Send Level parameters and can be saved as multitimbre settings p 118 p 115 p 172 109 Multitimbre Mode ing in Play Playing in Multiimbre Mode Recording an Arpeggio Performance The Arpeggiator provides for the play of the various notes in chords With the Arpeggiator you can play arpeggios that use the component notes of a chord just by pressing the chord When you use the sequencer to create a song it is also
376. ouch OCT UP Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP The sequencer will start stop PUNCH I O Manual punch in out recording will start stop TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you press the pedal PROG UP The next sound number will be selected PROG DOWN The previous sound number will be selected FAV UP The favorite sound of the next number or bank will be selected 1 8 FAV DOWN The favorite sound of the previous number or bank will be selected 8 1 ARP SW Switches the Arpeggiator on off PTN SW Switch Rhythm pattern playback on off 184 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Pedal 1 2 Polarity Selects the polarity of the pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Value STANDARD REVERSE Beam Sens D Beam Sensitivity This sets the D Beam Controller s sensitivity The higher the value set the more readily the D Beam Controller goes into effect Normally you will leave this at 5 Value 1 10 Equalizer settings EQ
377. ounded as TYPE 1 regardless of the displayed setting If you limit the keyboard area in which a tone will sound Keyboard Range p 58 or limit the range of velocities for which it will sound Velocity Range p 59 the result in areas or ranges where the tone does not sound is just as if the tone had been turned off This means that if TYPE 2 10 is selected and you create a keyboard area or velocity range in which one tone of a pair does not sound notes played in that area or range will be sounded by the other tone as TYPE 1 regardless of the displayed setting Booster 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 Booster Gain When a Structure Type of TYPE 3 or TYPE 4 is selected you can adjust the depth of the booster The booster increases the input signal in order to distort the sound This creates the distortion effect frequently used with electric guitars Higher settings will produce more distortion Value 0 6 12 18 57 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Booster The Booster is used to distort the incoming signal Booster level In addition to using this to create distortion you can use the waveform WG1 of one of the tones as an LFO which shifts the other waveform WG2 upward or downward to create modulation similar to PWM pulse width modulation This parameter works best when you use it in conjunction with the Wave Gain parameter PATCH Wave p 59 Uses WG1 as LFO Adjusts WG1 output Adds to WG1 Distorted area of the
378. p 127 Sequencer Sound Generator Phrase track 1 po Part 1 Phrase track 2 ch Part 2 Phrase track 3 get Part 3 Phrase track 4 poh Part 4 Phrase track 5 cs Part 5 Phrase track 6 qn Part 6 Phrase track 7 qn Part 7 Phrase track 8 qn sy Part 8 Phrase track 9 eo pato Phrase track 10 MC QU part 10 Phrase track 11 a c Part 11 Phrase track 12 E Part 12 Phrase track 13 qs y Part 13 Phrase track 14 ECRANS Part 14 Phrase track 15 qc y Part 15 Phrase track 16 cn Part 16 Overview of the Fantom Overview of the Fantom Positions for Storing a Song Sequencer Section o Internal Memory Sound Generator Section Song file Standard MIDI file Chain file m Data file ae Internal Memory The sequencer has an area called internal memory that can temporarily store one song So we call this temporary song Internal Song To play back a song saved to a disk with the Fantom it doesn t have to be loaded into internal memory Only when you re going to record a song or edit a song saved to disk do you have to load it into internal memory Since only one song can be worked on during recording or editing all the internal memory has
379. parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting MEMD The Key parameter Pattern parameter Playback Mode parameter and Mute Group parameter are set for each key Although the Fantom has a 76 note keyboard you can also make settings for all keys in the range of C 1 to G9 Settings for the Trigger Quantize parameter and Velocity Sens parameter are for the entire song Key Specify the key to which the pattern will be assigned You can also specify this by pressing a key on the keyboard Pattern Select the pattern number that will be assigned to the key The name of the selected pattern will be displayed below the pattern number Select OFF for keys to which you do not want to assign a pattern If you select STOP that key will be a Stop Trigger key that stops the currently playing patterns Valid Settings STOP OFF PTN001 PTN100 Mei The state of settings is shown graphically in the display The key being set is indicated by W keys to which a pattern is assigned are indicated by M and keys set to STOP are indicated by Keys for which nothing is displayed are turned OFF 159 Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function Playback Mode Specify how the pattern will be played Value LOOP1 The pattern will play back repeatedly as long as the key is held down LOOP2 The pattern will p
380. parameter for the SAX Sax Sax entire Fantom The changed setting will be remembered even if HLD Hard Lead Hard Synth Lead you switch patches or performances SLD Soft Lead Soft Synth Lead En HIT Hit amp Stab Orchestra Hit Hit If you assign OCT UP DOWN as a function to be controlled TEK Techno Synth Techno Synth by the realtime control buttons amp B 3 you can easily PLS Pulsating Pulsating Synth change the Octave Shift by pressing these buttons FX Synth FX Synth FX Noise etc SYN Other Synth Poly Synth BPD Bright Pad Bright Pad Synth SPD Soft Pad Soft Pad Synth VOX Vox Vox Choir PLK Plucked Plucked Harp etc ETH Ethnic Other Ethnic FRT Fretted Fretted Inst Mandolin etc PRC Percussion Percussion SFX Sound FX Sound FX BTS Beat amp Groove Beat and Groove DRM Drums Drum Set CMB Combination Other patches which use Split and Layer 35 Patch Mode ing in Play Playing in Patch Mode Transposing the Keyboard in Selecting the Tones That Will Semitone Steps Transpose Sound Tone On Off Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones Since a patch is a combination of up to four tones you can switch This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such unwanted tones out of the four off and get just the sound of a as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score specific tone 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 2 Use CURSO
381. pattern whose sequencer data you want to move and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Shift Clock window appears Track EISI Measure 5001 for Bias a Status ALL Range Channel ALL 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary 150 Track Check modify the track s or pattern whose sequencer data will be moved in units of one clock Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo clock PTNO01 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures in which the sequencer data will be moved in units of one clock If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Bias Specify the amount number of clocks by which the sequencer data will be moved Value 4800 4800 Status Selects the type of data to be shifted in time Value ALL All types of sequencer data NOTE Note P AFT Polyphonic Aftertouch C C Controller numbers PROG Program numbers C AFT Channel Aftertouch BEND Pitch Bend EXC System Exclusive messages Tune Tune Request PTN Pattern Call Message data Nore If the Track parameter is set to TEMPO the Status parameter will not be available Range
382. pecified locate position HINT You can hold down SHIFT and press BWD to jump to the preceding location position or hold down SHIFT and press FWD to jump to the next locate position Editing Songs Specifying the Area of a Song that will Repeat Loop Points When using Loop Play or Loop Recording you can use the loop points you specify here to specify the repeated area as an alternative to repeating the specified number of measures voe If the song time signature is different than the pattern time signature pattern beat the loop points will be displayed differently in the song and pattern 1 Load the song for which you want to set loop points p 136 2 Access the Song Setup window p 137 3 Use amp or w to select Loop and then press 8 Select The Loop window appears Repeat Start a091 Set _ Loop 4 Move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting End Repeat Select the number of repeats 1 99 If you want repetition to continue until you press STOP PLAY set this to INFINIT Start Specify the location at which repetition is to begin HINT If you press 7 Set the current location of the song will be set as the starting location End Specify the location at which repetition will end The location you specify here will not be included in the repeated area HINT If you press
383. perament the principle triads sound Substitute rhythm set wherever patch appears in a sentence pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose 1 Make sure the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen is displayed 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major Performance Edit Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play Creating a Performance third and a minor third On the Fantom you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F lt Example gt Note Equal tem Just Tempera Arabian Scale name perament ment tonic C 3 Press amp or wW to select a Part Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The patch assigned to the part is displayed in the Patch Edit Screen West End Bs SBS Part 1 Tone Switch 1f4 2 3i 4 Tone Select Wv 2 S 4 General General rpeadio Patch Name sr ce Patch Category Controller Voice Priority Effects Analog Feel MFX Mono Poly One te MFX Control Resonance Offset Chorus patch Tone c
384. pitch to change randomly set this to 0 These values are in units of cents 1 100th of a semitone Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Env Depth Envelope Depth Adjusts the effect of the Pitch Envelope Higher settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope Value 12 12 79 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set Env V Sens Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the pitch envelope If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env T1 V Sens Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the Pitch envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env T4 V Sens Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on Time 4 value of the pitch envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set th
385. ppy Disk Press 8 Execute to execute the operation After the disk has been checked a message of Disk Read Error will be displayed if there is a problem with the disk For details on the appropriate action refer to Error Messages Sound Parameter List Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Creating a Duplicate Disk MEM The f f ting steps d d th t of dat This function creates a complete copy of all data recorded on a disk om ici a D ra un and puts it on another disk Backup It is a good idea to make e backup copies of disks containing important data to prevent data When Backup complete is displayed backup has been loss even if one of the disks should be damaged completed von Backup operation uses internal memory If you wish to keep the song data currently in internal memory save it to disk before executing the backup operation It is not possible to make a backup copy of the master disk of Standard MIDI Files releases etc from Roland Itis not possible to create a backup copy of a 2DD disk on a 2HD disk and vice versa 1 Use the Fantom to format the disk that you want to use as a backup disk p 191 2 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 3 Press 6 Tools The Select Command window appears 4 Press or w to select Backup Floppy Disk and then press 8 Select The Backup Floppy Disk window appears Backup Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Progress
386. r device can be used on the Fantom it must be formatted on the Fantom von Please be aware that formatting will erase all the data already resident on the disk Master disk releases of Standard MIDI Files from Roland etc cannot be formatted 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press 6 Tools The Select Command window appears Quick Format Floppy Disk Full Format Floppu Disk Change Uolume Label Check Floppu Disk Backup Floppu Disk 3 Press or W to select Quick Format Floppy Disk and then press 8 Select The Quick Format Floppy Disk window appears Quick Format Floppy Disk Volume Label ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQ RSTUUWAY2 0123456789 4 O g B gt Insert Delete 4 Assign a name Volume Label to the disk and press 8 OK SEN For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 The Quick Format Floppy Disk window appears Quick Format Floppy Disk Press Execute to Quick Format Floppy Disk 5 Press 8 Execute to execute the operation yon If it is not possible to format using Quick Format Floppy Disk a message of You Cannot Quick Format This Disk will appear In this case select Full Format Floppy Disk in step 3 and format the disk 191 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Modifying the Name of the Disk This function changes the volume label that was
387. r down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone HINT The Fine Tune of the entire rhythm tone is set by the Tone Fine Tune parameter RHYTHM Pitch p 79 Wave Pan This specifies the pan of the waveform L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R HINT The pan of the entire rhythm tone is set by the Tone Pan parameter RHYTHM TV A p 82 Rnd Pan Sw Random Pan Switch Use this setting to cause the waveform s panning to change randomly each time a key is pressed ON or not OFF Value OFF ON The range of the panning change is set by the Rnd Pan Depth parameter RHYTHM TVA p 82 Alter Pan Sw Alternate Pan Switch This setting causes panning of the waveform to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed Set Alternate Pan Switch to ON to pan the Wave according to the Alter Pan Depth parameter RHYTHM TV A p 82 settings or to REV when you want the panning reversed If you do not want the panning to change each time a key is pressed set this to OFF Range OFF ON REV Creating a Rhythm Set Wave Level You can set the volume of the waveform Value 0 127 HINT The volume level of each rhythm tone is set with the Tone Level parameter RHYTHM TV AJ the volume levels of the entire rhythm set is set with the Rhythm Level parameter RHYTHM TVA p 82 Velocity Control Velocity Control Swi
388. r favorite musical styles or applications Two slots for the SRX series expansion boards allow the addition of high quality sounds using a maximum of 64 M bytes of high quality wave memory and another slot lets you install one of the wide selection of SR JV80 series expansion boards In addition to four parallel outputs which can be used as two stereo pairs S P DIF digital out both optical and coaxial is also provided The Fantom is a great match for any digital recording system Power effects including COSM effects The effects indispensable for synthesizer sound creation are provided in studio quality For reverb a DSP equivalent to SRV 3030 quality is built in delivering clear reverb with smooth decays The total of 90 types of multi effects M FX include not only effects such as RSS 3D delay and slicer but also effects that use Roland s proprietary COSM modeling technology such as guitar amp simulations guitar multi s bass multi s and keyboard multi s In Multitimbre mode and Performance mode three types of M FX can be used simultaneously letting you use different M FX effects on a desired part What s more a two band EQ is provided for each output jack Comprehensive music production with a superior performance sequencer based on the MRC Pro The Fantom contains a 16 track sequencer based on the MRC Pro sequencer delivering high resolution that captures every expressive detail of your performance and pro
389. r section are connected internally using a MIDI connection in Performance mode you can then make even more detailed settings affecting the way the connection works between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section as well as with an external MIDI device This allows the keyboard of the Fantom to freely control the internal sound generator or external sound generators as a master keyboard Changing the Connections between Keyboard and Sound Generator Zone In general connections within the Fantom are made by matching the MIDI transmit channel of the keyboard zone with the MIDI receive channel of the sound generator part Then you can specify whether the internal sound generator will be played or an external sound generator connected to the MIDI OUT connector will be played Part 1 Pat2 Part 15 Part 16 Rx ch 1 Rx ch 2 Rx ch 15 Rx ch 16 anunanuual MIDI OUT Zone 15 Tx ch 15 Zone 16 Tx ch 16 Rx ch Receive Channel Tx ch Transmit Channel To change the connections between the keyboard and the sound generator make the following settings Zone Settings p 98 Transmit Channel Specify the MIDI transmit channel 1 16 of the keyboard zone Int Switch Internal Switch Turn this ON if you want to sound the internal sound generator of the Fantom Ext Switch External Switch Turn this ON if you want to sound an external sound generator conn
390. r settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you don t want the tone to sound at all when a note below the keyboard range is played set this parameter to 0 Value 0 127 Level Fade Upper Range Upper Fade Lower Range Lower 117 Creating a Multitimbre Voice Reserve This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each part when more than 64 voices are played simultaneously Value 0 63 FUL yon It is not possible for the settings of all parts to total an amount greater than 64 The remaining number of available voices will be displayed at rest Pay attention to this readout as you make set the Voice Reserve parameter Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used The Fantom is able to play up to 64 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of sounds actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the patches and the number of Waves used in the tones The following method is used to calculate the number of sounds used for one patch being played Number of Sounds Being Played x Number of Tones Used by Patches Being Played x Number of Waves Used in the Tones 118 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI FRNTOM Temp General Part MIDI Grand XU PNO Part 1 Part PART 1 2 3 d gt
391. rameters are Note Number which indicates the name of the note On Velocity which specifies the force with which the key is pressed Gate Time which specifies the duration of the note and Off Velocity which determines the speed with which the key is released Poly Aft Polyphonic Aftertouch This MIDI messages applies aftertouch to an individual note From the left the parameters are Note Number which specifies the key and Value which specifies the depth of the aftertouch Ctrl Change Control Change This MIDI message applies various effects such as modulation or expression The controller number CC selects the function and Value specifies the depth of the effect D For the function corresponding to each controller number refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List Prog Change Program Change This MIDI message switches sounds The program number PC selects the sound Channel Aft Channel Aftertouch This MIDI message applies aftertouch to an entire MIDI channel Value specifies the depth of the aftertouch Pitch Bend This MIDI message changes the pitch The value specifies the amount of pitch change 154 Tune Request This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself Ptn Pattern Call message This is data that causes a pattern to play back Use the Number parameter to select the pattern number The pattern name is shown in parentheses and the location at which the pa
392. rary Patch Generationay Grand xu 4 Move the cursor to Mode and select the data that you wish to copy Three types of copy are available Patch Name Copy Patch Effects Copy and Patch Tone Copy You should select the one that is relevant to the type of data you wish to copy For details refer to Types of Patch Copy following section 5 Move the cursor to Source and select the copy source sound 6 Press 8 Execute to execute the copy 7 Press EXIT to return to the Patch Edit screen 43 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Types of Patch Copy Patch Name Copy NAME The name of the patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected patch Destination USER 4961 gt Temporary Patch Generationxy Grand XU Patch Effects Copy MFX CHORUS REVERB The effect settings of the patch rhythm set multitimbre or performance will be copied to the currently selected patch Destination USER 661 gt Temporary Patch Generationxu Grand Xu MFX Execute Effect contents that will be copied Mode MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings If you want to copy the multi effect settings of a multitimbre or performance select the MFX MFX A MFX C whose data will be copied Patch Tone Copy TONE Tone settings of a patch will be copied to the tone you specify of
393. rce p Destination PERFORMANCE USER Hoot Temporary Performance Fantasm Fantasm Parthi Parthi Execute Copy destination part Copy source part To specify the currently selected performance as the copy source set Source to TEMP Creating a Performance Saving Performance You ve Created Write Changes you make to sound settings are temporary and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound If you want to keep the modified sound you must save it in the internal USER group user memory When you modify the settings of a performance the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen will indicate EDITED Once you save the performance into internal memory user memory the EDITED indication goes away von When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure p 91 1 Make sure that performance you wish to save is selected 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears Performance Edit Part Patch Edit Part Information System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play 3 Press or w to select Performance Edit and then press 8 Select The Performance Edit screen appears Performance Edit NM Edit Fantasm Rhyt
394. rd MIDI File releases etc from Roland Song data with copyrighted information cannot be re saved in the Standard MIDI File format When saving data in Standard MIDI File format Pattern track and muted Phrase track data will not be saved However Pattern Call messages recorded on a Phrase track will be converted into actual sequencer data as they are saved Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 N Press 2 Save The Select Command window appears Format gt Format 1 hain File 3 Press amp or W to select the format in which the data will be saved Save Sound File User memory patches rhythm sets multitimbres performances and the system settings and favorite list settings will be saved to disk as a single data file The file name extension SVD is automatically attached Save Song File Saves song in internal memory to disk in the MRC Pro song format The settings of the currently selected multitimbre performance will also be saved together with this The file name extension SVD is automatically attached Save SMF Format 0 Converts a song in internal memory to Standard MIDI File format 0 data one Phrase track contains the entire sequencer data and saves it to disk The file name extension MID is automatically attached Save SMF Format 1 Converts a song in internal memory to Standard MIDI File format 1 data sequencer data consists of two or more Phrase tracks and saves it to di
395. reen 2 Access the Song Edit screen or the Pattern Edit screen p 136 3 Press 6 Step Rec The REC indicator will blink and the Step Recording Standby window appears Step Recording Standby Start Point oi eoo Track TRK 1 Mode MIX 4 Make settings for step recording Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set it Start Point Specify the location measure beat clock at which recording will begin Track Specify the recording destination phrase track or pattern Value TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTN 001 PTN 100 The specified pattern Mode Recording Mode Select how recording is to take place Value MIX Mix recording will be carried out Normally you will record using this method If a performance has already been recorded on the recording destination track your newly recorded performance will be added to the existing performance without erasing it REPLACE Replace recording will be carried out If a performance has already been recorded on the recording destination track it will be erased as you record your new performance Use this when you want to re record Recording Songs 5 Press 8 Step Rec The REC indicator will light and the Step Recording window appears 6 Press 3 Note The following window appears Step Recording Track TRK 1 Mode Mix 1 01 000 gt
396. ress 8 Rehersl MFX A Stereo Flanger MFX B Space D Se MFX C Stereo Phaser CHO Delay REV SRU Room cutors E Arp Hold p Realtime Control Resonance E Ptn nota Press 8 Record Favorite Sound Recording with the Realtime Recording window hidden omer ra RT Press REC to close Erase JReherst SSS Bank 1 Press REC Rehearsing with the Realtime Recording window displayed Mz21 Ca Tl Rehearsing oo Trans c User Library ControlCh 16 o USER 01 Fantasm ZONE D Beam MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay Se MFX B Space D REU SRU Room MFX C Stereo Phaser Realtime Control cutort Resonance Realtime Recording GD Arp rois E Ptn Hoi Press REC to close ee el 77 Favorite Sound Bank 1 Press REC Rehearsing with the Realtime Recording window hidden PERFORMANCE PLAY Mis G KS PERFORMANCE PLAY M23 Aa x oo Trans c oe Internaisong Betfe Trans c os an a foo Internal Song Recording Rehearsing User Library Control Ch 16 J 120 User Library Control Ch 16 J120 USER Fantasm USER 9 Fantasm _ ZOME mmm _ e RHY 0050 RHY ml Hold down SHIFT D Beam MFX A Stereo Flanger CHO Delay and press REC D Bean MFX R Stereo Flanger CHO Delay Seo MFX B
397. riginally shipped and put the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it Use a Philips screwdriver that is suitable for the size of the screw a number 2 screwdriver If an unsuitable screwdriver is used the head of the screw may be stripped To remove a screw rotate the screwdriver counter clockwise To tighten the screws rotate the screwdriver clockwise loosen amp tighten When installing Wave Expansion Boards remove only the specified screws Be careful that the screws you remove do not drop into the interior of the Fantom Do not leave the bottom cover removed After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards is complete be sure to replace the cover Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals Be careful not to cut your hand on the opening for installing the board Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again When circuit board installation is complete double check your work Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board SR JV80 SRX series Quick Start p 3 4 Install only the specified circuit board s SR JV80 SRX series Remove only the specified screws p 196 How to Install a Wave Expansion Board Install the Wave Expansion Boards after removing the bottom panel cover SR JV8
398. rity setting of the patch will apply Voice Reserve The Fantom has a Voice Reserve function that lets you reserve a minimum number of notes that will always be available for each part For example if Voice Reserve is set to 10 for part 16 part 16 will always have 10 notes of sound producing capacity available to it even if a total of more than 64 notes total for all parts are being requested When you make Voice Reserve settings you need to take into account the number of notes you want to play on each part as well as the number of tones used by the selected patch p 102 p 118 21 Overview of the Fantom About Memory Patch and performance settings are stored in what is referred to as memory There are three kind of memory temporary rewritable and non rewritable Fantom Preset E PR E Preset D PR D Preset C PR C Preset B PR B Preset A PR A Patch Patch 128 128 Rhythm Set Rhythm Set 16 1 GM GM2 16 Multitimbre Patch Multitimbre 16 1 256 16 Performance Rhythm Set Performance 64 1 9 64 System User USER sa Select z sea Temporary Area Select EXP C Slot XP C EXP B Slot XP B Patch EXP A Slot XP A 128 Data File SVD Rhythm Set Load 16 Multitimbre Save 16 Performance Wave Expansion Board 64
399. roe c Lied En s E mie M ETET 62 Cutoff Offset multitimbre part ss 116 C toff Offset Patch enit 47 Cutoff Offset performance part 101 Cutoff V Curve rhythm tone ss 81 Cutoff V Curve tone ins 63 Cutoff velocity sensitivity rhythm tone sssssss 81 Cutoff velocity sensitivity tone 63 Cutoff V Sens rhythm tone 81 Cu toff V Sens tone enano e Ih itinere irte erbe nea 63 D BELT R D Beam assign performance D Beam assign rhythm set sss D Beam controller rti rte tte tete a D Beam polarity patch D Beam polarity performance D Beam polarity rhythm set 377 D Beam range lower patch sssssssssssseeeeee 53 D Beam range lower performance sse 98 D Beam range lower rhythm set 77 D Beam range upper patch 53 D Beam range upper performance 98 D Beam range upper rhythm set sss 77 D Beam sensitivity eei pete rte Hid ee eene dg reds D Beam switch performance D Beam switch rhythm set sse ees D Be ri zorne number 21 5 mde nece ae ede D ta filez es ec Milo decer Mee eo sers Data Thin eon oM Meo Me Data Transfer ne eret Ds MN Mer Data transfer Transmitting data to an external MIDI device 194 Transmitting data to user memory 195 de ETE 17 29 Decay Time Offset 101 116 Dela Mode ttti ente te
400. rom the central value downward Value 100 50 0 50 100 1 2 Rate Detune LFO 1 LFO2 Rate Detune LFO Rate Detune makes subtle changes in the LFO cycle rate 1 2 Rate parameter each time a key is pressed Higher settings will cause greater change Value 0 127 1 2 Delay Time LFO 1 LFO2 Delay Time Delay Time LFO Delay Time specifies the time elapsed before the LFO effect is applied the effect continues after the key is pressed or released Value 0 127 D After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 68 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved HINT When using violin wind or certain other instrument sounds in a performance rather than having vibrato added immediately after the sounds are played it can be effective to add the vibrato after the note is drawn out somewhat If you set the 1 2 Delay Time in conjunction with the 1 2 Pitch Depth parameter and 1 2 Rate parameter the vibrato will be applied automatically following a certain interval after the key is pressed This effect is called Delay Vibrato 1 2 Delay Time KF LFO1 LFO2 Delay Time Key Follow Adjusts the value for the 1 2 Delay Time parameter depending on the key position relative to the C4 key center C To decrease the time that elapses before the LFO effect is applied the effect is continuous with each higher key that is pressed in the upper registers select a positive value to increase the elapsed time se
401. ronto Office Unit 2 109 Woodbine Downs Blvd Etobicoke ON M9W 6Y1 CANADA TEL 0416 213 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of January 1 2002 Roland 02780689 02 3 A8 41N Roland Corporation Changes in Operation Linked settings for Loop mode See pp 139 125 130 in the Owner s Manual In the Loop window you can now select the loop modes POINT 1 MEAS 2 MEAS 4 MEAS 8 MEAS 16 MEAS SONG ALL The new Loop window Repeat Mode POINT Start ooo o1 eae End eee2 e1 888 Set iter The selection here is linked with both Loop Play and Loop Recording In other words the settings you make in the Loop window will be applied to the Loop settings for playback as well as to the loop settings for recording in the Recording Standby window Loop on off settings are also linked between the various PATCH PLAY PERFORMANCE PLAY and MULTITIMBRE PLAY screens and in the Loop Song Edit and Recording Standby windows Category name display in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen See pp 106 34 in the Owner s Manual If the Patch List window or the Rhythm List window are set to display sorted by categories i e when 7 Ctg has a check mark W assigned the category name for the selected patch will be displayed in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen MULTITIMBRE PLAY M 1 Bet e Transit Us
402. rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer or table except as specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Qor coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter
403. rt MIDI Effects a gt X Write J Init Copy 4 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Press 1 A or 2 to select the tab for the editing group that contains the parameter you wish to edit D For details on the parameter groupings refer to Parameter list Sound Parameter List 5 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify MEMD Some of the parameters have a B symbol This indicates that if you press LIST when setting one of these parameters the related window will appear For example if you press LIST at a parameter that requires you to specify a name the Name window will appear When all the parameters cannot be shown within a single settings screen a scroll bar will be displayed at the right side of the screen In such cases press W to scroll the screen downward HINT If you have selected a screen for parameters that can be set for each part or zone first move the cursor to the parameter that you wish to edit and then press 4 or gt to select the part or zone 6 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 7 Repeat steps 4 6 to complete a performance 8 If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 93 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen If you return to the PERFORMANCE PLAY scre
404. rther details refer to Before Using Floppy Disks Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong magnetic field e g loudspeakers nstall the unit on a solid level surface Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit To avoid possible breakdown do not use the unit in a wet area such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound IMPORTANT NOTES Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of i
405. rts other than the part you select here will not sound Creating a Multiimbre Mute Switch Temporarily mutes MUT or releases the mute OFF for the performance of each part Use this setting when for example you want to use the instrument for karaoke by muting the part playing the melody or when you want to play something using a separate sound module Value OFF MUT MEMD The Mute Switch parameter does not turn the part off but sets the volume to minimum so that no sound is heard Therefore MIDI messages are still received MIDI Filter Program Change Receive Program Change Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark v will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Bank Select Receive Bank Select Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Pitch Bend Receive Pitch Bend Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Channel Pressure Receive Channel Pressure Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Channel Pressure messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark
406. runge USER 079 Mood Ringz USER 080 Soff Machine USER 081 USER 082 Do USER 083 USER 084 R mod Vox USER 085 R amp Ballad Mix LT Execute An indication of EDITED will appear for the part for which the assigned patch or rhythm set was edited If you want to edit the patch or rhythm set settings for more than one part press 3 A or 4 W to select the part Specify the save destination patch and press 8 Execute The patch or rhythm set will be saved then you ll be returned to the Performance Write window where you need to save the performance once again Registering a Favorite Performance Favorite Sound You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used performances in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound By using this function you can rapidly select favorite performances from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board You can register a total of 64 sounds 8 sounds x 8 banks as favorite sounds IN For details on selecting a favorite sound refer to Selecting Favorite Performances Favorite Sound p 86 93 Creating a Performance Creating a Performance Using 1 8 to Register 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and select the performance that you wish to register p 85 2 Hold down JUMP BANK and press a 1 8 to select the bank in which you wish to register the sound 3 Hold down SHIFT REGISTRY and press a 1 8 to select the
407. s 8 Execute to proceed When the operation is completed the display will briefly indicate Complete HINT To cancel the operation press EXIT 7 Press EXIT to return to the previous page 187 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Selecting the Type of Files Displayed in the File List View By specifying the type of files that are displayed in the file list of the Disk Utility screen you can locate a desired file on disk more rapidly 1 Access the Disk Utility screen p 187 2 Press 8 View The View Switch window appears SUD Sound File SVQ Song File SNG MRC File v MID SMF SUC Chain File Jan Off AN On EXE 3 Press or w to select the type of files that will be displayed in the file list SVD Sound File These are data files that contain a complete collection of the patch rhythm set multitimbre performance system and favorite list settings The filename extension is SVD SVQ Song File These are files in MRC Pro song format The filename extension is SVQ SNG S MRC File These are files in S MRC song format The filename extension is SNG MID SMF These are Standard MIDI Files The filename extension is MID SVC Chain File These are chain files containing Chain Play settings The filename extension is SVC 4 Press 8 On Off to switch the file list between displayed or
408. s FWD Jump to the previous locate position Hold down SHIFT and press BWD Jump to the next locate position Hold down SHIFT and press FWD Jump to the beginning of the song Press RESET ore A certain amount of time may be required for fast forward rewind or jump during Quick Play Song playback will be interrupted if you jump to the beginning or end of the song while the song is playing Playing Back Correctly from the Middle of the Song MIDI Update When you play back from the middle of a song for example after fast forward or rewind the correct patch may not be selected or the pitch may be incorrect This is because the MIDI messages in the area that you skipped have not been transmitted to the sound generator In such cases you can use the MIDI Update function When you perform MIDI Update the MIDI messages other than Note messages from the beginning of the song until the location to which you moved will be transmitted to the sound generator ensuring that the sound generator will be in the correct state for the resumption of playback 1 Make sure that song playback is stopped ne It is not possible to perform MIDI Update while the song is playing 2 Hold down SHIFT and press STOP PLAY The display will indicate MIDI Update while processing takes place and when finished will indicate Complete Playing Back a Song Muting the Playback of a Specific Instrument If yo
409. s press ARPEGGIO again so the indicator turns off Holding an Arpeggio By using the following procedure you can produce arpeggios even Simulating a Rhythm Guitar You can simulate a rhythm guitar by following the procedure below 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select a guitar patch p 31 2 Hold down JUMP and press ARPEGGIO The Arpeggio window appears Arpeggio Style Variation Motif Key Trigger Tempo SEQ OFF 1 DOWN OFF 126 HOTE VALUES Accent Rate Shuffle Rate Shuffle Resolution Velocity Octave Range 3 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Style 4 Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to select the one you want from AG CUTTING PHR 5 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on 6 Play achord on the keyboard without continuing to press the keyboard Guitar strumming will begin according to the notes in the chord you pressed HINT If you assign Cutoff CC74 or Resonance CC71 to the realtime control knobs p 163 and turn these knobs while you play you 1 Hold down SHIFT and press ARPEGGIO The ARPEGGIO indicator will begin blinking 2 Play a chord 3 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly 4 To cancel Arpeggio Hold hold down SHIFT and press ARPEGGIO simultaneously once again When Using a Hold Pedal If you play an arpeggio whi
410. s Used in the Tones Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI Performance Edit iz c General Part MIDI West End Bs SBS Parti Arpeggio PRTI 2 3 4 a o Receive Channel 1 2 1 4 Rhythm Ptn Receive Switch oH ON ON ON Controller Solo Part Select Mute Switch OFF OFF OFF OFF Zone Part MIDI Filter een Program Change Effects Bank Select Y Pitch Bend Channel Pressure Poly Key Pressure Modulation A L write J Init Copy MiDI ch 5 2 s 2 amp SISISISIS vv v PALA v v vv v PAPA v Cala v Pata amp SISISISISIS amp SISISISIS For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Performance Settings p 91 Part MIDI Receive Channel Specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part Value 1 16 von If this is set to the same channel as the Performance Ctrl Ch parameter SYSTEM MID I attempting to switch patches by transmitting only a program change from an external device will actually cause the performance to change If you want to switch patches change the Performance Ctrl Ch parameter to another number p 182 or transmit bank select and program change messages together O amp A p 14 Receive Switch For each part specify whether MIDI messages will be received ON or not OFF If this is OFF the part will respond to the keyboard bu
411. s applied If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a positive direction ie a higher value toward the right or faster etc from its current setting select a positive value If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a negative direction i e a lower value toward the left or slower etc from its current setting select a negative value When both positive and negative are selected the changes are greater as the value increases Set it to 0 if you don t want this effect Value 63 63 Tone 1 4 Tone Control Switch 1 4 Matrix Control Tone selects the tone to which the effect is applied when using the Matrix Control Value V The effect will be applied R The effect will be applied in reverse TMT Control Sw TMT Control Switch Use the Matrix Control to enable ON or disable OFF sounding of different tones Value OFF ON yon You can also cause different tones to sound in response to notes played at different strengths velocity on the keyboard p 58 However the Matrix Control and the keyboard velocity cannot be used simultaneously to make different tones to sound When you want to make the different tones to sound set the TMT Vel Control parameter PATCH TMT to OFF Changing How a Tone Is Sounded TMT EX Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 1v 2v Slv 4 Tone Select iv 2 3 4 a Controller TMT D CO
412. s is useful for creating dramatic sounds or sound effects FXM Color Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation Higher settings result in a grainier sound while lower settings result in a more metallic sound Value 1 4 FXM Depth Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM Value 0 16 Tempo Sync Wave Tempo Sync When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock tempo set this to ON This is valid only when an optional Wave Expansion Board such as SR JV80 10 BASS amp DRUMS is installed and you have selected a tone which uses a waveform that displays tempo BPM Value OFF ON note When the Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON settings related to Pitch p 79 and FXM p 78 are disabled Phrase Loop Phrase loop refers to the repeated playback of a phrase that s been pulled out of a song e g by using a sampler One technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of a Phrase from a pre existing song in a certain genre for example dance music and then creating a new song with that Phrase used as the basic motif This is referred to as Break Beats Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the waveform s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 HINT The Coarse Tune of the entire rhythm tone is set by the Tone Coarse parameter RHYTHM Pitch p 79 Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the waveform s sound up o
413. s sets the lowest velocity at which the tone will sound Make these settings when you want different tones to sound in response to notes played at different strengths Value 1 UPPER Vel Range Upper Velocity Range Upper This sets the highest velocity at which the tone will sound Make these settings when you want different tones to sound in response to notes played at different strengths Value LOWER 127 Nore If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper or the Upper below the Lower the other value will automatically be adjusted to the same setting MEMD When using the Matrix Control to have different tones played set the lowest value Lower and highest value Upper of the value of the MIDI message used Vel Fade Upper Velocity Fade Width Upper This determines what will happen to the tone s level when the tone is played at a velocity greater than its specified velocity range Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you want notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be sounded at all set this to 0 Value 0 127 Level Velocity Fade Lower Fade Upper Range Lower Range Upper Modifying Waveforms Wave LI NM Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 1 2v 3v 4v Tone Select 1v 2 3 4 Effects Wave co co co co MFX Wave Group INT IHT INT INT J 8452 6034 eese 6198 MFX Control Wave No m E Chorus Gain
414. s shown before you install the board yore If the same type of Wave Expansion Board is installed in the EXP B slot and the EXP C slot it will only be possible to select data from the Wave Expansion Board that was installed in the EXP B Connector slot 4 Use the Installation Tool supplied with the Wave Expansion Board to turn the holders in the LOCK direction so the board will be fastened in place Installation tool S lt 5 Use the screws that you removed in step 2 to fasten the cover back in place Checking the Installed Wave Expansion Boards After installation of the Wave Expansion Boards has been completed check to confirm that the installed boards are being recognized correctly 1 Turn on the power as described in Turning On the Power Quick Start p 4 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window The System Edit screen appears Verify that the name of the installed Wave Expansion Board is displayed General EINEN Local Switch Sequencer Master Tune MIDI Master Key Shift Controller Master Level EQ Patch Remain Mix Parallel Preview Output Gain Scale Tune Keyboard Velocity d ITE 7 MEDIUM Wave Expansion Board Version A SR JUS0 09 Sessn 1 00 B SRX 01DynamicDrm C SRX 82ConcertPno Jf o appears next to the installed slot name it s possible that the installed Wave Exp
415. s the save destination to make sure that it is one you don t mind overwriting This can help prevent important patches from being accidentally overwritten and lost 1 Follow the procedure in Saving Patches You ve Created Write through step 5 to select the save destination 2 Press 7 Compare The Patch Compare window appears making it possible to sound the currently selected save destination patch USER 001 Generation USER 002 Grand xu USER 003 G1c USER 004 Ch USER 005 Mu Or Save destination patch Generationxu amp USER 009 E USER 010 Ultra 3 Play the keyboard to sound the save destination patch then check whether you really want to overwrite it yon The patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played normally 4 If you wish to change the save destination re specify the save destination patch by using INC DEC 9 Press 7 Write to return to the Patch Write window a Press 8 Execute once again to execute the Save operation Registering a Favorite Patch Favorite Sound You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used patches in one place by registering them in the Favorite sound By using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board You can register a total of 64 sounds 8 sounds x 8 banks as favorite sounds ES For details o
416. s when selecting patches For details on the procedure refer to Selecting Favorite Patches Favorite Sound p 33 Playing in Patch Mode Playing a Rhythm Set 1 Select the rhythm set that you wish to play 2 Press a key on the keyboard to play a percussion instrument Below the rhythm set name the screen shows the note name of the key you pressed and the name of the percussion instrument rhythm tone name assigned to that key Hew Song Mz1 crs axo Gn ee internaisong CTI User Library Che Tx91 7 Rei 7 120 USER 001 R amp B Kit 1 Category DRM Drums Lock Rhy Tone C Z 01d Kick 4 4 STOP Bet e Transit Note name Rhythm tone name Playing Rhythm Patterns from the Keyboard The Fantom contains various Rhythm patterns Simply by pressing a single key you can play the Rhythm patterns 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select a rhythm set p 40 N Press RHYTHM to make the indicator light w Press a key to which a Rhythm pattern is assigned The Rhythm pattern assigned to the key you pressed will sound 4 To stop playing Rhythm patterns press RHYTHM once again to make the indicator go dark Holding the Playback of a Rhythm Pattern If you perform the following operation you can play the Rhythm pattern without having to continue holding down the key 1 Hold down SHIFT and press RHYTHM The RHYTHM indicator will begin blinking
417. s will be changed Value ALL Phrase Tracks 1 16 TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures whose gate times will be changed If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Bias Set this parameter if you wish to increase or decrease all gate times by a fixed amount If you want to extend all gate times by 10 set this to 10 Value 4800 4800 Magnify Set this parameter if you wish to increase or decrease gate times by a specified ratio When set to 100 no change is made A value of 101 or higher increases the gate time values of 99 or lower decrease the gate time For example to halve gate times set this parameter to 50 To double gate times set this parameter to 200 Value 0 200 Channel MIDI Channel Specifies the MIDI channel s of notes for which gate time will be modified If you wish to modify the gate time for notes of all MIDI channels set this parameter to ALL When changing the gate time for notes of a specific MIDI channel only select that MIDI channel using this parameter Value ALL 1 16 Range Specifies the range of note numbers for which gate time will be modified For instance if you wish to modify the gate time for a note range from C3 to C4 set this parameter to C3 C4 You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the k
418. sage into a pitch bend message D For details on each type of sequencer data refer to Sequencer Data Handled by a Phrase Track Pattern p 154 1 Access the Microscope window for the track or pattern whose sequencer data you want to edit p 153 2 Use 44 or to move the cursor to the sequencer data that you want to edit 3 Press 4 or gt to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 4 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to edit the value HINT When editing the Note Number of note or polyphonic aftertouch data or the On Velocity or Off Velocity of a note you can also specify the value by playing a key on the keyboard p If you want to edit a system exclusive message refer to Editing a System Exclusive Message below Editing a System Exclusive Message 1 Use or W to move the cursor to the location of the system exclusive message that you want to edit 2 Press gt to move the cursor to Ex The System Exclusive Edit window appears 29 29 OO 29 OO OO A 29 00 29 99 22 0A 89 91 92 93 04 O5 O6 07 0S 99 OR OB AC F Auto Calculate Checksum 1438 Step Eg Insert Delete OK 3 Press or to move the cursor to the data that you want to edit 155 Editing Songs Editing Songs 4 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to edit the value If you want to add data between FO and F7 move the cursor to that location and press 5 Insert A va
419. se refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 MIDI messages used as common matrix controls VELOCITY Velocity pressure you press a key with KEYFOLLOW Key follow keyboard position with C4 as 0 TEMPO The specified tempo patch tempo sequencer tempo or the tempo of an external MIDI sequencer LFO1 LFO 1 cycle rate LFO2 LFO 2 cycle rate PITCH ENV Pitch envelope TVF ENV TVF envelope TVA ENV TVA envelope MEMD Velocity and Key follow correspond to Note messages HINT You can use the tempo as a Matrix Control This lets you change the tone settings in realtime according to changes in the Tempo When synchronizing to the patch tempo set the Clock Source parameter PATCH General to PATCH and specify the patch tempo with the Tempo parameter PATCH General To synchronize to the sequencer tempo set the Clock Source parameter PATCH General to SEQUENCER set the Sync Mode parameter SYSTEM Sequencer to MASTER and specify the sequencer tempo with J in the upper part of the PLAY screen When synchronizing to the tempo of the connected MIDI sequencer set the Clock Source parameter PATCH General to SEQUENCER and set the Sync Mode parameter SYSTEM Sequencer to SLAVE MIDI Although there are no MIDI messages for LFO 1 through TVA Envelope they can be used as Matrix Control In this case you can change the t
420. se settings specify how the volume will change at each point relative to the standard volume the Rhythm Tone Level value specified in the TVA Screen Value 0 127 Ti T2 T3 T4 Level Time L1 L2 L3 A Note on Note off T Time L Level HINT The envelopes appearing at the lower part of the TVA settings screen graphically depict the current values of the settings Solid lines represent the TVA envelope while dotted lines are used for the TVF envelope This lets you compare the TVA and TVF envelopes while you make settings 83 Playing in Performance Mode Performance mode is where you can combine multiple sounds patches or rhythm sets to create complex sounds or use the Fantom as a master keyboard You can also create and play layers patches played together or splits separate patches played from different areas of the keyboard About the MIDI Connection Settings Zone and Part Although the Fantom s keyboard controller section and sound generator section are connected internally using a MIDI connection in Performance mode you can then make even more detailed settings affecting the way the connection works between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section as well as with an external MIDI device At the factory standard settings shown below there is a one to one correspondence between the zone the MIDI transmit receive channel and the part Zone 16 MIDI transmit channel 1
421. se this setting when you want other devices to follow the operation of the Fantom SLAVE The Fantom will be the slave Use this setting when you want the Fantom to receive MMC MIDI Machine Control from an external device and operate accordingly MEMD MMC MIDI Machine Control is a specification that allows MIDI messages to be used to control devices such as tape recorders VTR s and digital recording systems Thirty seven MMC commands are available including Stop and Play MMC Output MMC Output Switch Turn this ON if you want to synchronize with a hard disk recorder such as one from the Roland VS series When set ON MMC MIDI Machine Control related commands Play Stop and Locate will be transmitted Value OFF ON MTC Sync Output MTC Sync Output Switch Set this parameter ON when you want MTC MIDI Time Code to be transmitted to an external MIDI device If not set it OFF Value OFF ON MTC Frame Rate Specify the MTC frame rate Make sure that the same mode is set in both master and slave devices Value 24 24 frames per second 25 25 frames per second 29N 29 frames per second 29D 29 frames per second 30 30 frames per second HINT When synchronizing with a hard disk recorder such as the Roland VS series any frame rate is all right as long as the setting matches that of the Fantom However when synchronizing operation with video devices such as video decks the video device s fr
422. selected in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen will automatically be specified as the recording destination phrase track Mode Recording Mode Select how recording is to take place Value MIX Mix recording will be carried out Normally you will record using this method If a performance has already been recorded on the recording destination track your newly recorded performance will be added to the existing performance without erasing it By using this in conjunction with Loop recording you can record repeatedly over a specified area without erasing the previously recorded performance For example this is a convenient way to record a drum performance one instrument at a time bass drum gt snare drum hi hat etc REPLACE Replace recording will be carried out If a performance has already been recorded on the recording destination track it will be erased as you record your new performance Use this when you want to re record Count In Select how recording is to begin Value OFF Recording will begin immediately when you press STOP PLAY 1 MEAS When you press STOP PLAY a count playback will begin one measure before the recording start location and recording will begin when you reach the recording start location 2 MEAS When you press STOP PLAY a count playback will begin two measures before the recording start location and recording will begin when you reach the recording start location WAIT NOTE Recording
423. ser Library Ch Tx 1 7 Rx 1 41120 USER M Generat i onXV Category CMB Combination Lock Tone Sw DD D Beam MFX LoFi Compress Foot Type CHO Delay M REV SRU Hall r Realtime Control cutort Resonance Breath QD Decay Time WB Portamento EB Mono Poly EB octooun GB octup Blues Ha Tight Br XV Trom LegatoJ Soaring rp lass bone upitr JHrns2 Press 1 8 to select a patch 3 To switch the favorite sound bank hold down JUMP and press 1 8 Selecting from the Favorite List Window 1 In the PATCH PLAY screen make sure that the cursor is located at the patch group or patch number 2 While holding down SHIFT press LIST The Favorite List window appears Favorite List Patch Rhythm Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 1 PR R 121 Blues Harp HRM 1 PR C 038 Tight Brass BRS 1 PR C 053 xu Trombone BRS 1 PR C 103 LegatoJupitr SLD Bek 1 5 PR E 005 soaringHrns2 BPD Bank 5 1 Bank 6 1 Bank 1 Bank 8 Current USER 991 Generationxy CMB Patch Rhythm FavList Regist Renove Prevu EZ 3 Press 44 or w to choose the patch By pressing 7 Prevu you can audition the sound of the patch by means of a phrase preselected as being suitable for that particular type category of patch Phrase Preview 4 To switch banks press to move the cursor to the Bank 1 8 tab and press or w to select the desire
424. set Adjusts the TVA Envelope Attack Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 yon Patches also contain the Attack Time Offset setting p 48 The final TVA Envelope attack time value is therefore the sum of the tone s TVA Envelope Time 1 setting the patch s Attack Time Offset and the part s Attack Time Offset If the tone s Time 1 parameter is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Attack Time Offset to a positive value Release Time Offset Part Release Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Release Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 ne Patches also contain a Release Time Offset setting p 48 The final TVA Envelope release time value is therefore the sum of the tone s TVA Envelope Time 4 setting the patch s Release Time Offset and the part s Release Time Offset If the tone s Time 4 parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change in the Release Time Offset even when this is set to a positive value Decay Time Offset Part Decay Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Decay Time for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 Vibrate Rate Part Vibrate Rate For each part adjust the vibrato speed the rate at which the pitch is modulated The pitch will be modulated more rapidly for higher settings and more slowly with lower settings Value 64 63 Vibrate Depth Part
425. settings MFX TEMPLATE The multi effect settings of the currently selected performance will be set to the MFX template settings ore If the currently selected performance is preset memory PRST data initializing with the PRESET setting will set the values to those of the identically numbered user memory Es For details regarding MFX template refer to MFX Template List Sound Parameter List 5 If you ve set the initialization type to MFX TEMPLATE move the cursor to Template and select an MFX template Then move the cursor to MFX and select the relevant MFX MFX A MFX C 6 Press 8 Execute The initialization will be carried out and you ll be returned to the Performance Edit screen Copying Performance Settings Copy This operation copies the settings of any desired performance to the currently selected performance You can use this feature to make the editing process faster and easier Basic Procedure for Performance Copy 1 Access the PERFORMANCE PLAY screen and select the copy destination performance p 85 2 Access the Performance Edit screen p 91 3 Press 8 Copy The Performance Copy window appears Performance Copy Destination Temporary Performance Fantasm 4 Move the cursor to Mode and select the data that you wish to copy Three types of copy are available Performance Name Copy Performance Effects Copy and Performa
426. sk The file name extension MID is automatically attached Save Chain File Chain play settings will be saved to disk as a chain file The file name extension SVC is automatically attached 189 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility Disk Related Functions Disk Utility nore The filename extension will be MID whether you use Save SMF Format 0 or Save SMF Format 1 These two formats cannot be distinguished through file name extension When Save Song File is selected the settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to each part of the multitimbre performance will not be saved If you save using Save Song File the multitimbre performance settings will be saved in the state in which they were when the Save operation was executed If you change the multitimbre performance in the middle of a song and save the song after recording the settings at the recording start will not be saved In other words even if you play back from the beginning of the song it will begin with the multitimbre performance sounds that were selected when the Save operation was executed If you have switched multitimbres performances during the song you must use the Microscope window to store the bank select and program numbers for the desired multitimbre performance at the beginning of the song Even if you save using Save Song File playback will not use the correct sounds on MRC Pro sequencers other than
427. so be affected yon When you assign a pattern to a phrase track its pattern beat will be ignored and the pattern will use the time signature of the beat track If the pattern beat and the beat track have different settings the length of the measures will not match and the playback may become incorrectly aligned If this occurs re specify the time signature of the beat track p 128 1 Follow the procedure for Inputting Notes and Rests p 132 up through step 5 2 Press 4 Pattern The following window appears Step Recording Track TRK 1 Mode MIx 1 01 000 gt Pattern IK Name Beat 4 4 Length 8 Meas St Put note Pattern Back zm 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the pattern number 1 100 that you want to assign to the phrase track The pattern name of the selected pattern is displayed in Name Beat indicates the pattern beat and Length shows the number of measures in the pattern 4 Press 8 Put Pattern A Pattern Call message for the pattern selected by the Pattern parameter will be recorded You will advance by the length of the measures in that pattern and will be ready to input the next pattern HINT If you input the wrong pattern you can press BWD or 6 Step Back to delete the previously input Pattern Call message 5 Repeat the above steps to assign additional patterns 6 When you are fin
428. ss or w to select a Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen appears EX CN Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 57 47 Tone Select 7 4 EL AAM XOOCOOOOeILODODOO2D 4 Press 6 Write The Patch Write window appears General General Arpeggio Patch Name Generationxy E Patch Category COMBINATION Controller Voice Priority Effects Analog Feel 9 MEX Mono Poly Un Cutoff Offset 8 MFX Control Resonance Offset 3 RE Patch Tone D Reverb Env Mode sust sust sust sust z Delay Mode HORM HORM HORM NORM Delay Time 8 8 Rx Bender ON ON ON OH Generationxu gt USER 001 USER 004 Chordb USER 005 USER 006 VO USER 010 Ultras USER 002 Grand xu USER 003 GlobalWarmup der USER 007 TempoMadness USER 008 Stream Bell USER 009 Blue Mutes est Execute 5 Press or W to specify the save destination patch Save destination patch 45 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch HINT By pressing 7 Compare you can check the save destination patch Compare function 6 Press 8 Execute The display will indicate Are you sure 7 Press 8 OK to execute the save operation To cancel the operation press EXIT Auditioning the Save Destination Patch Compare Before you save a patch you can audition the patch which currently occupie
429. ss 58 Keyboard range lower multitimbre part Keyboard range lower performance part 33 Keyboard range lower tone ssssssssssssseeenee 58 Keyboard range lower zone sssssssssseeeree 99 Keyboard range upper multitimbre part Keyboard range upper performance part Keyboard range upper tone 58 Keyboard range upper zone ssssssssssssseeenenenee 99 Keyboard Sens e e E E A e r aan E a nasa 180 Keyboard sensitivity 180 Keyboard Velocity se 179 Keyboard Velocity patch sss 52 Keyboard Velocity performance sss 95 96 Keyboard Velocity rhythm set sssssssssssseeene 75 KOb p 163 L Legato Retrigger ss 48 Legato retrigger switch ss 48 Legato Switch multitimbre part 116 Legato Switch patch ss 48 Legato Switch performance part sss 100 Level multitimbre part ss 115 Level performance part 100 Level V Curve rhythm tone ss 82 Level V Curve tone 65 Level V Sens rhythm tone ss 82 Level V Sens tone sin 65 LFO LFOI delay time ie 67 LFOI delay time key follow sss 67 LFOIT fade mod lisme repre de nt LFOI fade time ee LFOI key trigger 2 jussu LEOL pan depth eee eee denter as LFO pitch depth LFOI rate LFO rate d
430. ssigned patterns will be played back according to the keys you press and their performances will be recorded nore If the Count In parameter is set to WAIT NOTE in the Recording Standby window recording will not begin even if you press a key that is assigned to a pattern or a key that is assigned as a Stop Trigger key 8 When you are finished recording press STOP PLAY The REC indicator will go dark 161 Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function Modifying the Sound in Real Time You can use the D Beam controller realtime controllers or a pedal to modify the sound while you perform MEM Here we will explain the procedures and settings for using these functions in Patch mode The operations are the same in Multitimbre mode or Performance mode Waving Your Hand Over the D Beam to Modify the Sound D Beam Controller The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it It can be used to apply various effects depending on the function that is assigned to it You can also create effects in which the sound changes instantaneously in a way that would not be possible by operating a knob or the bender lever 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 31 The D Beam area will indicate the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller M 1 4 4 STOP ao Internalsong PATCH User Library Ch Tx 1 7 Rx 1 J 120 USER M Generat i onXV Categor
431. ssion Switch For each rhythm tone specify whether MIDI Expression messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Creating a Rhythm Set Rx Hold 1 Rhythm Tone Receive Hold 1 Sw itch For each rhythm tone specify whether MIDI Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF Nore If NO SUS is selected for Env Mode parameter RHYTHM General this setting will have no effect Rx Pan Mode Rhythm Tone Receive Pan Mode For each rhythm tone specify how pan messages will be received Value CONTINUOUS Whenever Pan messages are received the stereo position of the tone will be changed KEY ON The pan of the tone will be changed only when the next note is played If a pan message is received while a note is sounding the panning will not change until the next key is pressed nore The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages Rhythm Pattern Settings Rhythm Ptn I I ti E tO Kit 1 DRM Key A ac Wave Switch i oo 4 General Rhythm Ptn Rhythm Ptn Switch OFF Hold ON Controler Style R amp B 4 Effects Recent Rate 196 MEX Shuffle Rate 50 Aona Shuffle Resolution a MFX Control Keyboard Velocity REAL Chorus Note Assign C4 Reverb Key Trigger OFF a v Write J Init J Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings p 69 Rhythm Ptn Rhythm Pattern Switch Rhythm Pattern
432. ssss Realtime controller ss Realtime erase ss Realtime phrase sequence as Realtime recording ss die Receive bank select switch multitimbre 119 Receive bank select switch performance sss 103 Receive Channel multitimbre part ss 118 Receive Channel performance part 103 Receive channel pressure switch multitimbre 119 Receive channel pressure switch performance 103 Receive expression switch multitimbre sss 119 Receive expression switch performance ssssss 104 Receive expression switch rhythm tone sss 74 Receive expression switch tone Receive GM system on switch Receive GM2 system on switch sssssssssssseeeeneene Receive GS reset switch rss Receive hold 1 switch multitimbre Receive hold 1 switch performance ss Receive hold 1 switch rhythm tone ss Receive hold 1 switch tone ss Receive modulation switch multitimbre 119 Receive modulation switch performance Receive pan mode rhythm tone sss 75 Receive pan switch multitimbre ss 119 Receive pan switch performance 104 Receive pitch bend switch multitimbre 119 Receive pitch bend switch performance 103 Receive polyphonic key pre
433. ssure switch multitimbre 119 Receive polyphonic key pressure switch performance 103 Receive program change switch ssss Receive program change switch multitimbre Receive program change switch performance Receive Switch multitimbre part ss Receive Switch performance part ssssssssssssss Receive system exclusive switch Receive volume switch multitimbre ss Receive volume switch performance ss Recording mode Realtime recording ss 129 Step recording ra Recording quantize ss 131 Recording sel ct esent iaeiiai edd ed 131 Recording Standby Redamper Sw 51 REGISTRY roren eee epe 17 Rehearsal function sin 132 Release Time Offset multitimbre part sese 116 Release Time Offset patch ss 48 Release Time Offset performance part 101 Remote Keyboard SW ssssnsssssssssssssessssesse 183 Remote keyboard switch 183 Rename eee tb iei iere dte te HI e tet Rename file Rename Filesi getto ee tein e qao ev dinis RESET nho den banca re noces Reso V Serns ss men rare a ep Rer nop ti TE deer Resonance rhythm tone ss 81 Resonance tone Resonance Offset multitimbre part es 116 Resonance Offset patch ss 47 Resonance Offset performance part 101 Resonance velocity sensitivity rhythm tone 81 Resonance velocity sensitivity tone 63 Resonance V Sensssss his en tn
434. sult in a longer time until the next pitch is reached For example Time 2 is the time over which the pitch changes from Level 1 to Level 2 Value 0 127 Ti T2 T3 T4 l i Pitch Lo r k T Time L Level 61 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF Patel LE to Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 2v Biv 4v Tone Select v2 S 4 a MFX Control TUF D Chorus Filter Type LPF BPF LPF LPF Cutoff Freq 8 33 51 51 Reverb cutoff KF TMC 198 e Matrix Ctrl Cutoff U Curue 5 2 1 1 TMT Cutoff U Sens 27 28 25 25 Resonance 21 22 48 48 Mave ResoU Sens o 8 8 8 Pitch Env Depth 38 55 e 8 Env U Curve 1 1 1 1 4 1 L Soft Pad A 1 R R A L write Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 TVF Filter Type Selects the type of filter A filter is a function that cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds brightness thickness and other qualities Value OFF No filter is used LPF Low Pass Filter This reduces the volume of all frequencies above the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq in order to round off or un brighten the sound This is the most common filter used in synthesizers BPF Band Pass Filter This leaves only the frequencies in the region
435. t Multitimbre and then press 8 Select You will be in Multitimbre mode and the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen appears Hew Song M 1 A4 STOP 2011 XU Pop Kit 16 m _ com gt wifi PR A 901 Grand XU 166 m Rn 22 XU Ac Bass 100 m 0 JE Grand XU 166 m or 4 4 Grand XU 166 m 0 H Sis Grand XU 100 m 0 n 3 fe Grand XU 166 m 0 zl Grand XU 100 m 0 Favorite Sound Bank1 Blues Ha XU Trum Ambient bendat Soaring rp pet Sax hord Hrns2 106 Functions in the MULTITIMBRE PLAY Screen Indicates the current sound generating mode MULTITIMBRE PLAY Hew Song Mz1 4 4 STOP Indicates the name of the currently selected song the measure location the time signature and the sequencer status Sets the Octave Shift Oct and the Transpose Trans Indicates the song file name Oo Manse fem Guo ame Interna Tsona aa a a Switches multi effects MFX Turns the RPS function on off RPS chorus CHO Turns Loop Play on off LOOP and reverb REV on and off Indicates the group of the selected multitimbre Indicates the MIDI receive channel used for switching multitimbres from an external MIDI device Indicates sets the tempo at which the song Arpeggio or D pattern is played User User Library Control Ch OFF USER
436. t check the region that is to be affected by the operation and correct it if necessary Track Check correct the track s or pattern that is to be deleted Value ALL Phrase tracks 1 16 the beat track and the tempo track TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track TEMPO Tempo track PTNO001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check correct the range of measures that are to be deleted If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Copying Phrases Copy This function copies a specified area of sequencer data It is convenient for repeating the same phrase several times You can copy patterns to a phrase track or copy data from a phrase track to a pattern 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or w to select Copy and then press 8 Select A message of COPY Select source point appears 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the copy source track or pattern If you want to specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the copy source track or pattern and press 8 Select to specify it A message of COPY Select destination point appears 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the
437. t inda noie tente tetris etii 185 Phrase Preview Settings Preview 185 Scale Tune settings Scale Tune 186 Disk Related Functions Disk Utility 187 Abg t Disk LEY MR TM RU A TN TRE IRA 187 Basic Disk Utility Operations 187 Selecting the Type of Files Displayed in the File List View 188 Loading a File from Disk into the Fantom Load 188 Loading Individual Tracks Patterns of Song Data 188 Loading Individual Items of Sound Data 189 saving Data on Disk Save scm neuter bee eb teen e dette dieere tete ntt 189 Copying a File to Another Name Copy 190 Renaming a File Rename uocant metere ee res tent tement entrer 191 Deleting Unwanted Files Delete sees eee eene enne 191 Executing Disk Related Functions Tools essen eene nnns 191 Preparing a Disk for Use by the Fantom ss 191 Modifying the Name of the Disk 192 Checking Files Recorded on Disk 192 Creating a Duplicate Disk ss 193 Transmitting Sound Settings Reset to Default Factory Settings 194 Transmitting Sound Settings Data Transfer eee 194 Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device ss 194 Transmitting Data to User Memory ss 195 Reset to Default Factory Settings Factory Reset 195 Installing the Wave Expansion Board 196 Cautio
438. t key If multiple keys are pressed the last pressed key will be valid Accent Rate Arpeggio Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 51 Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Shuffle Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 Shuffle Resolution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value The note value can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note Value F J Keyboard Velocity Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this param
439. t not to the internal sequencer or external MIDI devices Normally you should leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you do not want a specific part to be playing during song playback Value OFF ON Solo Part Select Select one part whose sound you want to play Turn it SEL to the part that you want to solo Parts other than the part you select here will not sound Mute Switch Temporarily mutes MUT or releases the mute OFF for the performance of each part Use this setting when for example you want to use the instrument for karaoke by muting the part playing the melody or when you want to play something using a separate sound module Value OFF MUT MEMD The Mute Switch parameter does not turn the part off but sets the volume to minimum so that no sound is heard Therefore MIDI messages are still received MIDI Filter Program Change Receive Program Change Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Bank Select Receive Bank Select Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Pitch Bend Receive Pitch Bend Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Pitch Bend messages wi
440. t recording the Realtime Recording window will appear STOP PLAY Start recording the Realtime Recording window Outside theRecording will not be displayed Standby window Recording Standby Track Count In Loop Punch Start Point End Point Quantize Grid Resolution Strength Shuffle Resolution Rate Reston RecSel Settings in the Metronome window are linked with the Sequencer group settings in the System Edit window Mode wx Tempo Rec orr 1 MEAS OFF E S OFF r REC ONLY 7 TYPE 1 Switching between Recording and Rehearsal modes and showing or hiding the Realtime Recording window See left column on p 132 in the Owner s Manual The operating procedure in Auditioning Sounds or Phrases While Recording Rehearsal Function has changed When the Recording Standby window is displayed pressing 8 Start causes recording to begin with the Realtime Recording window displayed while pressing STOP PLAY causes recording to begin without the Realtime Recording window appearing Subsequently you can switch between recording and rehearsal modes and between showing hiding the Realtime Recording window as shown in the diagram below Recording with the Realtime Recording window displayed Mz15 Mr ss Detfe Transic fee RHY USER 01 Fantasm D Beam RA Off Joss co Gap ee Internal Song B Recording P
441. t screen is displayed and press 1 A or 2 V to select the Arpeggio tab A screen like the one shown below appears I Per formance Ed it Fantasm General Arpeggio West End Bs SBS Part CT Switch JON Hold 0 Rhythm Ptn Style Controller Variation 2 Motif m PHRASE Zone Accent Rate 96 Part Shuffle Rate 5 MIDI Shuffle Resolution F Effects Keyboard Velocity REAL Octave Range le p Key Trigger OFF Zone Number IS J Init Copu Use CURSOR to move the cursor to Zone Number Turn the VALUE dial or press INC or DEC to select the zone linked to the part for which arpeggios are to be played 6 Next specify the range of the zone Press 2 V to select the Zone tab A screen like the one shown below appears Performance Edit Edit Fantasm General Zone West End Bs SBS Part1 Arpeggio zoned 2 3 4 I Transmit Channel 1 2 3 4 Rhythm Ptn int Switch ON on ON ON Controller Ext Switch oM ON oM OFF Ext Bank Select MSB Ext Bank Select LSB Part Ext Program Number MIDI Ext Level Effects ExtPan E 1 a X Write Init Copy 7 To set the lower limit of the range use CURSOR to move the cursor to Key Range Lower To set the upper limit move the cursor to Key Range Upper Press or t
442. t the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional keyboard set this to 100 If you want the pitch to rise two octaves set this to 200 Conversely set this to a negative value if you want the pitch to fall With a setting of 0 all keys will produce the same pitch Value 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 Env Depth Pitch Envelope Depth Adjusts the effect of the Pitch Envelope Higher settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope Value 12 12 Env V Sens Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the pitch envelope If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env T1 V Sens Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the Pitch envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a nega
443. t to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed Value FIXED 1 7 VISTA Env V Sens TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVF envelope Positive settings will cause the TVF envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause the effect to be less Value 63 63 Env T1 V Sens TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the Time 1 of the TVF envelope If you want Time 1 to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env T4 V Sens TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the Time 4 value of the TVF envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env Level 0 4 TVF Envelope Level 0 4 Specify the TVF envelope levels Level 0 Level 4 These settings specify how the cutoff frequency will change at each point relative to the standard cutoff frequency the cutoff frequency value specified in the TVF screen Value 0 127 81 Creating a Rhythm Set Env Time 1 4 TVF Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the TVF env
444. t will be copied Mode MEX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERE Reverb settings If you want to copy the multi effect settings of a multitimbre or performance select the MFX MFX A MFX C whose data will be copied Rhythm Tone Copy KEY Individual rhythm tone percussion sound settings assigned to each key will be copied to each key in the current rhythm set RHYTHM USER gjeet Temporary Rhythm R amp B Kit 1 R amp B Kit 1 Kegle 4 Key c 4 ns Copy source Key To specify the currently selected rhythm set as the copy source set Source to TEMP The copy source and copy destination key can also be specified Copy destination Key by pressing a key on the keyboard Creating a Rhythm Set For the Rhythm Tone Copy and Rhythm Set Effect Copy operations you can use the Compare function The Compare function allows you to play the copy source rhythm set To do so press 1 Compare to open the following window The copy source rhythm set can be switched in this window as well but it is not possible to select GM group rhythm sets After selecting the desired rhythm set return to the previous screen by pressing 1 Copy The Compare function cannot be used with Rhythm Set Effect Copy if PATCH MULTITIMBRE or PERFORMANCE is selected as the copy source Source The rhythm set auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played
445. tch WMT Velocity Control determines whether a different rhythm tone is played ON or not OFF depending on the force with which the key is played velocity When set to RND the rhythm set s constituent rhythm tones will sound randomly regardless of any Velocity messages Value OFF ON RND Vel Fade Lower Velocity Fade Width Lower This Determines what will happen to the tone s level when the tone is played at a velocity lower than its specified velocity range Higher settings produce a more gradual change in volume If you want notes played outside the specified key velocity range to not be sounded at all set this to 0 Value 0 127 Vel Range Lower Velocity Range Lower This sets the lowest velocity at which the waveform will sound Make these settings when you want different waveforms to sound in response to notes played at different strengths Value 1 UPPER Vel Range Upper Velocity Range Upper This sets the highest velocity at which the waveform will sound Make these settings when you want different waveforms to sound in response to notes played at different strengths Value LOWER 127 von If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper or the Upper below the Lower the other value will automatically be adjusted to the same setting Vel Fade Upper Velocity Fade Width Upper This determines what will happen to the tone s level when the tone is played at a velocity greater than its
446. tch Rhythm FauList Regist Renove Preuu IET 4 Press to move the cursor to the Bank 1 8 tab and press or W to select the bank in which you wish to register the rhythm set 5 Press to move the cursor within the list and press or W to select the number to which you wish to register The number you select here corresponds to 1 8 6 Press 5 Regist to execute the registration HINT By pressing 6 Remove you can cancel the rhythm set registration that is selected in the Favorite List window By pressing 7 Prevu you can audition the sound of the registered rhythm set Phrase Preview 7 When you have finished registering favorite sounds press EXIT to close the Favorite List window 73 Creating a Rhythm Set Creating a Rhythm Set Functions of Rhythm Set Parameters This section explains the functions the different rhythm set parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters Settings Common to the Entire Rhythm Set General Key JA at Rhythm Ptn Controller Effects MFR MFX Control Chorus Reverb Th E t 5 5 5 Lj Kit 1 DRM Wave Switch I 2 3 4 General Rhuthm Name Clock Source Tempo Rhythm Tone Tone Name Assign Type Mute Group Env Mode Bend Range X Rx Expression Rx Hold 1 Rx Pan Mode CONTINUOUS write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to
447. tch assigned to each part p 48 set this to PAT Value OFF ON PAT Portamento Time Part Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 49 set this to PAT Value 0 127 PAT nore For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this setting is ignored Cutoff Offset Part Cutoff Offset Adjusts the cutoff frequency for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 yon Patches also have a Cutoff Offset setting p 47 The final Cutoff frequency value is the sum of the tone Cutoff Frequency value and the patch and part Cutoff Frequency Offset values If the tone s cutoff frequency is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Cutoff Frequency Offset to a positive value Resonance Offset Part Resonance Offset Adjusts the Resonance for the patch or rhythm set assigned to a part Value 64 63 note Patches also have a Resonance Offset setting p 47 The final Resonance value is the sum of the tone Resonance value and the patch and part Resonance Offset values If the tone s resonance is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the resonance offset to a positive value Attack Time Offset Part Attack Time Off
448. tended time such as with crash cymbals the sounds are layered without previously played sounds being eliminated SINGLE Only one sound can be played at a time when the same key is pressed With continuous sounds where the sound plays for an extended time the previous sound is stopped when the following sound is played Mute Group On an actual acoustic drum set an open hi hat and a closed hi hat sound can never occur simultaneously To reproduce the reality of this situation you can set up a Mute Group The Mute Group function allows you to designate two or more rhythm tones that are not allowed to sound simultaneously Up to 31 Mute Groups can be used rhythm tones that are not belong to any such group should be set to OFF Value OFF 1 31 Env Mode Rhythm Tone Envelope Mode When a loop waveform p 71 is selected the sound will normally continue as long as the key is pressed If you want the sound to decay naturally even if the key remains pressed set this to NO SUS Value NO SUS SUST von If a one shot type Wave p 71 is selected it will not sustain even if this parameter is set to SUST Bend Range Rhythm Tone Pitch Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones 4 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides Value 0 48 Rx Expression Rhythm Tone Receive Expre
449. tes Complete the factory reset operation has been completed MULTITIMBRE Multitimbre PERFORMANCE Performance Transmit Source Data USER Data from user memory will be transmitted PR A E PRST Preset data will be transmitted XP A C Data from an Wave Expansion Board will be transmitted Transmitting Sound Settings Reset to Default Factory Settings 5 Press 8 Execute to execute data transmission While the data is being transmitted the display will indicate Processing When Complete is displayed the transmission has been completed 195 Installing the Wave Expansion Board Up to three optional Wave Expansion Boards one SR JV80 series two SRX series can be installed in the Fantom Wave Expansion Boards store Wave data patches and rhythm sets and by equipping the Fantom with these boards you can greatly expand your sound palette Cautions When Installing an Wave Expansion Board To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board Before you touch the board always first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged When handling the board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touching any of the electronic components or connectors Save the bag in which the board was o
450. the Fantom To play it back with correct sound record the corresponding Bank Select and Program numbers 4 Once you ve selected the format in which the data is to be saved press 8 Select The Save window appears SOUND a8 SUD Hame List Execute MEMD The title of the window will depend on the data saving format 5 You can assign the file a name of up to eight characters Press 5 Name and assign a file name in the Name window that appears D For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 30 MEM If a song name has already been assigned the first eight characters of the song name will automatically be assigned for the file name If no song name is assigned SONG_000 will be automatically be assigned for the file name A sound file and chain file will automatically be named SOUND_00 and CHAIN_00 respectively BINT To view the list of files on the disk press 6 List To select a chain file from the list move the cursor to the desired file and press 8 Select File Names and Song Names MRC Pro songs and Standard MIDI Files have song names in addition to file names The file name is used to distinguish the file on disk and must be specified before the file can be saved You will find it easier to manage your songs if you use the file name to categorize the type of song and use the song name to assign the title D Assign a song name in t
451. the Realtime Erase window You will return to the normal recording state Auditioning Sounds or Phrases While Recording Rehearsal Function The Rehearsal function lets you temporarily suspend recording during realtime recording This is convenient when you want to audition the sound that you will use next or to practice the phrase that you will record next 1 Begin realtime recording p 129 The Realtime Recording window appears Realtime Recording Press REC to close Erase eter 2 Press 8 Rehersl The REC indicator will blink indicating that you are in rehearsal mode In this state nothing will be recorded when you play the keyboard 3 To return to record mode press 8 Rehersl once again 132 Inputting Data One Step at a Time Step Recording Step Recording is the method of inputting notes and rests individually as if you were writing them onto a musical staff In addition to inputting notes this method can also be used to create a song by joining patterns Inputting Notes and Rests 1 Make sure that the preparations for recording have been performed as described in Before You Record a New Song p 127 HINT If you will be recording into an existing song load the desired song into internal memory p 136 Then use FWD or BWD to specify the measure at which you want to start recording The recording start measure is indicated by M at the top of each PLAY sc
452. the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 47 set this to PAT Value MON POL PAT von For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this setting is ignored Legato Switch Part Legato Switch You can add legato when performing monophonically Legato is a playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed creating a flowing feel with no borders between the notes This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist Turn this parameter ON when you want to use the Legato feature and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 48 set this to PAT Value OFF ON PAT von For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this setting is ignored 100 Creating a Performance Pitch Bend Range Part Pitch Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones 2 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 49 set this to PAT Value 0 24 PAT Portamento Switch Part Portamento Switch Specify whether portamento will be applied Turn this parameter ON when you want to apply Portamento and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the pa
453. the songs in the order of the chain you created 1 Access the Chain Play screen p 122 2 Either create a chain p 122 or load a chain from disk 3 If you want to perform Chain Play repeatedly press 8 Repeat and assign a check mark v to Repeat All Songs 4 Press STOP PLAY to start Chain Play Playback will begin starting from the song of step 1 If you want to stop playback before it is finished press STOP PLAY HINT If you want to begin playback from midway through the chain use amp Or W to move to the desired step and then press STOP PLAY If you want to proceed to the next step during Chain Play press D If you want to return to the beginning of the current step during Chain Play press 4 5 When you are finished with Chain Play press STOP PLAY von Chain Play cannot be started or stopped by a Start or Stop message from an external MIDI device Nor will MIDI Continue Song Position Pointer Song Select or Clock messages be received 124 Various Playback Methods Fast Forw ard and Rewind During Playback Fast forward rewind and jump can be performed during playback as well as while stopped Use the following procedures for each operation Fast forward Press FWD Continuous fast forward Press and hold FWD Rapid fast forward Press FWD and then press BWD Rewind Press BWD Continuous rewind Press and hold BWD Rapid rewind Press BWD and then pres
454. them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory except GM2 Wave Expansion Boards optional SR J V80 SRX Series The Fantom can be equipped with up to three Wave Expansion Boards one SR JV80 series two SRX series Wave Expansion Boards contain Wave data as well as patches and rhythm sets that use this Wave data which can be called directly into the temporary area and played Overview of the Fantom About the Onboard Effects Effect Types The Fantom has three built in effect units and you can independently edit each unit s settings Multi Effects The multi effects are multi purpose effects that completely change the sound type by changing the sound itself Contained are 90 different effects types select and use the type that suits your aims In addition to effects types composed of simple effects such as Distortion Flanger and other such effects you can also set up a wide variety of other effects even connecting effects in series or in parallel Furthermore while chorus and reverb can be found among the multi effects types the following chorus and reverb are handled with a different system Chorus Chorus adds depth and spaciousness to the sound You can select whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect Reverb Reverb adds the reverberation characteristics of halls or auditoriums Four different types are offered so you can select and use the type that suits your purpose How
455. this causes the currently executing function to be performing aborted 1 8 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever These buttons let you select register your favorite patches or This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato Quick performances The lower part of the screen will show the names of Start p 27 the favorite sounds you ve registered p 28 During editing these buttons execute a variety of functions and their function will differ depending on the screen p 28 MODE Opens the MODE window p 27 MENU Opens the MENU window The contents of the menu will depend on the current mode p 28 LIST Opens the LIST window The contents of the list will depend on the current location of the cursor p 28 17 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel Roland POWER ON AC IN IGRI POWER ON Switch Press to turn the power on off Quick Start p 4 AC Inlet Connect the included power cord to this inlet Quick Start p 3 PEDAL CTL2e CTL1 HOLD CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL Jack You can connect optional expression pedals EV 5 etc to these jacks By assigning a desired function to a pedal you can use it to select or modify sound or perform various other control You can also connect optional pedal switches DP 2 DP 6 etc to sustain sound Quick Start p 29 HOLD PEDAL Jack An optional pe
456. ti effects A B Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jack or OUTPUT B jack in stereo without passing through multi effects 1 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks in mono without passing through multi effects PAT The part s output destination is determined by the settings of the patch or rhythm set assigned to the part voe When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks MEM If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 HINT When setting the MFX set the output destination with the MEX Output Assign for the sound after it has passed through the multi effects Chorus and reverb are output in mono at all times The output destination of the signal after passing through the chorus is set with the Chorus Output Select and the Chorus Output Assign The output destination of the signal after passing through the reverb is set with the reverb Output Assign Q Part Output MFX Select Part Output Multi Effects Select Of the three types of multi effects that can be used simultaneously specify which multi effects will be used Value A
457. tialization procedure p 69 1 Make sure that the Rhythm Set you wish to save is selected 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility 3 Press or w to select Rhythm Edit and then press 8 Select The Rhythm Edit window appears I I ti a Ec t 5 5 h LJ Kit 1 DRM Keu EET aveswitch 27 5 4 General General Rhuthm Pin Rhuthm Name R amp B Kit 1 Clock Source RHYTHM Controller Tempo 126 Effects Rhythm Tone MFX Tone Name MFX Control Assign Type MULTI Chorus nl Mute Group OFF orus Env Mode sus Reverb Bend Range 2 Rx Expression OW Rx Hold 1 OH Rx Pan Mode CONTINUOUS 4 Press 6 Write The Rhythm Write window appears USER 001 R amp B Kit 1 USER 002 USER 003 USER 004 USER 005 USER 006 USER 007 USER 008 R amp B Kit 2 House Kit Techno Kit XU Pop Kit Pop Kit 2 XU Rock Kit Rock Kit 2 USER 009 XU USER 010 J Cor Execute 5 Press 4 or W to specify the save destination rhythm set Save destination rhythm set Creating a Rhythm Set HINT By pressing 7 Compare you can check the save destination rhythm set Compare function 6 Press 8 Execute The display will indicate Are you sure 7 Press 8 OK to execute the save operation To cancel the operation press EXIT Auditioning the
458. ting is ignored Legato Switch Part Legato Switch You can add legato when performing monophonically Legato is a playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed creating a flowing feel with no borders between the notes This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist Turn this parameter ON when you want to use the Legato feature and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 48 set this to PAT Value OFF ON PAT nore For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this setting is ignored Pitch Bend Range Part Pitch Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones 2 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 49 set this to PAT Value 0 24 PAT Portamento Switch Part Portamento Switch Specify whether portamento will be applied Turn this parameter ON when you want to apply Portamento and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 48 set this to PAT Value OFF ON PAT Portamento Time Part Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will chan
459. ting patch and edit it to create a new patch Since a patch is a combination of up to any four tones you should listen to how the individual tones sound before you edit Four Tips for Editing Patches Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to create p 32 It s hard to create a new sound that s exactly what you want if you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random It makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to what you have in mind Decide which tones will sound p 36 When creating a patch it is important to decide which tones you are going to use In the Patch Edit screen set Tone Switch 1 4 to specify whether each tone will sound on or not off It is also important to turn off unused tones to avoid wasting voices unnecessarily reducing the number of simultaneous notes you can play Tones for which the Tone Switch displays a check mark W will sound Check the Structure setting p 56 The important Structure parameter PATCH TMT determines how the four tones combine Before you select new tones make sure you understand how the currently selected tones are affecting each other Turn Effects off p 165 Since the Fantom effects have such a profound impact on its sounds turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can better evaluate the changes you re making Since you will hear the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are
460. tings Reset to Default Factory Settings Transmitting Data to User Memory NOE Patch rhythm set multitimbre and performance settings will be e XP A C can be selected only if the corresponding Wave transmitted to user memory Use this when you want to arrange Expansion Board is installed sounds in user memory in the desired order f the specified data will not fit completely into the transmission destination as much of the data as will fit will be transmitted Nove starting at the first number of the specified transmission If the Fantom internal memory already contains important data destination that you have created this operation will cause all of this data to Example be lost If you wish to keep the data you must save it on a disk p 189 or on an external MIDI device p 194 1 Press MENU to open the Menu window EE user KE 126 Source Destination i 2 Press or to select Data Transfer and then press 8 Select The Data Transfer window appears If the above settings are made and transmission is executed only the two PR A group patches 001 and 002 will be transmitted to USER 3 Move the cursor to Destination set it to USER and group patches 127 and 128 specify the first number of the transmission destination Transmit destination Reset to Default Factory Settings Factory Reset This restores all data in the Fantom to th
461. titimbre you can use three different multi effects simultaneously depending on the effect type p 175 Fig 1 When Output Assign parameter is set to MFX the output settings for Tone are ignored Performance Multitimbre Part 1 Part16 Multi Effects gt Chorus gt Reverb Fig 2 When Output Assign parameter is set to PAT the output settings for Tone are valid Performance Multitimbre Part 1 Patch Parti6 Multi Effects gt Chorus gt Reverb About the Sequencer A sequencer records keyboard performance and controller movements as MIDI messages sequencer data As the data plays back the recorded MIDI messages are sent to a sound generator which will produce the required sounds The sequencer actually plays instruments instead of the musician and since it can record a musical performance it is a tape recorder as well But in reality a sequencer doesn t record sound but actually the steps that cause the sound generator to produce sound so it offers several advantages Sound quality is always excellent the equivalent of first generation tape no matter how many times the data plays back tempo changes have no effect on pitch detailed editing is
462. tive value Value 63 63 Env T4 V Sens Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on Time 4 value of the pitch envelope If you want Time 4 to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Env Time KF Pitch Envelope Time Key Follow Use this setting if you want the pitch envelope times Time 2 Time 4 to be affected by the keyboard location Based on the pitch envelope times for the C4 key positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Larger settings will produce greater change Value 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Env Level 0 4 Pitch Envelope Level 0 4 Specify the pitch envelope levels Level 0 Level 4 It determines how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch the value set with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the Pitch screen at each point Positive settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower Value 63 63 Env Time 1 4 Pitch Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the pitch envelope times Time 1 Time 4 Higher settings will re
463. to do is store one song about 120 000 notes The song in internal memory is volatile and will be lost when the power is turned off To keep a song you must save it to disk Disk When keeping a recorded or edited song in internal memory save it to disk as a song file Up to 99 songs can be saved to a single disk A disk can contain five file types The three letter symbol shown in parentheses is a file name extension that distinguishes the different file types Song File SVQ This file is a song created on the Fantom It is called an MRC Pro song Other MRC Pro songs include those created on the XP 60 80 Standard MIDI File MID Standard MIDI File is a standard file format that allows sequencer data to be exchanged between most musical applications Fantom files can be saved as Standard MIDI Files This also allows you to play back commercially available music data GM scores that is compatible with the GM GM system Chain File SVC Chain Play is a function that successively plays back songs stored on the disk in the specified order Data File SVD This file contains Sound Generator and System settings Overview of the Fantom Basic Operation of the Fantom Switching the Sound Generator Mode IMODE The Fantom has three sound generating modes Patch mode Multitimbre mode and Performance mode You can select the sound generating mode state that is most appropriate for how you are playing the
464. to low RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded in random order NOTE ORDER Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered GLISSANDO Fach chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the lowest and the highest notes CHORD All notes you press will sound simultaneously AUTO1 The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the lowest key that was pressed AUTO 2 The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the highest key that was pressed PHRASE Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the pitch of that key If multiple keys are pressed the last pressed key will be valid Accent Rate Arpeggio Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 Shuffle Reso
465. to perform using RPS simply by selecting that song 4 Press STOP PLAY to play back the song HINT You must play back the song if you want patterns to play back in synchronization with the song or if you want multiple patterns to play in synchronization If the song is not playing the pattern will begin playing the instant you press the key regardless of the Trigger Quantize parameter setting The pattern will be played back according to the time signature of the song beat track This means that if the phrase track contains no sequencer data the song will not play and it will not be possible to play back patterns in synchronization In such cases you can insert several blank measures into a phrase track and play them as a loop 5 Press a key to which a pattern is assigned making the pattern play If you want to stop playback midway through the pattern press the Stop Trigger key Alternatively if the Playback Mode parameter is set to LOOP2 you can stop the pattern playback by pressing the same key once again MEMD Up to eight patterns can play back simultaneously 160 Playing a Phrase at the Touch of a Finger RPS Function yon If you turn off the RPS function while a pattern is playing the keyboard will return to the normal playing state but the pattern will continue playing If you want to stop playback of this pattern turn on the RPS function once again and perform the appropriate operation P
466. to the Fantom s memory p 188 Save This function saves data to disk p 189 Copy Copy File Saves the file under a different name p 190 Rename Modify the filename gt p 191 Delete Delete File This function deletes unwanted files from disk p 191 Tools Execute disk related functions such as formatting or modifying the name volume label gt p 191 Basic Disk Utility Operations 1 Insert the disk with the song into the disk drive 2 Press MENU to open the Menu window 3 Press or w to select Disk Utility and then press 8 Select The Disk Utility window appears Disk type 2DD 2HD Disk name volume label Disk free space Free AME NL IRv etiz 1 2 DEMO_08 3 DEMO J 4 DEMO_00 2 Disappearance 25KB List of files 5 FANTOM 1KB 6 RPS DEMO SUG RELAX WITH RPS Z1KB stored on the disk Type of files v sup 7 sve v sua v mip 7 suc displayed in the file list Load J Save J Copy Rename Derete ES View 4 According to the function you want to execute select the appropriate file from the file list Press or w to make your selection HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing or W you can jump to the beginning or end of the file list 5 Press 1 6 to select the desired function The window for the selected function appears 6 Check the contents of the windows for the various functions and pres
467. trols sequencer stop play While stopped you can hold down SHIFT and operate this to perform MIDI Update p 124 REC The display changes to the Recording Standby window p 129 Panel Descriptions 9 VALUE Dial This is used to modify values If you hold down SHIFT as you turn the VALUE dial the value will change in greater increments p 29 DEC INC This is used to modify values If you keep on holding down one button while pressing the other the value change accelerates If you press one of these buttons while holding down SHIFT the value will change in bigger increments p 29 CURSOR Moves the cursor location up down left right p 29 SHIFT REGISTRY SHIFT This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to execute various functions REGISTRY By holding down this button and pressing 1 8 you can register a favorite sound p 46 p 73 p 94 DJ UMP BANK JUMP This button is used in conjunction with the cursor buttons to BEAT Beat Indicator This blinks in sync with the tempo and beat of the song jump the cursor location BANK By holding down this button and pressing 1 8 you can 6 select the favorite sound bank p 33 p 86 EXIT Return to the PLAY screen or close the currently open window In Display This displays information regarding the operation you are some screens
468. truments generally do not play melodies there is no need for a percussion instrument sound to be able to play a scale on the keyboard It is however more important that as many percussion instruments as possible be available to you at the same time Therefore each key note number of a rhythm set will produce a different percussion instrument Rhythm Set Note Number 98 D7 Rhythm Tone Percussion instrument sound EN mp Ce m m Cva m Ec pee EN Ec pee EN Each percussion instrument consists of the following four elements For details refer to the explanations for Tones WG Wave Generator TVF Time Variant Filter TVA Time Variant Amplifier Envelope Multitimbre A multitimbre consists of a patch or rhythm set assigned to each of the 16 parts and can simultaneously handle 16 sounds This allows you to create a set of sounds for use with a song you create on the sequencer or to enjoy ensemble performance From the keyboard you can play only the currently selected part the current part Because the Fantom sound generator can control multiple sounds instruments it is called a Multi timbral sound generator Performances A performance is like a multitimbre in that it also has a patch or rhythm set assigned to each of the 16 parts and can simultaneously handle 16 sounds However unlike a multitimbre you can play multiple parts simultaneously from the keyboard
469. ts the currently selected multitimbre in user memory to the factory settings MFX TEMPLATE The multi effect settings of the currently selected multitimbre will be set to the MFX template settings vn If the currently selected multitimbre is preset memory PRST data initializing with the PRESET setting will set the values to those of the identically numbered user memory D For details regarding MFX template refer to MFX Template List Sound Parameter List 5 If you ve set the initialization type to MFX TEMPLATE move the cursor to Template and select an MFX template Then move the cursor to MFX and select the relevant MFX MFX A MFX C 6 Press 8 Execute The initialization will be carried out and you ll be returned to the Multitimbre Edit screen Copying Multitimbre Settings Copy This operation copies the settings of any desired multitimbre to the currently selected multitimbre You can use this feature to make the editing process faster and easier Basic Procedure for Multitimbre Copy 1 Access the MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen and select the copy destination multitimbre p 107 2 Access the Multitimbre Edit screen p 112 3 Press 8 Copy The Multitimbre Copy window appears Multitimbre Copy Destination 691 p Temporary Multitimbre FANTOM Temp FANTOM Temp 4 Move the cursor to Mode and select the data that you wish to copy Three types of c
470. ttern will finish playing is shown at the right of the symbol yon f the pattern called by the Pattern Call message extends beyond the last measure of the song the pattern playback will be interrupted at that point Only one pattern can be played at a time by Pattern Call messages in a given phrase track This means that if a Pattern Call message is recorded at a location before the previous pattern has finished playing the pattern that was playing will be interrupted and the next pattern will begin playing If more than one Pattern Call message is recorded at the same location the message that is displayed last in the Microscope window will be played Although it is possible to record Pattern Call messages in a pattern they will not be played If you want to place the data of another pattern into a pattern use Track Edit to copy the data Ex System Exclusive messages These are MIDI messages used to make settings unique to the Fantom such as sound settings Input the data between F0 and pg iS For details on system exclusive messages refer to MIDI Implementation Sound Parameter List Data Handled by the Tempo Track The Tempo track records tempo data for the song Tempo Change This data specifies the tempo The song will play back according to the Value of the tempo change The value displayed in J is the tempo at which the song will actually play the playback tempo and
471. turned off the results of your modifications will be easier to hear Actually sometimes just changing effects settings can give you the sound you want 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch whose settings you wish to modify p 32 yon You cannot edit the patches in the PR E GM2 group HINT If you want to create all your patches from the ground up rather than the patches that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 43 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears System Edit Song Edit Pattern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer Factory Reset Demo Play O 3 Press amp or W to select a Patch Edit and then press 8 Select The Patch Edit screen appears LI Generationxy CMB Tone Switch 184 2 Slv 4v Tone Select 1j 2 3 4 General General Patch Name Generationxy Arpeggio DEM dled sn Patch Category Controller Voice Priority Effects Analog Feel MFX Mono Poly Cutoff Offset 8 Resonance Offset 8 Patch Tone J C GO CD CD Reverb Env Mode sust susr susr susr Delay Mode HORM HORM j HORM HORM Delay Time a a 6 a Rx Bender OH ON OH OH MFX Control Chorus a X Write Init Copy 4 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Press 1 A or 2 to select the tab for the editing group that contains the parameter you wish to
472. tween the down beat and the next down beat A setting of 0 will move the up beat note to the same timing as the previous down beat A setting of 100 will move it to the same timing as the following down beat Original performance data Rate 25 LL n n LL Rate 50 Rate 100 b Up Up Up Up beat beat beat beat Range Specifies the range of note numbers to be quantized For example if you want to quantize the notes between C3 and C4 specify C3 C4 You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the keyboard Channel MIDI Channel Specifies the MIDI channel s of the notes to be quantized If you wish to quantize all notes set this parameter to ALL When quantizing only the notes of a specific MIDI channel select that channel Value ALL 1 16 iting Songs 7 When you are finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute Preview Function The Preview function allows you to hear how quantizing will work while you are still setting Quantize parameters before you execute operation This is called the Preview function If you modify parameter values during preview playback the next preview playback will include those latest value changes Try various parameter settings to find the one that works best note Pattern Call events assigned to a phrase track or muted phrase tracks cannot be previewed Pressing STOP PLAY when the Track Edit Quantize
473. u want to silence the playback of a specific instrument you can mute the phrase track that contains the sequencer data for that instrument I For details on the procedure refer to Silencing the Playback of a Track Mute p 137 Changing the Playback Tempo of a Song The tempo at which a song will play back is recorded on its tempo track but the tempo of the entire song can be adjusted during playback The tempo at which the song actually plays is called the playback tempo yon The playback tempo is a temporary setting It will be lost if you switch to another song or turn off the power If you want the song to always play back at this tempo you must re save the song to disk p 135 1 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the tempo display J in the upper part of the PLAY screen 2 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the playback tempo MEMD The playback tempo can be adjusted over a range from one half to double the tempo change values recorded in the tempo track HINT If you want to reset the playback tempo to the tempo change values recorded in the tempo track hold down JUMP and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC Using a Controller to Change the Playback Tempo You can assign the Tempo Control function to any one of the following controllers which then makes it easy to adjust the tempo during song playback For details on how to make this setting refer to the explanatory page for
474. ue ALL Phrase Tracks 1 16 TRK 1 TRK 16 The specified phrase track PTN001 PTN100 The specified pattern Measure for Edit Range Check modify the range of measures whose velocity will be changed If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Bias Use this parameter to add a fixed bias amount to all velocities If you want to increase the velocity values by 10 set this to 10 Value 99 99 Magnify Set this parameter if increases or decreases in velocity variations are desired For less velocity variation use settings of 99 or less For more velocity variation set it to 101 or greater With a setting of 100 velocity values do not change Value 0 200 Channel MIDI Channel Specifies the MIDI channel s of notes for which velocity will be modified To modify velocity for all notes set this parameter to ALL When modifying the velocity for only the notes of a specific MIDI channel select that MIDI channel using this parameter Value ALL 1 16 Range Specifies the range of note numbers for which velocity will be modified For instance to modify velocity for C3 to C4 note range set this parameter to C3 C4 You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the keyboard 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation Editing Songs Changing the MIDI Channel Change Channel This function transfers the MIDI ch
475. ulti effects A B Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jack or OUTPUT B jack in stereo without passing through multi effects 1 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks in mono without passing through multi effects TONE Outputs according to the settings for each tone MEMD When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks This parameter is Rhythm Output Assign when a rhythm set is being selected You can specifies for each rhythm set how the direct sound will be output MEMD If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 Tone Output Assign Sets the direct sound s output method for each tone Value MFX Output in stereo through multi effects You can also apply chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through multi effects A B Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jack or OUTPUT B jack in stereo without passing through multi effects 1 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks in mono without passing through multi effects yon If the Patch Output Assign is set to anything other than TONE these settings will be ignored When the Structure
476. unds set with Output Assign to be output from the OUTPUT B jacks is not output from the PHONES jack Be sure to have any sound you want to hear through the headphones set to MIX PARALLEL Output according to each Output Assign settings Output Gain This adjusts the output gain from the Fantom s Analog Out and Digital Out When for example there are relatively few voices being sounded boosting the output gain can let you attain the most suitable output level for recording and other purposes Value 12 6 0 6 12 dB Keyboard Velocity Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted when you play the keyboard If you want actual keyboard velocity to be transmitted set this to REAL If you want a fixed velocity value to be transmitted regardless of how you play specify the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 179 Settings Common to All Modes System Function Settings Common to All Modes System Function Keyboard Sens Keyboard Sensitivity Adjusts the keyboard s touch Value LIGHT Light weight synthesizer keyboard like MEDIUM Standard HEAVY Acoustic piano simulation Aftertouch Sens Aftertouch Sensitivity Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity Higher values will allow Aftertouch to be applied more easily Normally you will leave this at 100 Value 0 100 Power Up Mode Specifies the condition that the Fantom will be in when the power is turned on Value LAST S
477. urned off will be indicated by a dashed outline in the Effects setting screen Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want Repeat steps 5 6 to specify how the sound will be output oN OU If you wish to save the changes you ve made press 6 Write to perform the Save operation p 93 p 114 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the previous screen Using the MFX A C Simultaneously Three types of multi effects can be used simultaneously only if the MFX A Source parameter is set to PRF or MLT p 173 Only 50 of the 90 types of multi effects allow three multi effects to be used simultaneously For details refer to Multi Effects Parameters Sound Parameter List 170 Adding Effects Signal Flow Diagram and Parameters Effects Src MFz n FRF cHol FRF REM PEF nauTPUT o D Ho Cc O 1s i d st rinar og qo Q O I Chorus z A 12 au 9 CO Revers A 127 A O SRI oom l add 171 EN Adding Effects Adding Effects Q Part Select Select the part for which you want to make settings Value 1 16 Part Output Assign Specifies for each part how the direct sound will be output Value MFX Output in stereo through multi effects You can also apply chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through mul
478. used in creating rhythm sets and the functions of the rhythm set parameters How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings Start with an existing rhythm set and edit it to create a new rhythm set Rhythm sets are created from a collection of multiple rhythm tones percussion instruments You can change the assignments of the rhythm tones for each key with rhythm set edit 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the rhythm set whose settings you wish to modify p 40 yon You cannot edit the rhythm sets in the PR E GM2 group HINT If you want to create all your rhythm sets from the ground up rather than the rhythm sets that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 69 2 Press MENU The Menu window appears System Edit S Edit attern Edit Chain Play Disk Utility Data Transfer 3 Press or W to select Rhythm Edit and then press 8 Select The Rhythm Edit screen appears I IL Ec t 85 L3 Kit 1 DRM MFX Chorus Reverb 4 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Press 1 A or 2 V to select the tab for the editing group that contains the parameter you wish to edit E For details on how the parameters are grouped refer to Key ERY lave Switch 2 7 4 General General Rhythm Pin Rhythm Name R amp B Kit 1 Clock Source RHYTHM Controller Tempo na Effects Rhythm Tone MFX Control T
479. ut Assign Multi Effects Output Assign Adjusts the output destination of the sound that has passed through the multi effects Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo MEMO If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM General is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 179 172 Adding Effects Chorus Type Selects either chorus or delay Value 0 Off Neither chorus or delay is used 1 Chorus Chorus is used 2 Delay Delay is used 3 GM2 Chorus General MIDI 2 chorus B Chorus Output Select Specifies how the sound routed through chorus will be output Value MAIN Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo REV Output to reverb in mono M R Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo and to reverb in mono HINT When set to MAIN or M R the OUTPUT jack from which the sound is output is set in Chorus Output Assign QD D Chorus Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus Value 0 127 Chorus Output Assign Selects the pair of OUTPUT jacks to which the chorus sound is routed when Chorus Output Select is set to MAIN or M R Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo yon When Chorus Output Select is set to REV this setting will have no effect MEMO If the Mix Parallel parameter
480. v will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Poly Key Pressure Receive Polyphonic Key Pressure Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI polyphonic key pressure messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Modulation Receive Modulation Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Modulation messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Volume Receive Volume Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Volume messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Pan Receive Pan Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Pan messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Expression Receive Expression Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Expression messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark W will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Hold 1 Receive Hold 1 Switch For each MIDI channel specify whether MIDI Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF Assigning a check mark v will turn it on and removing the check mark will turn it off Phase Loc
481. ve Shift parameter can all be seen as doing the same thing to the sound i e changing the pitch of the sound For example if C4 Middle C is played with the Coarse Tune parameter set to 12 the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 For example if C4 Middle C is played with the Octave Shift parameter set to 1 the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 However internally these function very differently When the Coarse Tune parameter is set to 12 the pitch itself is raised one octave On the other hand when the Octave Shift parameter is set to 1 it is the same as pressing the keys one octave up In other words use the Coarse Tune parameter when changing the pitch and the Octave Shift parameter when you want to shift the entire keyboard for example when the number of keys is insufficient Fine Tune Part Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the part s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMO One cent is 1 100th of a semitone 115 Creating a Multitimbre Creating a Multitimbre Mono Poly Part Mono Poly Set this parameter to MON when the patch assigned to the part is to be played monophonically or to POL when the patch is to be played polyphonically When using the setting of the patch assigned to each part p 47 set this to PAT Value MON POL PAT yon For the part to which the rhythm set is assigned this set
482. ve a CD CO MFX Wave Group ir i IHT INT Wave No XD 8452 6034 eese 8198 MFX Control Wave No CR d Chorus Gain 12 6 12 Reverb FAM Switch ON OFF OFF FRM Color 3 1 1 1 Matrix Ctrl FXM Depth e a a E TMT Tempo Sync OFF OFF OFF OFF Wave Pitch KF 108 198 160 100 n L LZ J Init Copy Move the cursor withthe 4 w 4 and gt cursor buttons AN Nd 4 amp moves the cursor up w moves the cursor down moves the cursor to the left gt moves the cursor to the right E By holding down SHIFT and pressing a cursor button you can make the cursor location jump to the edge of the same block By holding down JUMP and pressing a cursor button you can make the cursor location jump to another block If you hold down one cursor button while you also press the cursor button for the opposite direction the cursor will move more rapidly in the direction of the first pressed cursor button Modifying a Value To modify the value use the VALUE dial or the INC DEC buttons VALUE In each screen of the Fantom you can use the cursor to move the area displayed as black characters on white background and modify its value yon Each parameter has its own range of possible values so you cannot set any value smaller than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value VALUE Dial Rotating the VALUE dial
483. viding speedy data entry and editing for both realtime and step recording In conjunction with the power sound generator the Fantom is a serious music production environment in a single package In addition the Fantom lets you start recording immediately from any mode whether you are editing sounds or performing simply by pressing the REC button You can record your improvisations in real time and create songs based on your captured inspirations It goes without saying that you can use Micro editing to edit your recorded data in every detail Since the large display lets you view 16 tracks of recorded data at once editing can be performed faster more efficiently and in greater detail than on previous workstations Sequencer data can be saved and loaded in the native MRC format or as SMF The built in floppy disk drive makes it easy to exchange data with another sequencer or computer The Fantom boasts a new Multitimbre mode By displaying 16 parts simultaneously this lets you quickly create orchestrations and makes song arrangements simple and intuitive Functions that stimulate your creativity The Fantom provides numerous functions that enhance its playability for realtime performance and let you develop this into musical productions Numerous drum patterns based in actual professional drum playing are built in Twelve types of pattern variations including fills are assigned to an octave of the keyboard allowing you to perform
484. vity tone 61 Pitch envelope time 1 4 rhythm tone 80 Pitch envelope time 1 4 tone 61 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity rhythm tone Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity tone Pitch envelope time key follow sss Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity rhythm tone Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity tone sssssssss 206 Pitch Key follow e te t tte te pate edes 61 Diteh KE ie ere ies nce Oe DAR IH M eve IRE een este 61 Polarity patchy ss etitm eee reete 53 Polarity performance 98 Polarity rhythm set 77 Poly Key Pressure multitimbre 119 Poly Key Pressure performance sse 108 POFtamment e ooreis E Ei ride sieste 37 48 Portamento Mode ss 49 Portamento Start Portamento Switch multitimbre part 116 Portamento Switch patch ss 48 Portamento Switch performance part sss 101 Portamento Time multitimbre part E Portamento Time patch ins othe aisles Portamento Time performance part sss 101 Portamento Type ns 49 POWEBRON SWitCh 25 nr eee ra ee tcs 18 Power Up Mode RRC VAC We cosi ee e T Re MR sh ie EU Cet seat Preview Mode ss Preview note number 1 4 Preview velocity 1 4 S Previ ee BUT CRT RO He h ES dede peti dens 34 Program Change multitimbre
485. window is displayed selects Preview mode The two measures from the current location of the song will play back repeatedly The preview start location can also be specified by pressing FWD or BWD To exit Preview mode press STOP PLAY once again 141 Editing Songs Erasing Unwanted Performance Data Erase This function erases all the sequencer data inside the specified area As the erased data is replaced by rests the original measures will remain 1 Access the Song Edit screen and then load the song you want to edit p 136 2 Press 8 Track Edit The Track Edit window appears 3 Press or to select Erase and then press 8 Select A message of ERASE Select target point will be displayed 4 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the first measure of the track or pattern that you want to erase To specify all tracks press 7 TrkAII 5 Hold down SHIFT and press to move the cursor to the last measure of the track or pattern that you want to erase and press 8 Select to specify it The Track Edit Erase window appears Track Measure 9961 for 1 Status ALL Range Channel ALL 6 Use CURSOR to move the cursor to the desired parameter and turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting First check the region that is to be affected by the editing operation and make corrections if you want to change it Track Check modify the tra
486. y CMB Combination Lock f REV SRU Hall Q cu Resonance GD Portamento E Mono Poly QD Decay Time KJ octup Breath ED oct Down Blues Ha Tight Br XU Trom LegatoJ Soaring IP lass bone upitr JHrns2 The MULTITIMBRE PLAY screen does not have a D Beam display 2 Press D BEAM ON OFF to turn on the D Beam controller 3 While playing the keyboard to produce sound place your hand over the D Beam and slowly move it up and down An effect will be applied to the sound depending on the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller 4 Toturn off the D Beam controller press ON OFF once again to make the indicator go dark 162 The usable range of the D Beam controller The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller Waving your hand outside this range will produce no effect Mb The ON OFF indicator will blink while the D Beam controller is responding When your hand leaves the usable range of the D Beam controller the ON OFF indicator will stop blinking and will remain lit The response of the D Beam Controller can also be checked in the D Beam area of the display This is displayed graphically as a bar that lengthens as you move your hand closer and shortens as you move your hand away nore The usable range of the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight Ple
487. y back at this initial tempo Thus playback tempo is determined by the Tempo track setting If you modify the tempo during playback the overall tempo of the song will be controlled by the setting you make Beat Track The Beat track records the time signature of each measure of a song Set the Beat track when recording a new song or when you want to change time signature during a song Pattern Track You can also use the Pattern track to record musical passages separately from the Phrase tracks Musical data in the Pattern track is regarded as separate Patterns Up to 100 Patterns can be created and each Pattern can contain data for 16 MIDI channels as with Phrase tracks Patterns can be assigned to a Phrase track so if you are using repetitive phrases such as drums and bass it is convenient to record each musical phrase in a pattern and then use the MICROSCOPE screen to assign the pattern to the track p 134 In this case the Phrase track contains only the Pattern Call numbers that refer to the desired Pattern and not the actual Pattern data Therefore the same Pattern can be used any number of times with a negligible increase in memory used The RPS function p 159 for immediate playback also applies to Patterns Patterns are therefore convenient for live performance if you ve recorded necessary sequencer data as Patterns and take them to the gig Patterns also make fine scratch pads for musical ideas Songs and the Sou
488. y is used 1 Chorus Chorus is used 2 Delay Delay is used 3 GM2 Chorus General MIDI 2 chorus B Chorus Output Select Specifies how the sound routed through chorus will be output Value MAIN Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo REV Output to reverb in mono M R Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo and to reverb in mono HINT When set to MAIN or M R the OUTPUT jack from which the sound is output is set in Chorus Output Assign QD D Chorus Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus Value 0 127 Chorus Output Assign Selects the pair of OUTPUT jacks to which the chorus sound is routed when Chorus Output Select is set to MAIN or M R Value A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo von When Chorus Output Select is set to REV this setting will have no effect Reverb Type Selects the type of reverb Value 0 Off Reverb is not used 1 Reverb Normal reverb 2 SRV Room This reverb simulates typical room acoustic reflections 3 SRV Hall This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic reflections 4 SRV Plate This reverb simulates a reverb plate a popular type of artificial reverb unit that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate You can also achieve unusual metallic sounding reverbs using SRV Plate 5 GM2 Reverb General MIDI 2 reverb
489. y the range of measures that are to be transposed If you set for to ALL all measures will be specified Range Specifies the range of note numbers to be transposed For instance if you wish to transpose all notes within the C3 to C4 range set this parameter to C3 C4 You can also specify the key range by pressing keys on the keyboard 145 Editing Songs Editing Songs Bias Specifies the transpose amount in semitone steps Set a positive value to raise the pitch or a negative value to lower the pitch If you do not want to transpose set this to 0 Value 127 127 Channel MIDI Channel Specifies the MIDI channel s of the notes to be transposed Set this parameter to ALL for transposing all notes When transposing only the notes of specific MIDI channel s select the MIDI channel s using this parameter Value ALL 1 16 7 When you have finished making settings press 8 Execute to execute the operation If You Want to Lower the Bass Sound One Octave If your bass is played one octave higher than the staff notation use the Transpose function to lower it one octave To lower the bass sound one octave set the Range parameter to Lowest Highest for the bass part and set the Bias parameter to 12 When You Want to Change Percussion Sounds You can also use the Transpose function to change percussion sounds Suppose you want to change cong
490. y when the next note is played If a pan message is received while a note is sounding the panning will not change until the next key is pressed yon The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages Redamper Sw Tone Redamper Switch You can specify on an individual tone basis whether or not the sound will be held when a Hold 1 message is received after a key is released but before the sound has decayed to silence If you want to sustain the sound set this ON When using this function also set the Rx Hold 1 parameter ON This function is effective for piano sounds Value OFF ON Arpeggiator Settings Arpeggio LI Generationxu CMB Tone Switch Iv 12 av av Tone Select iv 2 3 4 General Arpeggio TEK Switch OFF Hold oF Controller Style HOTE VALUES Effects Variation MFX Motif DOWN Accent Rate 198 MF Control T Shuffle Rate 56 Chorus Shuffle Resolution 7 Reverb Keyboard Velocity REAL s Octave Range g Key Trigger OFF a LES write J Init Copy For details on the setting refer to How to Make the Patch Settings p 42 Arpeggio Switch Arpeggio Switch Switches the Arpeggiator on off Value OFF ON Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Value OFF ON Style Arpeggio Style Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played LEN F

Roland Fantom user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents